TikTok CEO aims to defend app's safety measures before Congress

After being embroiled in controversies about its data privacy for more than a year, TikTok CEO Chew is set to testify before Congress on Thursday to address “misconceptions” about the app and its parent company, ByteDance. Lawmakers have long expressed concerns about the app’s connections with the Chinese government and its possible use to target American consumers, leading to calls for a ban on the app in the US. Chew aims to argue that banning TikTok would harm the country’s economy and that the Chinese government has no control over the app.
During his testimony, Chew plans to highlight the app’s safety features and Project Texas, a billion-dollar initiative designed to protect the data of US users. He will also mention that the company is currently erasing historically protected US user data stored in non-Oracle servers and that the Chinese government cannot access data under their current app structure.
“ByteDance is not an agent of China or any other country. Rather, our approach has been to work transparently and cooperatively with the U.S. government and Oracle to design robust solutions to address concerns about TikTok’s heritage,” reads Chew’s remarks.
Tough times for TikTok
Despite TikTok’s efforts to safeguard US user data, recent reports of the FBI investigating the company for spying on US journalists have worsened matters for the company. Lawmakers are likely to criticize Chew for TikTok’s connections to ByteDance and China. Nevertheless, Chew contends that the allegations that TikTok is “beholden to the Chinese government” are untrue, and he describes ByteDance as a “global enterprise” established by Chinese entrepreneurs.
TikTok CEO Chew’s appearance before Congress will be his first, and his testimony could have a significant impact. With lawmakers threatening to ban the app unless the company divests from ByteDance, Chew’s defence of TikTok’s safety measures and its parent company’s autonomy will determine the company’s fate in the US.
The post TikTok CEO aims to defend app’s safety measures before Congress appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

GeForce NOW gets a few new games this week plus expanded access

NVIDIA GeForce NOW is expanding access to the RTX 4080 tier this week. Gamers rejoice! The service is also getting a small handful of new games onto the service today, one of which is Tchia. A delightful little game that doesn’t force you into doing tasks for gameplay progression. Rather you can pick and choose what you want to do.
But of course, Tchia is not the only new title you can stream using GeForce NOW. The service is also getting four other titles today, including Chess Ultra, Amberial Dreams, Symphony of War: The Nephilim Saga, and No One Survived. Both Chess Ultra and Tchia are new releases that just came out this week. And both are currently only available on the Epic Games Store. Tchia will be getting a Steam release at some point. But it’s unclear when that will be, as the Steam page merely states that it’s coming soon.
You can grab Tchia on Epic though for $29.99, and it’s even on sale for $26.99 until March 28. As for Chess Ultra, it’s one of Epic’s free games right now. Its normal price will be $12.99 once the sale ends on March 30. So you might want to grab this one if you enjoy Chess.
GeForce NOW 4080 superPOD access expands to Sofia, Bulgaria

GeForce NOW continues to maintain a steady stream of incoming games, all of which can be played with high fidelity and tons of cool features that only an RTX 40 series GPU can provide.
But all of that only matters if it’s accessible where you live. Today, NVIDIA has announced the expanded access of its 4080 superPODS to Sofia, Bulgaria. The GeForce NOW service itself was already available in the region, but not with the Ultimate tier. Now subscribers in the region will be able to experience games in the cloud with NVIDIA’s latest enhancements. 4080 superPODS are also available in San Jose, Los Angeles, Dallas, Chicago, Ashburn, Montreal, London, Paris, Amsterdam, and Frankfurt.
Additionally, NVIDIA is giving away a free in-game reward for Marvel’s Midnight Suns players. Captain Marvel’s Medieval Marvel suit. Premium and Ultimate members will have until May 6 to claim the reward.
The post GeForce NOW gets a few new games this week plus expanded access appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Razer's Meta Quest 2 accessories promise more comfy VR gaming

Razer today is launching two accessories for the Meta Quest 2 VR headset, promising a more comfortable experience when playing games in virtual reality. The Razer Adjustable Headstrap and Razer Facial Interface were designed in collaboration with ResMed, an expert in human factors that uses “billions of hours of data” to gain a deep understanding of materials, geometry, and skin science to help with their creation.
Razer says both accessories were designed with the intention of enhancing the VR gameplay through improved comfort. The Razer Facial Interface for example is meant to reduce facial pressure. Razer says these “float the surface of your face on a microscopic level.” While that’s a pretty interesting claim to make, the important thing is that these should distribute weight more evenly. Which should lead to more comfort during the time you’re wearing your headset.
It also features a light-blocking design with ventilation and a contoured 3D design for better support. Both accessories are available directly from Razer at $69.99 each. Or you can grab them both in a bundle for $139.98.
The Razer Adjustable Headstrap for Meta Quest 2 was designed for all head shapes
With comfort as a central point of focus for this accessory, the headstrap needs to fit. The thing is it’s not just the size of your head that can throw that off. Everyone is different is head shape can factor into whether or not something like this fits as well.
But that shouldn’t be a problem here. Razer says it was designed to fit all head shapes. To that end, Razer calculated the ideal vector and angle for each strap so that they don’t apply as much force to the parts of the head that they contact. The adjustable straps are soft and made of a breathable texture to help with comfort and the high-performance nylon that the straps are made of will help with durability. Ensuring that they last you a while.
The best part of all perhaps, is the unique cap design. It’s meant to promote a quick on/off solution that allows you to jump out and back into your VR games. Without having to mess around with strap adjustments. You simply need to set it up the first time and from then on, you can just slide the headset off if you need to take a quick break. Then right back on when you’re ready to play again.
The post Razer’s Meta Quest 2 accessories promise more comfy VR gaming appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Best Amazon Alexa Compatible Devices – March 2023

Amazon Alexa is available in a number of different devices. And if you’re already invested in the Alexa ecosystem, then it is a good idea to pick up more Alexa devices to add to your home.
In this buyer’s guide, we will be discussing the top 10 best Amazon Alexa compatible devices that you can buy right now. This will include things like smart displays, smart speakers, smart bulbs, thermostats and so much more.
Best Amazon Alexa compatible devices
Product name
Where to buy
Amazon Echo Show 5
C by GE Smart LED Bulbs + Smart Plug Bundle
Philips Hue Go
Amazon Echo (4th Gen)
Sonos Beam (Gen 2)
Amazon Echo Show 10
Blink Mini
Remo+ RemoBell S WiFi Video Doorbell Camera
Amazon Echo Dot (5th Gen)
Ring Video Doorbell 3
Amazon Echo Show 5

Price: $89
Where to buy: Amazon
The Amazon Echo Show 5 can do everything that Alexa can do, now with a display. The Echo Show 5 is great to put in the kitchen or even in a bedroom on a nightstand in your room.
The display on the Echo Show 5 is a bit wider than the other Echo Show devices, which means it can show more content in-line versus the 8 or 10-inch models.
It’s great for controling your smart home, as well as playing music, watching Prime Video and much more.
Amazon Echo Show 5 – Amazon
C by GE Smart LED Bulbs + Smart Plug Bundle

Price: $39
Buy: Amazon
This is a great bundle to get started with actually. It’s pretty inexpensive, and also comes with a smart plug, which is always a nice added bonus.
These bulbs from GE (it’s C by GE brand does the smart home products) are pretty basic. These are soft white bulbs, hence the much lower price here. They offer up the ability to use Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant and even Apple’s Siri or Homekit for voice control.
Smart control here isn’t as robust as on Philips Hue lights, since you can’t change the color. It’s on or off, you can schedule them, and dim them. And that’s about it. That makes these great for ceiling lights in your home.
C by GE Smart LED Bulbs + Smart Plug Bundle – Amazon
Philips Hue Go

Price: $79.97
Buy: Amazon
Works with: Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, Apple Siri/Homekit, IFTTT
The Philips Hue Go is another really cool light that you can add to your setup. Many people refer to it as a “bowl of light” which is technically true. The Philips Hue Go is also portable, meaning that it does not need to stay plugged in. So you can put it anywhere. Bounce the light off of the wall and so forth. Which is another way to add some cool accent lighting to your home.
This is a multi-colored light, with up to 16 million colors available to use here.
Much like the other Philips Hue products, the Go works with Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant and Siri/Homekit. It is also a newer model, so it works with Bluetooth too. Meaning it is not required to have the bridge.
Philips Hue Go – Amazon
Amazon Echo (4th Generation)

Price: $99.99
Buy: Amazon
Amazon’s fourth-generation Echo smart speaker is the best one yet, and perfect for those that are building a smart home. Since it has a Zigbee hub built into the speaker.
With this fourth-generation speaker from Amazon, it has improved the audio and also redesigned the speaker. You’re getting premium audio on the Amazon Echo, so you won’t need to use something like a Sonos or Bose speaker to get great audio.
The redesign on the Amazon Echo means that it is going to be able to better project audio in your home. As well as looking really unique. The Alexa ring is now on the bottom and can light up the table, which looks really nice.
Amazon Echo (4th Generation) – Amazon
Sonos Beam 2

Price: $449
Buy: Sonos
Sonos announced the new Beam 2 in September 2021, as the second-generation compact sound bar. Which has Amazon Alexa baked in (as well as Google Assistant). And it makes it the best Alexa-compatible sound bar again. We chose this over the Sonos Arc, because we feel that the price here is more attainable than the $700 for the Arc.
With the Sonos Beam 2, there is support for Dolby Atmos now, but it’s not full-on Dolby Atmos. It’s a bit strange, but it basically comes down to the size, and the fact that there are no up-firing speakers here.
Internally, things have been upgraded which will give you a better sound experience here, and it’ll also be quicker to play via AirPlay 2, as well as HDMI eARC for controlling your TV.
Sonos Beam 2 – Sonos
Amazon Echo Show 10

Price: $249
Where to buy: Amazon
The Amazon Echo Show 10 is a redesigned Echo Show, with a display that will now follow you around the room. This is useful for a few reasons. It’s great for video calls, as you’re able to stay in the frame all the time. But it’s also good for seeing what’s happening when you’re not home. Much like the Nest Hub Max, this camera can be used for security too.
The Echo Show 10 does have a really good speaker in it, and allows you to watch content from Amazon Prime Video, Netflix and other providers. As well as allowing you to watch what’s happening on your Ring Video Doorbell.
Amazon Echo Show 10 – Amazon
Blink Mini

Price: $35
Where to buy: Amazon
The Blink Mini is the cheapest camera on this list. And you’re probably wondering why this $35 home security camera is on this best of list, with many others that are over $100 – some of which are $200.
Well, the Blink Mini does the basics, and nothing more. It is a very small camera as you can tell by the name. Which offers two-way audio, and motion detection. It also only records in HD, and not 1080p or even 4K. Basically, you get what you pay for. And for most people, this is really all you need.
Blink Mini – Amazon
Remo+ RemoBell S WiFi Video Doorbell Camera

Price: $79
Where to buy: Amazon
Compatible with: Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant
The RemoBell S is a great video doorbell to pick up, and perhaps the cheapest on this list. It does require existing doorbell wiring, which is part of why it’s so much cheaper. As there is no battery inside to power it.
It can record your front yard and see what’s going on, giving you notifications and more. There is no subscription required, so it can record and keep everything for you. Without having to pay anything extra. Which is always nice.
Remo+ RemoBell S WiFi Video Doorbell Camera – Amazon
Amazon Echo Dot (5th Generation)

Price: $49.99
Buy: Amazon
The Echo Dot also got a redesigned, and looks very similar to the Echo that is listed above. But of course, smaller. So it has a new spherical shape, which looks really futuristic and a bit like the Nexus Q.
But the Echo Dot still does its job and does it well. It’s a small smart speaker that offers some good audio now. It also has Alexa built-in. So you can ask about the traffic, weather and much more. Not to mention, streaming music. There is support for Spotify, TiDAL, Amazon Music Unlimited, Apple Music and many more.
At just $49.99, this is a really great option.
Amazon Echo Dot (5th Generation) – Amazon
Ring Video Doorbell 3

Price: $179
Buy: Amazon
The new Ring Video Doorbell 3 is a great device to pick up and add to your Alexa ecosystem. It adds quite a few new features, including a better way to pop out the battery and charge it. It also does 1080p HD video, with night vision. Has motion detection and person detection. So it’ll only record when it sees motion.
It does work with Echo devices, like the Echo Show, so you can see what is happening outside, from your smart display. Or on your TV with a Fire TV device.
Ring Video Doorbell 3 – Amazon
The post Best Amazon Alexa Compatible Devices – March 2023 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

This special edition OnePlus 11 could be made of marble

OnePlus is readying a new special edition OnePlus 11. The company’s President for China Li Jie recently teased the handset on the Chinese social media platform Weibo. Jie says the device will feature “unprecedented materials and craftsmanship, making each mobile phone unique”. It appears to be made of marble.
A new OnePlus 11 variant with a marble back may be on the way
The OnePlus executive shared an image of a OnePlus 11 superimposed on Jupiter, the largest planet in the solar system. “Everyone is unique. Is it possible that each phone can also look unique?” text on the photo reads (machine translated from Chinese). As you can see in the zoomed-in image below, Jupiter’s surface patterns on the back of the OnePlus 11 hint at a marble finish.
Unfortunately, Li Jie didn’t reveal anything else. However, prolific Weibo tipster Digital Chat Station added fuel to the possibility of this handset featuring a marble back. They said the new OnePlus 11 variant uses an industry-first special material on the back. No other phone has ever used it. The material makes the phone feel cold and cool to the touch. Conversations on Weibo also point at a marble back.

If you remember, OnePlus showed a OnePlus 11 concept phone at MWC 2023 in Barcelona earlier this year. It was rather unique too, with the company’s new Active CryoFlux cooling solution which is a miniaturized closed-loop liquid cooling system found on desktop PCs. It keeps the phone’s temperature in check during graphic-intense gaming sessions, thus prolonging the battery and shortening the charging.
The concept phone wasn’t meant to enter production, and it won’t. Digital Chat Station has confirmed that the upcoming variant is different (via), though coolness appears to be one of its USPs. We’ll have to wait for more information before things get clearer as to what OnePlus is cooking here. As things stand, we don’t even have a vague timeline for the launch of this special edition OnePlus 11.
The phone may not feature those Jupiter surface patterns
Even if this special edition OnePlus 11 ends up having a marble back, there’s little hope those Jupiter patterns seen on the teaser image will make it to the end product. The handset itself may get a monotonous finish. Perhaps we may be looking at this unreleased beige color variant here, with some unique “craftsmanship” on top. This color option was rumored to be in the works but never saw the light of day. Stay tuned as we wait to find out what OnePlus has up its sleeves.

The post This special edition OnePlus 11 could be made of marble appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Samsung's march update is live for Galaxy Tab S7 series

After updating most of its eligible Galaxy smartphones to the March 2023 Android security patch, Samsung is now pushing the latest security release to its tablets. The Galaxy Tab S7 series has pipped others to the new SMR (Security Maintenance Release). The company should soon update the Galaxy Tab S8 series as well.
As of this writing, the March SMR for the Galaxy Tab S7 and Galaxy Tab S7+ is available to users in Latin America. According to SamMobile, which first reported this rollout, the update bears the firmware build numbers T87*XXS2DWC1 and T97*XXS2DWC1 for the two models, respectively. Both Wi-Fi-only and cellular variants seem to be picking up the new release. The publication confirms that the update is live in Argentina, Bolivia, Chile, Colombia, Guatemala, Mexico, Paraguay, Peru, and Uruguay. A wider release covering units in other markets, including the US, should follow in the coming days.
This update patches dozens of security vulnerabilities in the two Samsung tablets. The Korean firm’s monthly security bulletin mentions more than 60 patches for March SMR. As usual, some vulnerabilities only exist in select Galaxy models. Overall, Samsung patched 23 Galaxy-specific vulnerabilities this month, with the remaining patches coming from Google and other Android partners.
At least five Android OS issues patched this month were critical. If exploited in the wild, some of those could lead to remote code execution. Threat actors could remotely gain access to your phone without your knowledge.
Galaxy Tab S7 series gets March update as Samsung readies Galaxy Tab S9
Samsung launched the Galaxy Tab S7 and Galaxy Tab S7 in August 2020. The Galaxy Tab S8 followed in February last year with a third “Ultra” model. The Korean firm is now readying three more flagship Android tablets for launch later this year. We are expecting the Galaxy Tab S9, Galaxy Tab S9+, and Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra to arrive in August or September.
While we wait for the new tablets, users with one of the two 2020 models are getting the latest security update. To update your Galaxy Tab S7 or Galaxy tab S7+, go to the Settings app, tap on Software update, and then on Download and install. Your tablet will now connect to the internet to search for available updates. If it finds an update, you will be prompted to download it. If there’s no update available today, wait a few days and check again. Your tablet may also notify you when updates become available.
The post Samsung’s march update is live for Galaxy Tab S7 series appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Instagram will start putting ads in search results

In an effort to support the struggling ad business amidst the current challenging economic climate, Instagram is testing two experimental ad formats: ads in search results and Reminder Ads. These new formats will provide companies with more opportunities to promote their products or services.
As the name suggests, ads in search results will enable businesses to show ads to users who are actively searching for products, businesses, or content on Instagram. This means that when users search for a particular term on Instagram, such as “Galaxy S23,” they may see sponsored posts in the feed alongside the actual search results. Instagram intends to launch this feature globally once testing is over.
On the other hand, Reminder Ads will allow businesses to announce, remind, and notify users of upcoming events or launches. Therefore, when users opt into Reminder Ads for a particular event, they will receive notifications from Instagram one day before, 15 minutes before, and when the event begins. These notifications will appear like any other Instagram notifications and will be visible on the user’s lock screen.
Meta’s push towards increased ad revenue
It’s no secret that with the help of the new ad formats, Meta aims to increase its struggling ad revenue. In the Q4 2022 earnings report, Meta reported a decrease in ad revenue from $32.6 billion to $31.2 billion, with a year-on-year ad revenue drop from $114.93 billion in 2021 to $113.64 billion in 2022.
The company attributed this decline to weak advertising demand, which is caused by the uncertain and volatile macroeconomic landscape. However, Meta hopes to combat the decline with these new ad formats and job cuts. After laying off 11,000 workers in November, the company announced another round of 10,000 job cuts aimed at reducing operational costs.
While the new advertisement format will provide businesses with additional opportunities to advertise and increase revenue, it remains unclear whether users will welcome these new ads. Only time will tell if these new ad formats will be effective in boosting Meta’s ad revenue or not.

The post Instagram will start putting ads in search results appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Amazon is considering launching its own browser

It’s no secret that Google Chrome has dominated the browser market for years, with over 60% market share worldwide. Despite competition from other major players like Microsoft, Apple, and Mozilla, Chrome’s popularity has remained largely unchallenged. However, it looks like Amazon will be the next company to take on Chrome’s dominance as, according to reports, the company is exploring the possibility of launching its web browser for desktops.
According to a tweet from Nicholas De Leon, a senior reporter for Consumer Reports, Amazon is currently conducting surveys with select customers to gather information about their browsing habits and preferences. The survey questions are highly specific, focusing on important features like ad blocking, password management, cross-platform compatibility, VPN, and other security features. Amazon is also asking respondents which browsers they currently use and which features would convince them to try a new browser.
“We want to understand what our customers value about current web browsers and what they wish the browsers could do better. By participating in this survey, you will contribute to innovations that improve browsing experiences for millions of people around the world,” wrote Amazon in the survey.
A new player in the market
Challenging Google wouldn’t be easy, even for giants like Amazon. However, the potential release of an Amazon browser could have significant implications for the advertising industry. With Google moving away from third-party cookies, Amazon’s existing data collection capabilities combined with browsing data could give the company an edge over other tech giants like Google and Facebook, allowing it to create a more targeted and efficient ad platform. Additionally, Amazon’s browser could also offer special features catered towards online shopping, such as price comparisons and rebate alerts.
Although Amazon has released a browser before, called Silk, the company primarily designed it for its services. However, based on the highly specific questions in the new survey, it seems that the company is seriously considering launching a browser that is specifically meant for use on desktops and laptops.

Hmm, is Amazon thinking about making a web browser? I’m not sure how else this could be interpreted. @DanaMattioli pic.twitter.com/TNwgIa37qT
— Nicholas De Leon (@nicholasadeleon) March 13, 2023

The post Amazon is considering launching its own browser appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

OnePlus Nord CE 3 Lite clears regulatory hurdles ahead of launch

OnePlus is readying a new mid-range phone in the form of the OnePlus Nord CE 3 Lite 5G. The device is rumored to debut in the first week of April. There have been a few leaks about it in recent weeks. With the launch drawing closer, the handset has now appeared on Geekbench and also picked up a couple of regulatory certifications, revealing a few details in the process.
The Geekbench listing for the OnePlus Nord CE 3 Lite 5G (model number CPH2465) confirms that the handset is powered by Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 695 processor. As usual, it doesn’t explicitly name the chipset, but we have enough details here to paint a telling picture. The Snapdragon 695 is a 6nm processor with two Cortex-A77-based CPU cores clocked at 2.2GHz and six Cortex-A55-based cores clocked at 1.8GHz. It has an integrated Snapdragon X51 5G Modem for sub-6GHz 5G cellular connectivity.
OnePlus will pair the chipset with 8GB of RAM. At least the version that made it to Geekbench has that much RAM amount (via). The company may also offer the phone in other memory configurations. As you’d expect, the OnePlus Nord CE 3 Lite 5G will run Android 13 out of the box. OnePlus will slap OxygenOS 13 skin on top, though. The early Geekbench run of the phone yielded scores of 688 (single-core test) and 1,796 (multi-core test). The final, market-ready device may do better than that.
OnePlus Nord CE 3 Lite 5G picks up regulatory certifications ahead of launch
Ahead of its launch in about two weeks, the OnePlus Nord CE 3 Lite 5G has picked up regulatory approval in Singapore. A listing on the country’s IMDA (Infocomm Media Development Authority) website tells us the market name of the handset. Spotted by tipster Mukul Sharma, aka Stufflistings, IMDA confirms that the OnePlus CPH2465 is none other than the Nord CE 3 Lite 5G. Separately, a version of the handset (model number CPH2467) has appeared on India’s BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards).
These regulatory certifications are a sign of nearing launch. While OnePlus hasn’t officially confirmed anything yet, rumors are that the OnePlus Nord CE 3 Lite 5G will debut on April 4. If true, that’s precisely two weeks from today. We may see a few more leaks about the device until then. Early leaks say we’ll get a 6.59-inch LCD screen with 1080p+ resolution and 120Hz refresh rate, 50MP main camera, and a 5000mAh battery with 33W charging support. Stay tuned for the official launch next month.

So yes, as I tipped earlier, the OnePlus Nord CE 3 Lite 5G is indeed launching soon. Have spotted the device on the Singapore IMDA certification website. The CPH2467 (said to be the Nord CE 3) has also been BIS certified.
Launching very soon in India.#OnePlusNordCE3Lite5G pic.twitter.com/OG6oV0sHwc
— Mukul Sharma (@stufflistings) March 20, 2023

The post OnePlus Nord CE 3 Lite clears regulatory hurdles ahead of launch appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Results of 2023 elections of OSI board of directors

The polls just closed, the results are in. Congratulations to the returning directors Aeva Black, and Catharina Maracke, and the newly elected director Anne-Marie Scott.

Anne-Marie Scott has been confirmed and joins as a director elected by the Affiliate organizations. She’ll take the seat that was occupied by Hong-Phuc Dang who resigned in June 2022. Aeva Black and Catharina Maracke collected the votes of the Individual members.

The OSI thanks all of those who participated in the 2023 board elections by casting a ballot and asking questions to the candidates. We also want to extend our sincerest gratitude to all of those who stood for election. We were once again honored with an incredible slate of candidates who stepped forward from across the open source software community to support the OSI’s work, and advance the OSI’s mission. The 2023 nominees were again, remarkable: experts from a variety of fields and technologies with diverse skills and experience gained from working across the open source community. We hope the entire Open Source software community will join us in thanking them for their service and their leadership. We’re better off because of their contributions and commitment, and we thank them.

Next steps

The board of directors will formalize the election results in an ad-hoc meeting. The new board member will be invited to a series of onboarding meetings to get to know the internal tools of the organization and familiarize with the mission, vision and strategy of the organization. And to know each other and the staff.

We’ll also run a post-mortem analysis of the voting process and tools we used to keep improving.

The complete election results

OSI Affiliate directors elections 2023

There are 4 candidates competing for 1 seats. The number of voters is 35 and there were 34 valid votes and 1 empty vote.

Counting votes using Scottish STV.

R|Anne-Marie|Gabriele C|Gaël Blond|Matt Jarvi|Exhausted |Surplus |Threshold
| Scott |olumbro |elle |s | | |
1| 12.00000| 9.00000| 10.00000| 3.00000| 0.00000| 0.00000| 18.00000
| Count of first choices. No candidates have surplus votes so candidates will
| be eliminated and their votes transferred for the next round.
2| 12.00000| 11.00000| 10.00000| | 1.00000| 0.00000| 18.00000
| Count after eliminating Matt Jarvis and transferring votes. No candidates
| have surplus votes so candidates will be eliminated and their votes
| transferred for the next round.
3| 15.00000| 15.00000| | | 4.00000| 0.00000| 18.00000
| Count after eliminating Gaël Blondelle and transferring votes. No
| candidates have surplus votes so candidates will be eliminated and their
| votes transferred for the next round.
4| 27.00000| | | | 7.00000| 9.00000| 18.00000
| Count after eliminating Gabriele Columbro and transferring votes.
| Candidates Anne-Marie Scott and Gabriele Columbro were tied when choosing
| candidates to eliminate. Candidate Gabriele Columbro was chosen by breaking
| the tie at round 2. Candidate Anne-Marie Scott has reached the threshold
| and is elected.

Winner is Anne-Marie Scott.


OSI Individual directors elections 2023

There are 5 candidates competing for 2 seats. The number of voters is 194 and there were 192 valid votes and 2 empty votes.

Counting votes using Scottish STV.

R|Aeva Bla|Catharin|Chris An|Duane O’|Jim Jagi|Exhauste|Surplus |Threshol
|ck |a Marack|iszczyk |Brien |elski |d | |d
| |e | | | | | |
1|44.00000|69.00000|30.00000|27.00000|22.00000| 0.00000| 4.00000|65.00000
| Count of first choices. Candidate Catharina Maracke has reached the
| threshold and is elected. Candidates have surplus votes so surplus
| votes will be transferred for the next round.
2|45.50722|65.00000|30.63767|28.04346|22.57970| 0.23195| 0.00000|65.00000
| Count after transferring surplus votes from Catharina Maracke with a
| transfer value of 4.00000/69.00000. No candidates have surplus votes
| so candidates will be eliminated and their votes transferred for the
| next round.
3|49.62316|65.00000|39.86955|35.21737| | 2.28992| 0.00000|65.00000
| Count after eliminating Jim Jagielski and transferring votes. No
| candidates have surplus votes so candidates will be eliminated and
| their votes transferred for the next round.
4|69.26083|65.00000|52.33331| | | 5.40586| 4.26083|65.00000
| Count after eliminating Duane O’Brien and transferring votes.
| Candidate Aeva Black has reached the threshold and is elected.

Winners are Aeva Black and Catharina Maracke.


Source: opensource.org

Pixel 6 series gets March Feature Drop with faster Night Sight

Google has released the March 2023 update for the Pixel 6 series. The Pixel 6, Pixel 6 Pro, and Pixel 6a are getting the latest monthly update a week after the rest of the Pixel family. The Pixel 4a, Pixel 5 series, and Pixel 7 series picked up this release last Monday. Older models are no longer supported by Google.
Pixel devices usually receive monthly updates on the first Monday of the month. But that hasn’t been the case this time around. The March update debuted on the second Monday, which fell on the 13th day of the month. A few devices still missed out on it, including the Pixel 6 series and the Pixel Watch. Google has now pushed the latest software release to the remaining devices.
This month’s update for the Pixel 6 series comes with the firmware build number TQ2A.230305.008.E1 (via). For users in Canada and Wind customers in Italy, it’s TQ2A.230305.008.F1. If you’ve been following the news around this update, you probably know that it’s a big one. Google is pushing the Android 13 QPR2 here. It brings a host of new features and improvements, along with the latest security patch.
Speaking of a new security patch, Google’s Project Zero team recently revealed that the March release contains fixes for four critical vulnerabilities in Samsung’s Exynos modems found in the Pixel 6 and Pixel 7 series. These vulnerabilities could lead to remote code execution, potentially allowing a remote attacker to take control of your device without your knowledge. Samsung’s Galaxy S22 series, Galaxy A53, Galaxy A33, and Vivo’s X70 series devices are affected too. As of this writing, the vulnerabilities remain unpatched on those devices.
The March update brings several new features to the Pixel 6 series
Android 13 QPR2 is the second quarterly feature drop for Pixel smartphones following the Android 13 update. The latest release brings improvements to Night Sight, letting you capture better low-light photos. The feature now works faster too. The full Quick Settings page adds a large digital clock while the Pixel Launcher gets larger folders. Health Connect also now comes pre-installed on all Pixel devices.
Elsewhere, Pixel phones show the carrier name above status bar icons following the March update. The battery percentage has also been replaced by a remaining day/hour estimate.
All in all, the latest update for Pixel devices contains plenty of goodies to look forward to. If you’re using a Pixel 6, Pixel 6 Pro, or Pixel 6a, watch out for this big update in the coming days.
The post Pixel 6 series gets March Feature Drop with faster Night Sight appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

PUBG MOBILE gets more immersive with Dolby Atmos support

Immersive audio can be a really big part of enhancing the gaming experience and PUBG MOBILE players are getting it through the recently added Dolby Atmos support. Audio in some cases, can feel like a more important part of the play experience than visuals. Opening up doors to unmatched levels of realism.
Tencent Games Head Of PUBG MOBILE Publishing Vincent Wang seems to agree. Stating that “even more than visuals, sound plays a key role in immersing players in PUBG MOBILE to keep them on their toes and in the middle of the action. Players will be able to hear the difference in their games and utilize this to their advantage.”
With Dolby Atmos in PUBG MOBILE, players should be able to hear key details. Such as footsteps, to know when players are trying to sneak up on you. Of course, you’ll need a headset or earbuds that also support Dolby Atmos. As well as a phone that supports the tech if you want to actually utilize it. This shouldn’t be too hard to do since more than a few phones and headsets support Dolby Atmos these days
Dolby Atmos will only be available in the PUBG MOBILE arena mode
For the time being, at least, the Dolby Atmos support will only be available in arena mode. Seeing as this is one of PUBG MOBILE’s key modes though, most players should get to experience it. The sound update should be live today and likely in the game for most players at this point.
More updates with the audio tech are also planned for the future. Which could mean support rolling out to other game modes. Though Tencent doesn’t mention anything about dates for the future improvements or what they’ll include specifically. You may need to update the game for this feature to show up. So it’s worth checking to see if there’s a game update available.
The post PUBG MOBILE gets more immersive with Dolby Atmos support appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Netflix to add 40 more games in 2023 plus Monument Valley in 2024

Netflix has already added a handful of games in 2023, but the company says it plans to add about 40 more titles this year alone. For those that really enjoy playing mobile games, the Netflix offering has been a pretty good value.
There have been more than a few really good titles thrown into the mix. And they’re all included with a Netflix subscription. Even the ones that would normally cost money if you were to pick them up directly from the Play Store. At this moment there’s already a pretty decent amount of mobile games available. And with 40 more by the end of 2023, Netflix will be well on its way to a sizeable list of games.
Netflix has a lot more in the works too. In 2024, the company will be bringing Monument Valley to the service. With Monument Valley 2 planned as well. It’s not clear if both Monument Valley games will be added at the same time. But both should be landing sometime next year.
Netflix plans to add tons of games in 2023, and more are in development
When Netflix says it’s committed to expanding its gaming portfolio, it seems to be very serious about that. The company says it has 70 games that are in development with its partners. Plus 16 games that are currently in development from its own studios.
Its most recently added game was Highwater, though it’s added quite a few since the year started. With titles like Valiant Hearts: Coming Home from Ubisoft launching back on January 31. Netflix also has another title from Ubisoft coming, called Mighty Quest: Rogue Palace landing on April 18.
And there will be a third Ubisoft title planned for Netflix coming sometime later. Currently Netflix offers 55 mobile games. So with 40 more it’ll be nearing a total of 100. All free with a subscription to the streaming service. And the amount of titles only goes up from there when you factor in all the titles in development.
The post Netflix to add 40 more games in 2023 plus Monument Valley in 2024 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

How To Set & Manage Default Apps In Android

When you’re performing certain tasks on your phone, you’ll often only want one app to do it for you. This is where default apps come in, and it’s pretty easy to set, change, and remove them on your Android device.
While it’s easy, newcomers to the platform might not know how to manage them. Well, have no fear. Here’s a handy guide telling you how to set and manage default apps on your Android phone.
As a disclaimer, there are several manufacturers, and many of them offer their own take on the Android operating system. Thus, managing your default apps on certain phones will be different from what’s explained in this article. In this article, we’ll explain how to do this on stock Android. Most phone makers use stock Android, so, chances are that this method will work for you.
 What are default apps?
So, in case you don’t know what we’re talking about, here’s a quick rundown. When you want certain tasks completed on your phone, you’ll often want only one app to perform them. Familiarity is a big part of the whole smartphone experience.
So, an app that’s assigned to perform a task every time is called a default app. A web browser that always opens when you tap on a link is the default browser. A photo editing app that always opens when you tap on the edit photo button is the default photo editor. Having default apps really speeds up your workflow, especially if there are apps that you have to use on a constant basis.
Setting an app as the default
There are a few different ways that you can manage your default apps. You can either go through the settings or go to each app’s menu. Let’s start with setting default apps.
For this example, we’ll use a PDF reader. If your phone only has one PDF reader, then it will automatically assign that as the default app. But, if you download an additional one, then you’ll be able to choose the default. The quickest way is to just try opening a PDF reader. In this example, we’re opening a file from an email.
When you try opening a PDF file with more than one reader installed, you’ll see a pop-up appear showing you all of the apps that can open this type of file. The previous default app will be at the top of the list, and you’ll see some options right below it.
You can tap on the Just once button to only use the app on that occasion. If you use that option, then you’ll get the popup again when trying to open that type of file again. Tapping on the Always button will set that app as the default.

Under the previous default app, you’ll see a list of the other apps that can open that file. Tapping on one of those apps will open it, but it won’t set it as the default. When you try to open that type of file again, you’ll get the popup once more. This time, that app will be at the top, and you’ll be able to set it as the default.
Changing default apps
So, you’ve selected a default app, but you want to change it to another app. Well, as mentioned before, if you go and download a new app, you’ll have the ability to set that app as the default. But, if you want to change it to an app that you’ve already installed, then it’s pretty simple.
First, you’ll want to go to the current default app. On the home screen, hold your finger down on that app. You’ll see a little popup appear with some options. Tap on the App Info button (the “i” in a circle). There, you’ll see useful information and settings for that app. Scroll down to the Open by default section.
When you tap on that section, you’ll see a button on the bottom reading Clear default preferences. When you do that, the system will unassign this app as the default.

After that, go to the file or link that you want to open. You’ll get the popup again showing you the options for apps. This time around, since there are no apps assigned, the top app will not app be the only one with the Just once and Always buttons. Those buttons will be available to all of the apps. When you tap on one, you’ll see them appear at the bottom.
Using the settings menu
Since some people still use older versions of Android, they might not be able to use the App Info page. If you don’t get the popup when you hold your finger down on an app, you can go through your settings.
In the setting, scroll down until you see the Apps section. You should see a Default apps button. There, you’ll see a list of the apps that have defaults assigned. Look for the app that you want to unassign, open the page, and clear the default.
You can go on without setting a default app
Setting a default app isn’t required. There are people who like to have different options when opening files. A person might ping-pong between using the native Google Photos editor and Picsart. If you don’t want to assign a default app you can just tap on the Just once button whenever you’re trying to open a file.
The post How To Set & Manage Default Apps In Android appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Roborock S8 Pro Ultra Review: The New Best Robot Vacuum

For quite some time, we’ve been singing the praises of Roborock here at AndroidHeadlines. That’s because they make some of the best robot vacuums on the market. Sure the competitors are pretty good, but Roborock continues to push the envelope on robot vacuums, and they’ve done that again with the S8 Pro Ultra. And for the price, you’d expect that.
The Roborock S8 Pro Ultra is pretty expensive, with a MSRP of $1,600. But that does also include the new RockDock, which is able to empty the dustbin, as well as clean the mopping pad, and refill the water reservoir. So you get a lot for that money. But the question is, is it worth it? Let’s find out in our review of the Roborock S8 Pro Ultra.
Roborock S8 Pro Ultra Review: Design
The design of the Roborock S8 Pro Ultra hasn’t really changed a whole lot here. It’s still mostly the same as previous Roborock robot vacuums. On the front of the vacuum, you’ll find the Stereo AI cameras for the Reactive 3D obstacle-avoidance system. As well as a few other sensors. There’s the LiDAR on the top for navigation and mapping. With the three buttons on the top for home, power and mopping. The backside is where you’ll find the combo dustbin and water reservoir.
Now, on the bottom, Roborock has gone with two rubber brushes, following iRobot’s approach. We’ll talk more about this in the cleaning section. But, the design is really what you’d expect from Roborock.

Let’s talk about the dock though. It’s huge. And it kind has to be. Like the previous version of the RockDock on the S7 MaxV Ultra, this has the three containers at the top. On the left, is the dirty water from cleaning the mopping pad, with clean water in the center and the dust collection on the right. If you do a lot of mopping with the S8, you will want to empty that dirty water bin quite often. As it can start to stink pretty quickly. The other two, should last for quite some time.
The big change with the dock this year is that the front panel is higher now. Sort of hiding the different compartments back there. Some won’t like this, as it’s tougher to see the water levels, but I think it looks clean. Especially in this white and black color combo that Roborock sent over.
Roborock S8 Pro Ultra Review: Cleaning
In my experience, Roborock is the best at cleaning. And that continues to hold true with the S8 Pro Ultra. It has some of the most powerful suction on the market right now. It’s rated at 6,000Pa. While most of the competitors are between 2000 and 3000Pa. The Roborock S7 MaxV was only 5100Pa. So this is a pretty strong one.
With that suction, it does a really good job of cleaning up your home. And now that you have the option to have it vacuum a room twice, and do a criss-cross pattern, it really does a good job of cleaning up. My home has never been so clean. On hardwood, tile and laminate  flooring, it does quite well. Though it doesn’t quite need that much suction on those floorings. So the vacuum will boost suction on carpet.
This year, Roborock has moved to a dual-rubber brush option on the bottom of the S8. This is similar to what iRobot has been doing recently, and it does make a big difference. This allows the brushes to get closer to the floor to pick up debris, dirt and dust. It also keeps hair from getting tangled up on the brush. In the first iteration of this rubber brush, on the S6, it didn’t do a great job. It would tear the brush pretty easily. Now, there’s almost no issues with the rubber brushes, which is definitely a good thing. You’ll still want to replace it after a few months though.

When it comes to mopping, it also does a pretty good job here, as it will scrub the floor pretty intensely if you wish. This is good for getting up dried on messes on the floors. It also lifts the mopping pad up off of the floor when it goes onto carpet. So you are able to clean the entire home without removing the mopping module to clean the carpeted areas. That is still something that most other robot vacuums can’t do (besides the iRobot Roomba Combo j7).
All in all, it does a really good job of cleaning up the floors in your home. And the app does give you a lot of options for cleaning, to get the best experience.
Roborock S8 Pro Ultra Review: Software
Roborock’s app has always been very good. It’s pretty easy to use and adjust settings when needed. And that’s still true here on the S8 Pro Ultra. A feature that debuted last year with the S7 MaxV was the 3D mapping, and that is still here on the S8 Pro Ultra. This will allow you to see different furniture in your home. It’s still more of a gimmick, but it does look really cool.
Within the app, and on the floor plan, you can set up specific cleaning settings for each room. For instance, I live in a townhome and on the main floor is the kitchen, dining room and living room. Only the Kitchen and foyer is laminate floor while the rest is carpet. So in the kitchen and foyer, I have it set to mop the floor “intense” and the vacuum suction is down to balanced. Since it doesn’t need the full 6000Pa on laminate flooring. But in the living room, the suction power is set to max and it doesn’t mop. But I do have it set to run through the living room twice. Since that’s where me and my dog spend a lot of time. So it does need the attention. Especially while she’s shedding her winter coat.

This is a feature that no other robot vacuum (in my experience) has, yet. And I absolutely love it. Since not every room needs to be cleaned the same.
Now let’s talk about multiple floor plans. Since I am someone that does live in a multi-level home, it’s actually pretty useful to me. The Roborock S8 Pro Ultra can store up to 3 different floor plans. And it’s pretty good at adjusting to each floor plan on the go. The only downside here is that, you do need to carry the vacuum up and down the stairs to do different levels.
The app is super easy to use on both Android and iOS, however.
Roborock S8 Pro Ultra Review:  Wrap Up
The Roborock S8 Pro Ultra has not yet gone on sale, but the MSRP is reported to be $1,600. So this is a pretty expensive robot vacuum, and if Roborock hadn’t sent it over, I’m not sure I would have bought it. That’s a lot of money to spend on a robot vacuum. But if you are one that maybe can’t get around to clean your home, or too busy to vacuum, then the money may not be an issue. The Roborock S8 Pro Ultra is a pretty automated robot vacuum. Especially with the ability to add a schedule in the app.

So if the price isn’t an issue, then the Roborock S8 Pro Ultra is a really good option. I’d even say that it is the best robot vacuum on the market right now.
You should buy the Roborock S8 Pro Ultra if:
You don’t already have a robot vacuum, or a newer robot vacuum.
You have a pet, the increased suction power is great for pet hair.
You have a larger home, where the price makes it really worth it.
You should not buy the Roborock S8 Pro Ultra if:
You think $1,600 is to much for a robot vacuum.
You live in an apartment, it’s not really worth it for such a small space.
You have a newer robot vacuum like the Roborock S7 MaxV (Ultra) or the S6.

The post Roborock S8 Pro Ultra Review: The New Best Robot Vacuum appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Phone Comparisons: Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra vs Samsung Galaxy S21 Ultra

The Galaxy S23 Ultra is Samsung’s latest and greatest smartphone. We’ve already compared it with a number of smartphones, including its predecessor, the Galaxy S22 Ultra. What if you’re still using the Galaxy S21 Ultra, though, and you’re thinking of upgrading? Well, that’s what we’re here for. In this article, we’ll compare the Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra vs Samsung Galaxy S21 Ultra.
Two of Samsung’s behemoths will go head-to-head across a number of categories, but first, we’ll list their specs. Following that, we’ll compare their designs, displays, performance, battery life, cameras, and audio performance. There’s a lot to talk about here, as the difference between them is substantial. Let’s get started.

Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra
Samsung Galaxy S21 Ultra
Screen size
6.8-inch QHD+ Dynamic AMOLED 2X display (curved, 120Hz adaptive refresh rate, LTPO, down to 1Hz, 1,750 nits peak brightness)
6.8-inch WQHD+ Dynamic AMOLED 2X curved display (120Hz adaptive refresh rate, 1,500 nits peak brightness)
Screen resolution
3080 x 1440
3200 x 1440
Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 for Galaxy
Qualcomm Snapdragon 888 / Samsung Exynos 2100
12GB/16GB (LPDDR5)
256GB/512GB/1TB, non-expandable (UFS 4.0)
128GB/256GB, non-expandable (expandable in some countries)
Rear cameras
200MP (f/1.7 aperture, 24mm lens, 0.6um pixel size, multi-directional PDAF, Laser AF, OIS)
12MP (ultrawide, Dual Pixel AF, 120-degree FoV, f/2.2 aperture, 1.4um pixel size)
10MP (telephoto, Dual Pixel AF, OIS, f/2.4 aperture, 1.12um pixel size, 70mm lens, optical zoom 3x)
10MP (telephoto, Dual Pixel AF, OIS, f/4.9 aperture, 1.22um pixel size, 230mm lens, 10x optical zoom, 100x Space Zoom)
108MP (f/1.8 aperture, OIS, 0.8um pixel size. Produces 12MP images with 2.4um pixel size)
12MP (ultrawide, Dual Pixel AF, 120-degree FoV, f/2.2 aperture, 1.4um pixel size)
10MP (telephoto, Dual Pixel AF, OIS, f/2.4 aperture, 72 mm lens, 1.22um pixel size, optical zoom 3x)
10MP (telephoto, Dual Pixel AF, OIS, f/4.9 aperture, 1.22um pixel size, 240mm lens, 10x optical zoom, 100x Space Zoom)
Front cameras
12MP (f/2.2 aperture, 26mm lens, Dual Pixel PDAF)
40MP (f/2.2 aperture, 80-degree FoV, 0.7um pixel size, PDAF)
5,000mAh, non-removable, 45W wired charging, 15W Qi wireless charging, 4.5W Wireless PowerShare
Charger not included
5,000mAh, non-removable, fast battery charging (USB PD 3.0), Fast Wireless Charging 2.0, Wireless PowerShare
Charger not included
163.4 x 78.1 x 8.9mm
165 x 75.6 x 8.9 mm
234 grams
227/229 grams
5G, LTE, NFC, Bluetooth 5.3, Wi-Fi, USB Type-C
5G, LTE, NFC, Bluetooth 5.2, Wi-Fi, USB Type-C
In-display fingerprint scanner (ultrasonic)
In-display fingerprint scanner (ultrasonic)
Android 13
One UI 5.1
Android 11 (upgradable)
One UI 3.0
$1,199.99/$1,299/$1,399/TBA (1TB)
$424 (refurbished)
Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra vs Samsung Galaxy S21 Ultra: Design
You’ll immediately be able to spot the difference between the two phones, the moment you lay your eyes on them. The Galaxy S23 Ultra has sharper corners, and flat top and bottom sides. That’s not the case with the Galaxy S21 Ultra. Both phones do have thin bezels, curved displays, and a centered display camera hole. The Galaxy S23 Ultra is slightly shorter, but also noticeably wider.
The two phones have the same exact thickness, while the Galaxy S23 Ultra is slightly heavier. Both phones are made out of metal and glass, and both are IP68 certified for water and dust resistance. When you flip them around, you’ll see a different camera design. The sensors are roughly in the same spots, but the Galaxy S23 Ultra’s protrudes directly from the backplate. The Galaxy S21 Ultra, on the other hand, has a camera island on the back.
Now, both of these phones do have support for an S Pen, but only the S23 Ultra comes with Samsung’s stylus. That phone also has an S Pen silo, which can be accessed from the bottom. The same cannot be said for the Galaxy S21 Ultra. They do feel premium in the hand, but if you don’t like hefty and large phones, you should think twice before getting either of them. Using a case is recommended due to the fact how slippery they are.
Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra vs Samsung Galaxy S21 Ultra: Display
The Galaxy S23 Ultra features a 6.8-inch QHD+ (3088 x 1440) Dynamic AMOLED 2X display. That panel is curved, but only slightly, and it supports an adaptive refresh rate of up to 120Hz. HDR10+ content is supported here, while the display can get quite bright at 1,750 nits of peak brightness. This display is also well-protected thanks to a layer of the Corning Gorilla Glass 2.
Galaxy S21 Ultra
The Galaxy S21 Ultra, on the other hand, has a 6.8-inch panel as well. This display has a QHD+ resolution too, but a different aspect ratio. It has a 20:9 aspect ratio and a resolution of 3200 x 1440. This is also a Dynamic AMOLED 2X panel with a refresh rate of 120Hz, and it also supports HDR10+ content. Do note that this panel gets up to 1,500 nits of peak brightness, so, slightly less than the Galaxy S23 Ultra. This panel is also curved, considerably more than the unit on the Galaxy S23 Ultra.
Both of these phones have outstanding displays. Truth be said, the Galaxy S23 Ultra’s panel is newer and technically better, but you’ll be more than happy with either one. Both get bright enough, even outdoors, and both offer vivid colors, deep blacks, and great viewing angles. The touch response is also good on both of these displays. If you’re considering upgrading just because of the display, that may not be the best idea, both are great.
Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra vs Samsung Galaxy S21 Ultra: Performance
Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 for Galaxy SoC fuels the Galaxy S23 Ultra. The phone also packs in 12GB of LPDDR5 RAM and UFS 4.0 flash storage. The Galaxy S21 Ultra is fueled by the Snapdragon 888 SoC in the US and China, but in many markets, it launched with the Exynos 2100 processor. Up to 16GB of LPDDR5 RAM is included on the phone, along with UFS 3.1 flash storage.
Now, the Galaxy S23 Ultra is definitely the more powerful phone in this comparison. The Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 is a much better chip with great power efficiency. It also comes inside every Galaxy S23 Ultra unit, so you don’t have to worry about inferior performance. It offers faster and more efficient RAM and flash storage too. Does this reflect on the actual real-life performance? Well, yes, it does.
The Galaxy S21 Ultra is not exactly laggy at this point, but it’s nowhere near as fluid as the Galaxy S23 Ultra, especially the Exynos model. The Galaxy S23 Ultra is one of the snappiest phones around, while the Galaxy S21 Ultra performs really well, but it does skip frames here and there. The difference is noticeable once you try both phones, that’s for sure, which is not exactly surprising.
Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra vs Samsung Galaxy S21 Ultra: Battery
There is a 5,000mAh battery in both of these smartphones. The battery life is considerably different, though. The Galaxy S23 Ultra does have a more efficient SoC, and some other components, so that’s not surprising. We were able to go all the way to 10 hours of screen-on-time with the Galaxy S23 Ultra, and that was not an exception. The Galaxy S21 Ultra lingered around 6.5-7.5 hours when we reviewed it.
Do note that we didn’t really play games on either phone, other for testing purposes. They did go through a lot during our usage, ranging from browsing, messaging, image editing, photo editing, streaming, and so much more. Your mileage may vary, though, of course. You’ll be using different apps, have different usage habits, and different signal strengths. On top of that, it has been a while since we’ve rocked the Galaxy S21 Ultra as a daily driver, things may have changed.
The Galaxy S23 Ultra does support faster charging than the Galaxy S21 Ultra. It comes with 45W wired, 15W wireless, and 4.5 reverse wireless charging. The Galaxy S21 Ultra supports 25W wired charging, while the wireless and reverse wireless charging is identical as on its sibling. Do note that neither of these two phones comes with a charging brick in the box, though.
Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra vs Samsung Galaxy S21 Ultra: Cameras
Both of these phones have four cameras on the back. The Galaxy S23 Ultra has a 200-megapixel main camera, a 12-megapixel ultrawide unit, a 10-megapixel telephoto camera, and a 10-megapixel periscope telephoto unit. The Galaxy S21 Ultra features a 108-megapixel main camera, a 12-megapixel ultrawide unit, a 10-megapixel telephoto camera, and a 10-megapixel periscope telephoto unit.
Galaxy S23 Ultra
Now that we got the hardware out of the way, let’s talk about their real-life performance. We are talking about two generations of phones here, so it is to be expected that the Galaxy S23 Ultra is better in the camera department. That is the case, and the difference is quite substantial. Samsung improved the cameras across the board, though some optimizations are still needed. In extreme HDR conditions, the phone does, at times, leave dark areas without much detail. In most HDR conditions it performs admirably, however.
It is better than the Galaxy S21 Ultra in every way. The pictures are better in terms of colors, you’re getting more details, they’re better balanced, and low light is also a major improvement. The ultrawide and telephoto shots are also noticeably better, though not to the level of the main camera images. You’ll even see some improvements in the periscope telephoto shots that go over the 3x level. If you’re in need of better camera performance, the Galaxy S23 Ultra certainly is an improvement. Video recording is also worth mentioning, as the Galaxy S23 Ultra footage is extra stable thanks to the changes Samsung made, and it looks better in pretty much every way.
Both of these phones include a good set of stereo speakers. The speakers on both phones have been tuned by AKG, and they both sound really good, and are quite loud. If we’re nitpicking, however, the Galaxy S23 Ultra did sound a bit louder, and provided a bit more bass.
Neither phone has a 3.5mm headphone jack, so you’ll have to use their Type-C ports if you’d like to connect your headphones via a wire. If you prefer a wireless connection, the Galaxy S23 Ultra offers Bluetooth 5.3, while its sibling supports Bluetooth 5.2.
The post Phone Comparisons: Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra vs Samsung Galaxy S21 Ultra appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Galaxy Watch 6 Classic with rotating bezel seems to be happening

It’s getting increasingly likely that Samsung‘s upcoming Galaxy Watch 6 series will bring back the physical rotating bezel. A regulator listing in China has confirmed the existence of two separate models with four sizes in total. By the looks of it, we will get a vanilla Galaxy Watch 6 in 40mm and 44mm sizes without the bezel ring and a Galaxy Watch 6 Classic in 42mm and 46mm with the iconic bezel ring.
If this rings a bell, that’s because the Galaxy Watch 4 series came in the same lineup. But Samsung changed the game last year with the Galaxy Watch 5 series. It launched two models but only three sizes — 40mm, 44mm, and 45mm. The latter was called the Pro and came with a massive battery (590mAh) instead of a rotating bezel. There was little hope that the company would bring back the bezel ring this year.
But things took an unexpected turn earlier this month. Samsung was spotted developing two different Galaxy Watch 6 size variants (model numbers SM-R93* and SM-R95*) with the same battery capacity (300mAh). Moreover, it was also found to be internally referring to the two models as “Fresh6” and “Wise6”. For the uninitiated, Fresh and Wise were the company’s codenames for the Galaxy Watch 4 and Galaxy Watch 4 Classic, respectively.
This was a strong hint that Samsung will launch two size variants of each Galaxy Watch 6 this year. A Chinese regulatory certification has now confirmed that. As said earlier, the vanilla model will be available in 40mm (SM-R930/SM-R935) and 44mm (SM-R940/SM-R945) sizes with 300mAh and 425mAh batteries, respectively. The Galaxy Watch 6 Classic will come in 42mm (SM-R950/SM-R955) and 46mm (SM-R960/SM-R965) with the same battery capacity, respectively. The Classic model should feature a physical bezel ring.
Samsung may launch a fifth Galaxy Watch 6 variant as well
As things stand, there’s no confirmation if Samsung will call its second Galaxy Watch 6 model Pro or Classic. The codenames suggest it will go with the latter, which will fit nicely with its past models featuring the rotating bezel. That frees up the Pro brand. Likely, the Korean firm will not launch a Pro model this year.
But we aren’t ruling out the possibility of a fifth Galaxy Watch 6 variant with a big battery. Things should soon get clearer as Samsung picks up more regulatory approvals for its next-gen smartwatches. The new wearables will debut in the second half of 2023, alongside the Galaxy Z Fold 5 and Galaxy Z Flip 5 foldables.
The post Galaxy Watch 6 Classic with rotating bezel seems to be happening appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Windows 11 'Moment 2' update adds third-party widgets & more

Microsoft has just rolled out the ‘Moment 2’ update for Windows 11 that brings a bunch of new cool features, including support for this-party widgets and a touch-optimized taskbar.
The update is heading to Windows 11 version 22H2, along with Patch Tuesday updates. While this update rolled out as optional last month, it’s now mandatory for all users to install it. It’s available as KB5023706 (build 22621.1413). You can check the Windows Settings app to see if the update is rolled out to your device or manually download it from the Microsoft website.
The first feature that the update brings to Windows 11 is a touch-optimized taskbar. This feature hides app icons so you can have more space. To check if it’s activated or if you want to make any changes to the taskbar, navigate to Settings > Personalization > Taskbar.
Microsoft released Windows 11′ Moment 2′ update
Windows 11 now allows you to add third-party widgets in the Widgets panel. This could be an efficient add-on for certain apps like messengers and music streaming apps. You can now pin the widgets of your favorite apps to the Widgets board.
Windows 11 version 22H2 update still has a lot to offer. The next added feature is quick access to Windows Studio effects through the Quick Settings panel on the taskbar. You can now apply effects to the device’s camera and microphone. For example, for a business meeting, you can cancel the background noise or blur the background.
Additionally, Task Manager on Windows 11 now has a search bar that lets you find things faster. Microsoft also added Braille displays and improved Narrator integration with Braille drivers for low-vision users. More voice commands are also added to Windows. Finally, Azure Active Directory users can see AI-based recommendations on the Start men.
Besides adding these features to Windows 11, Microsoft released updates to the Windows apps. For example, the Snipping Tool now has a screen recorder feature and a Notepad app support tab. Other small fixes, like a crash, while playing HDR videos or a bug that prevented users from logging in by Pin or fingerprint, are also included.
Windows 11 version 21H2 also got the same update as version 22H2. Of course, there is an advanced auto-learning feature for facial recognition on version 21H2 now that suits well with Windows Hello.
The post Windows 11 'Moment 2′ update adds third-party widgets & more appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

The dangers of ChatGPT have been highlighted by the NCSC

The UK’s National Cyber Security Center (NCSC) is alerting the public about the dangers of ChatGPT. This artificial intelligence model gained popularity after its launch a few months ago. After it became available to the public, a ton of people trooped in to try out its abilities in various ways.
Some people asked for recipes for specific dishes, answers to assignment questions, and other random questions. The response of this artificial intelligence model to various questions thrown it’s way amazed lots of people. For this reason, more people wanted to give ChatGPT a try, hence increasing its popularity.
Now the system on which this artificial intelligence model run has received an upgrade. The GPT-4 system brings improvements to the conversation abilities of various artificial intelligence models that rely on it. With the increasing adoption of this artificial intelligence model, are there any dangers that it poses to society? A recent update highlights a few, let’s take a close look at these dangers.
According to the National Cyber Security Center (NCSC) here are the dangers of ChatGPT
The UK National Cyber Security Center (NCSC) has alerted the public to the dangers of ChatGPT. They did this with a recent blog post on their official website, where they delved into ChatGPT and large language models (LLMs).
With the increase in popularity of these artificial intelligence models, there is a need to know the risk they might pose. Well, the UK National Cyber Security Center (NCSC) has done the research to help enlighten the public. From their findings, users of ChatGPT and other LLMs will get to know what majors to take with these artificial intelligence models.
One of the first observations to take to mind with the artificial intelligence models is that they might be misleading. Some information they provide to users’ requests might be wrong, biased, violent, etc. For this reason, users of ChatGPT and other LLMs should be mindful of the content they consume from these artificial intelligence models.
There is also the need to be careful about the type of information you share with these platforms. The National Cyber Security Center (NCSC) advises against sharing sensitive information with ChatGPT or other LLMs. These platforms might not reveal user information, but they have access to user queries and can be hacked, hence revealing these queries to the public.
For this reason, try not to ask such platforms questions that are quite sensitive to your personal life or work. The dangers of ChatGPT and other LLMs also encompass how cyber criminals and bad actors can put it to use. So, while you try new or existing large language models, it is important to understand the risks they pose.
The post The dangers of ChatGPT have been highlighted by the NCSC appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Second Life is coming to mobile, and a beta may drop in 2023

You may or may not remember Second Life, but whether or not you remember it, it seems you’ll get a second chance to see what it’s all about because it’s getting a mobile adaption, Ars Technica reports. The original Second Life game, which can still be played today, is for PC. It’s also been around for 20 years, which is what makes the mobile version somewhat of a surprising announcement. Especially if you weren’t even aware that game was still up and running.
Second Life developer Linden Lab recently shared a video that gives an overview of the mobile version. This is a preview though, and the game is still in active development. This ‘first look video’ though will give players an opportunity to see what Linden Lab has in store for fans.
The developers note that things are still very much a work in progress. So players won’t see much of a user interface or any functionality. But Linden Lab has made plenty of headway on what it considers the most important part of Second Life – the avatars and the environment.
Second Life on mobile should have a beta this year
In addition to the first look video, which you can view above, Linden Lab devs say that Second Life on mobile is likely to have a beta out later this year. At least that’s the plan.
The game is being built on Unity which will make it easy to develop for both Android and iOS. Both of which it’s planned to launch on when the game is ready. If you’re interested in this title, you may want to keep an eye out for the beta.
Linden Labs says that while development is going apace, it also wants to make the mobile version as much as like the PC version as possible. The game doesn’t have an official release date yet but don’t expect it to be launched anytime soon.
The post Second Life is coming to mobile, and a beta may drop in 2023 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Galaxy Tab S9, Fold 5 & Flip 5 tipped to use Galaxy S23's chipset

Samsung is expected to launch three new flagship Android tablets as part of its Galaxy Tab S9 series later this year. We should get a base model, a Plus, and an Ultra. The devices will probably arrive alongside the Galaxy Z Fold 5 and Galaxy Z Flip 5 foldables. Early rumors suggest that the Korean firm will ship all of these upcoming products with the same chipset that powers the Galaxy S23 series.
According to Twitter tipster @Tech_Reve, the Galaxy Tab S9 series and the new foldables will be powered by the Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 for Galaxy. It’s an overclocked version of the latest Qualcomm processor exclusively available to Samsung. While the regular version has its Cortex-X3 prime CPU core running at a clock speed of 3.20GHz, the Galaxy version goes up to 3.36GHz. The Adreno 740 GPU in it also runs at a higher frequency of 719MHz, against 680MHz in the regular Snapdragon 8 Gen 2.
The tipster further added that the Galaxy Tab S9 will pack a 10,880mAh battery. That’s slightly smaller than the 11,200mAh unit found inside last year’s Galaxy Tab S8 Ultra. However, power-efficiency gains brought by the new chipset should make up for that capacity deficit. Unfortunately, not much else is known about the upcoming Galaxy tablets at the moment. Rumors are that they will be the first waterproof flagship tablets from Samsung. We should get confirmation about that in the coming months.
The Galaxy Tab S9 series and new foldables will arrive in the second half of 2023
Samsung hasn’t been launching new flagship tablets in a yearly cycle lately. The Galaxy Tab S7 series arrived in August 2020 while the Galaxy Tab S8 came in February last year. We are now seemingly looking at an August/September 2023 launch for the Galaxy Tab S9 series. As said earlier, there haven’t been many rumors about the new tablets so far. That’s likely because the devices are still in the early stages of development. Leaks should start coming more frequently in a few months once Samsung finalizes everything and proceeds to the manufacturing step.
Likewise, leaks about the Galaxy Z Fold 5 and Galaxy Z Flip 5 will also come thick and fast in the coming months as the Korean firm progresses with the development of the two foldables. All of these devices should go official in August or September this year. The Galaxy Watch 6 series and a new pair of Galaxy Buds TWS earbuds should also debut alongside them. The Galaxy S23 FE may follow a few months later if it arrives at all. We will keep you posted with all the latest information about these upcoming Samsung products.
The post Galaxy Tab S9, Fold 5 & Flip 5 tipped to use Galaxy S23’s chipset appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Whatever you do, don't leave the Diablo IV beta queue

The Diablo IV beta has a queue, and it might be kind of borked. While there didn’t seem to be much of a wait if you were to log in when the beta went live at 9am PST on March 17, that wasn’t the case a little bit later.
Queue times began at a paltry 2 minutes and ballooned to a whopping 101 minutes a short while into the beta’s start time. As players are no doubt pouring in to try out Blizzard’s latest entry in the long-running action RPG series. A tweet from Diablo’s Global Community Development Director Adam Fletcher warns players not to leave the queue. And with good reason. Because as it turns out, it’ll spike your queue time up by a whole heck of a lot.
The wait times are still long too, even two and a half hours the beta went live. Even worse, if you exit the queue at any point, or log out of the game, your queue time resets. This goes for anyone who has an internet connection issue as well.
The Diablo IV beta queue should settle down later in the day
The queue times may be long now, but it probably won’t be this way throughout the remainder of the beta weekend. As more and more players get in, there will be less of a wait. People will get their fill and move onto doing something else for a little while. Or they may end up having other obligations that will cause them to have to shut the game down.
Basically, if you can’t or won’t deal with a wait right now, try coming back later to see if things settle. Remember the early access beta goes all weekend, and then there’s an open beta next weekend too. So there’s tons of chances to play. But whatever you do, don’t leave the queue if you’re already in it and you have the time wait. Stick it out, and you will be rewarded with a fun game experience.

The #DiabloIV beta experience right now. 🥲 pic.twitter.com/UkVkjFW0lm
— Justin Diaz (@omni__slash) March 17, 2023

The post Whatever you do, don’t leave the Diablo IV beta queue appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Discord adds colorful themes to the desktop app

Discord has added a new feature to the desktop app today in the form of themes, letting users add a splash of color to their app window. These aren’t to be confused with the light and dark themes that have been available for a while. But vibrant gradient palettes draped across the app to give your Discord experience “your personal vibe.”
The new color themes are available for the Discord app on desktop only and don’t appear to be available on mobile. But Discord says that mobile is on its to-do list. So users should be able to see these color themes available on the mobile at some point in the future. The themes are also compatible with both Windows and Mac. And they can be used on the browser version of Discord too. There is however, one small caveat.
Discord app color themes are available to Nitro subscribers only

As you may have guessed, here’s the rub. You’ll need to be a Nitro subscriber to get access to the color themes. Nitro does provide some other really cool benefits, though. Like larger file uploads, the ability to use animated profile avatars and more.
And with the potential for even more theme options down the line, having Nitro would open up the capability to really customize the look of your Discord experience. There are currently 16 different color themes that you can choose from. The color themes feature is in beta, so it’s quite likely users will see more colors once it rolls out as a stable feature.
You can change your theme to a new color by going to the settings menu, then clicking on the Appearance menu. You can also preview the themes if you want to see what all of them look like without having to back out of settings. And, the preview option is available to non-Nitro users too. So you can at least see what you’re missing.
The post Discord adds colorful themes to the desktop app appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

During Bankrutpcy, Bally Sports still wants MLB Streaming Rights

While Bally Sports’ owner, Diamond Sports Group declared Chapter 11 Bankruptcy earlier this week, there’s been a lot of talk about what will happen to the games their networks are set to broadcast. We’ve reported recently that some MLB teams are looking to get out of their contracts with Bally Sports, including the Texas Rangers. But, Bally Sports wants to keep its streaming rights during Bankruptcy.
Currently, Bally Sports is only able to stream MLB games in five markets. However, they are hoping to get the rights to stream all 14 MLB teams that they have broadcast rights to, through bankruptcy renegotiations. This is all done through the Bally Sports Plus service, which is $19.99 per month. So it’s not cheap, especially considering its just for one team.
Sports leagues have backup plans for Bally Sports
The MLB, NBA and NHL have all said that they have backup plans for streaming games, if Bally Sports is unable to do so.
However, for now, Bally Sports is still streaming the games for most of these teams. Minus the five contracts that they are rejecting.
Diamond Sports Group is looking to renegotiate these deals for rights, with all of the teams, during the bankruptcy process. It’s being reported right now that Diamond Sports Group has about $585 million in cash on hand, however they owe around $2 billion in fees to teams this year. So that’s going to require quite a bit of negotiations.
Of course, a good way to help solve this is to get Bally Sports channels back on streaming services like YouTube TV and Hulu + Live TV. Currently, only FuboTV and DIRECTV Stream have Bally Sports, and DIRECTV’s contract is coming up for renewal later this year. And Bally Sports in bankruptcy likely won’t help them get favorable terms with DIRECTV satellite and streaming products.
The post During Bankrutpcy, Bally Sports still wants MLB Streaming Rights appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

OSI to hold in person License Clinic workshop

OSI is pleased to announce our 2023 Open Source Initiative License Clinic, an in-person event to be held April 4th in Washington D.C. This one day workshop will cover advanced topics on open source software licenses of interest to the US federal government as well as emerging issues such as the confluence of AI models, licenses and data.  

The workshop is in keeping with the Open Source Initiative’s (OSI) non-profit educational mission and has been created in collaboration with the D.C. legal and technology communities. The small and timely content-rich clinic offers an educational opportunity for attendees as well as an opportunity for the OSI to hear what’s top of mind for government practitioners.

The clinic is designed as a cross-industry, cross-community workshop for legal, contract, acquisition and program professionals who wish to deepen their understanding of open source software licenses, and raise their proficiency to better serve their organizations objectives as well as identify problems which may be unique to the government.  Presenters will include OSI board members (current and emeritus) and federal government practitioners.

Topics include Open Source 201, an Expert Panel Discussion: challenges, successes, best practices, operational policies, resources for federal practitioners; a briefing on the evolution of Supply Bills of Material (SBOM); AI/ML OSS tools, licenses and modern challenges; a primer on alternative license.

 Expert Panelists and Presenters: 

Deb Bryant, OSI US policy director and board member emeritus Pam Chestek, founder Chestek Legal and OSI board director and License Committee chair Stefano Maffulli, OSI executive director Daniel Risacher, Department of Defense, Office of the CIO Luis Villa, co-founder and general counsel at Tidelift and OSI board director emeritus

The clinic is free to attend for OSI Professional Members and those with a .gov or .mil email address. Cost is $250 for general public.

Register now, seats are limited.

Source: opensource.org

Use stealth and wield magic in this upcoming pirate strategy game

One of the best things about games is the diverse nature of themes they can take on no matter the genre, something which is pretty well personified by Shadow Gambit: The Cursed Crew. In this upcoming strategy game from Mimimi Games, you’ll become part of a cursed pirate crew with one major goal. Find the legendary treasure of Captain Mordechai.
Since this is a strategy game combat will be a mix of turn-based movement and actions. You can also wield magic powers to slay your foes, but will also need to use stealth at times to remain undetected. Shadow Gambit: The Cursed Crew is set in an alternate history version of the Caribbean called the Lost Caribbean. The developers don’t mention an exact date for the time period, but it’s set during the golden age of piracy. Which would put it sometime between the 1650s and the 1730s.
If the setting and general theme of the game already have you interested, it gets better.
Shadow Gambit devs promise lots of player choice

Player choice in games can be a huge factor in keeping more players engaged and interested over the long-term. And Shadow Gambit: The Cursed Crew will apparently have plenty of player choice. From exploring islands to mixing up your crew and abilities, each mission can feel unique depending on how you want to tackle it.
The devs describe each island as a “small sandbox.” So you can have multiple points of entry and choose how to explore the islands you visit. As well as which islands to visit first and which missions to take on before others. Mimimi Games says there’s no set linear mission order. So it really is up to the player to decide how they want to go about things. You can check out more about Shadow Gambit: The Cursed Crew in the latest dev insight video below. You can also view the cinematic trailer and the first gameplay trailer. The game is set to release sometime this year, and is currently up for wishlisting on Steam.
Now the question remains, will it be playable on Steam Deck?

The post Use stealth and wield magic in this upcoming pirate strategy game appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Valve puts the Steam Deck on sale to celebrate its 1st birthday

The Steam Deck is going on sale for the first time ever since its release last year. If you weren’t aware, the Steam Deck turns 1 year old today. So to celebrate a well-deserved accomplishment, Valve is dropping the price of the Steam Deck and putting it on sale for 10% off.
Now you’re not saving hundreds of dollars here. But the Steam Deck is certainly worth it without any sort of discount. So any drop in price at all is an even better value. The Steam Deck is capable of a whole lot for a handheld computer. Whether that’s playing local games from your Steam library or installing Windows so you can play certain games that aren’t officially supported on the device. Such as Destiny 2, Blizzard’s games like Diablo IV, and many others.
You could even use it as a retro console machine for classic games. And, while we won’t be telling anyone how to do it, you could even use the Steam Deck to play Nintendo Switch games. The world is your oyster so to speak.
The Steam Deck sale is for a limited time only
As with many sales, the discounted Steam Deck prices won’t be around forever. Valve is only keeping the Deck at its discounted price through the end of the Steam Spring sale. That ends on March 23 at 10am PST, which means you have one whole week to grab the Deck at a lower price. If you don’t already have one. The best part, aside from paying less money of course, is that you no longer need a reservation to buy a Steam Deck.
If you purchase one now, you can expect it to ship in 1 – 2 weeks according to Valve. That’s a pretty quick turnaround compared to the months and months of waiting required during the reservation period. If you’re thinking about getting a Steam Deck, you can grab one from steampowered.com on the official Steam Deck buy page.

Happy Birthday Steam Deck! In celebration of a successful first year (of many more to come!) Steam Deck is 10% off from now until the end of the Steam Spring Sale on March 23 at 10am Pacific. https://t.co/RfIsomkC5h pic.twitter.com/Gy4e9pENvg
— Steam Deck (@OnDeck) March 16, 2023

The post Valve puts the Steam Deck on sale to celebrate its 1st birthday appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

YouTube TV wants you to go back to Cable

Today, YouTube TV announced that it is raising prices again. Stop me if you’ve heard this before, but they are raising prices due to rising content costs. Now, YouTube TV is going to cost you $72.99 per month (now for new customers, or April 18 for current customers). Who remembers when YouTube TV launched at $29.99? Prices have gone up quite a bit since then.
The price increase is not a surprise, and I’m not even made about it. But, with that price increase comes, fewer channels. In recent years, YouTube TV has lost channels like Bally Sports, which is the leader for regional sports across the country. It serves 14 markets, for the NBA, MLB and NHL. That was likely a big reason for the price at YouTube TV, as sports are expensive, especially regional sports. However, now YouTube TV has also lost MLB Network.
So we’re getting fewer sports on a streaming service that was targeting sports fans. And raising prices. It really sounds like YouTube TV wants you to go back to cable here.
Is cable a good alternative to YouTube TV?
Since YouTube TV announced the price increase, I’ve seen a lot of people saying that they are going back to cable. So I decided to check out Comcast and see how much a comparable cable package would cost. And, it’s about the same. Comcast offers around 125 channels for $70 per month. 125 is still more than what YouTube TV offers, but remember, it’s actually about half that. Since Comcast does double up on channels with non-HD and HD versions.
Now, don’t forget that with cable, you also pay other fees. This includes taxes, regional sports fees, cable box fees and much more. You also don’t get things unlimited DVR, or the ability to watch your content anywhere. Some content on Comcast you can watch outside of your home, but most of it, you cannot.
So is it a good alternative? Not really.

Is cable cheaper than YouTube TV?
Once you add in all of the fees that we mentioned above, a comparable package from Comcast would cost you about $100 per month. So no, it’s not cheaper.
Not to mention, with YouTube TV, you can also share and split the cost with other people. Which I actually do myself. I share YouTube TV with my parents, so I’m actually paying roughly half of what YouTube TV charges here.
Cable is also not as flexible as streaming TV. And DVR is limited to how much space is in your cable box. Versus YouTube TV offering unlimited cloud DVR.
Should I stick with YouTube TV?
I’ve been a YouTube TV member for many years now. And every time YouTube TV raises prices, or it loses a substantial number of channels (like when it was feuding with Disney or NBCUniversal in 2021 and 2022), I take a look at its competitors to see if I should switch. And the answer is usually no.
One of the big features for YouTube TV that keeps me around is, the unlimited cloud DVR. I actually rarely watch anything live, other than sports. And record everything to watch later. So I take advantage of that unlimited cloud DVR. Now, others do have this feature, like Hulu + Live TV and DIRECTV Stream, but they are also more expensive.
Now, DIRECTV Stream does have local sports with Bally Sports (though that might not be the case for long as their contract is coming up soon). However, it is not in their base plan. It’s in the more expensive plan that is $99.99/month. Along with a few other sports channels like the additional ESPN networks and BTN.
Then there’s Hulu + Live TV, which has mostly the same channels as YouTube TV, and adds in the A&E Networks. It also has Disney+ and ESPN+ included for a few bucks less. Which is pretty decent actually. But their live guide is just so bad. And the software is pretty tough to navigate. Making me stick with YouTube TV.

Why does YouTube TV want you to go back to cable?
So why does YouTube TV want you to go back to cable? Well, we don’t actually know that, it is the case. But it definitely seems like it. When YouTube TV launched, it was the cable killer. Offering 35 of the big cable channels, including sports and regional sports for just $30 per month. But now, the service has more than doubled in size and price. While losing a lot of those sports channels.
YouTube TV has fought with content providers over wanting more money. Disputes with Disney, NBCUniversal and Roku all come to mind as of late. And it looks like YouTube TV probably caved in, and now that added cost is being pushed down to the consumer. Which is very unfortunate, but that is how business works.
The post YouTube TV wants you to go back to Cable appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

YouTube TV is raising prices again, So here's the Best Live TV Streaming Alternatives

YouTube TV just announced that it is raising prices once again. This time by $8. Which represents a 12% increase from the last increase back in August of 2020. That puts it squarely in between most of its competitors. But this news has still annoyed quite a few people, since YouTube TV is still losing channels – like MLB Network – and not getting local sports back. Yet we are paying more. And these are things that their competitors do have.
That has a lot of people looking elsewhere to see where else they can get their Live TV streaming services. Well, we have rounded up the very best alternatives to YouTube TV. That includes DIRECTV Stream, FuboTV, Hulu + Live TV and Sling TV.
Best YouTube TV Streaming Alternatives
These prices are accurate as of March 2023. Many of which saw price increases in the past few months. Some might offer up specials, like Sling TV offering half off your first month. So definitely worth checking out.

Sign Up
Sign Up
7-Day Free Trial
Hulu + Live TV
7-Day Free Trial
Sling TV
50% off your first month

Price: Starting at $75/month
Free trial available: No
Sign Up
DIRECTV Stream is the third iteration of AT&T’s streaming Live TV service, and it offers a lot of channels that many of its competitors do not. Hence why it is priced higher than the others on this list.
Starting at $75/month, you can get 75+ channels. But if you really want or need a lot of channels, you can spend as much as $155/month for over 140 channels. However that price does include HBO MAX and Showtime. Making that price a bit more worth it.
Currently, DIRECTV Stream is the only streaming service that has all of the regional sports networks – from Bally Sports and NBC Sports. It does also offer unlimited cloud DVR storage now. And it’s not an added cost either.
It’s a pricey service, but it’s no doubt worth it with the features and channels that are included here.

Price: Starting at $75/month
Free Trial Available: Yes, 7-days
Sign Up
FuboTV has been marketed as a streaming service for sports fans. That’s because there are over 50 sports channels available on FuboTV. And that does not include regional sports networks – though it’s worth mentioning that Bally Sports is not available, only NBC Sports. Overall, there are 216 channels that are available on FuboTV right now. So there’s plenty to watch.
For $75/month, you’re getting a pretty good deal from FuboTV. That includes 108 channels, with over 130+ events in 4K. It also has 250 hours of Cloud DVR space, and you can share with your family allowing for up to three screens simultaneously.
FuboTV does allow you up to upgrade to its “Elite” plan which is $85.99/month and it increases the Cloud DVR to 1000 hours, and gives you unlimited screens.
FuboTV does also include most local channels, this will depend on your area of course.
Hulu + Live TV
Supported Devices
Price: $70/month
Free Trial: Yes, 7-days
Sign Up
Hulu + Live TV is one of the more popular options, because a lot of people already have Hulu. Hulu + Live TV is available for $69.99 per month, there’s one plan and then some add-ons available.
It has 75+ top channels, which includes all of our local channels. But again, the Bally Sports regional sports networks are missing here. NBC’s regional sports networks are available, however.
One feature that Hulu has that a lot of these other options do not have, is the massive on-demand library that Hulu has built up over the years. So in addition to the cloud DVR that is included with Hulu + Live TV, you also get the Hulu on-demand library. Which kind of renders the cloud DVR useless. As almost everything is on Hulu already.
Hulu + Live TV has also added unlimited Cloud DVR. So you can record virtually everything on your account. And watch it whenever. The big difference here is that you can only watch it for up to 9 months from the recording. But as long as it keeps airing, that won’t be an issue.
Sling TV

Price: Starting at $40/month
Free Trial: No
Sign Up
Sling TV is the cheapest, on the surface, but that is because it is an a la carte option. Basically, you have two options here, Sling Blue and Sling Orange, these are both $40 per month. or you can combine them for $55 per month. That’s going to get you 51 total channels if combined, which is not a lot.
However, there are plenty of add-ons available here. There’s the Sports Extra for $11/month, Comedy Extra for $6/month, News Extra for $6/month, Lifestyle Extra for $6/month and a few others too. There are also some bundles you can use to keep this cheaper. But you can get up to the $60-$70 prices of the other services on this list pretty quickly.
Sling TV does offer everything about 50 hours of DVR for free. Or you can upgrade to DVR Plus for around 200 hours of recording, and that will cost you $5 per month.
Premium channels are also available on Sling TV. This includes Showtime, Starz, Epix, Cinefest, Cinemoi, Comedy Dynamics and more.
The one big caveat for Sling TV is that local channels are not available. You will get on-demand content for FOX and NBC, that will depend on your market. As for CBS and ABC, you’re out of luck. But you can get an OTA antenna and watch these for free. That’s a big reason why Sling TV is so much cheaper than everyone else here.
The post YouTube TV is raising prices again, So here’s the Best Live TV Streaming Alternatives appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

How To Cancel YouTube TV

YouTube TV has been routinely angering its customers, though it’s not all its fault. Between raising prices to almost double what it initially launched at – now $65 per month – and losing channels, many customers are not happy. But luckily, you can cancel your YouTube TV subscription. That’s the beauty of cord cutting. The ability to ditch a service for a competitor in just minutes. Meanwhile, with cable, that is not possible. As most areas only have one or two cable operators available. So that’s another reason that it’s a good idea to switch to a streaming service. Makes it easier to vote with your wallet.
YouTube TV has recently lost the Bally Sports regional sports networks (though that’s more Sinclair’s fault than YouTube TV’s, since they are removing the networks from all the streaming services). Then they almost lost the NBC networks, which is roughly a fifth of YouTube TV’s channel offerings. However, NBC decided to step up and not force YouTube TV to include Peacock with its membership. And surprisingly, the price did not go up. Which is a good thing.
If you just want to stop using YouTube TV for a few weeks, maybe cut some costs, we’d recommend pausing YouTube TV instead. That will keep all of your recordings and continue recording, but without charging you. You can pause YouTube TV for up to six months. We’ll also show you how to pause your YouTube TV membership in this tutorial.
How to cancel YouTube TV
To cancel YouTube TV, you’ll need to either open the app, or go to tv.youtube.com. The process is virtually the same, aside from tapping versus clicking.
Then tap on your profile icon in the right-hand corner.
Next, you’re going to tap on Settings.
YouTube TV Settings
Tap on “Membership” which should be the first option on the left side. And should already be highlighted
Then you should see “Pause or cancel membership” underneath the YouTube TV listing that shows it as $64.99 per month.
Cancel your YouTube TV membership
Click on that. Now you can see options for pausing or cancelling your membership.
After you click cancel, it’ll ask to make sure you want to cancel, and just go through that process until it has successfully cancelled.
And that’s it. It’s pretty simple to cancel, and that’s one thing that YouTube TV still has over cable. The ability to easily cancel TV service, without needing to call them and explain to them you don’t want it any longer.
How to Pause YouTube TV
Pausing YouTube TV has a pretty similar process to cancelling it. Start out by opening the YouTube TV app.
Then tap on your profile picture.
Next, tap on Settings.
From there, you’ll want to tap on Membership.
Next tap on “Manage” next to the “Base Plan” option. This will be at the very top.
Now, you’ll see an option to pause your account. It defaults to eight weeks, but you can adjust the slider all the way up to 24 weeks (or about six months). It will also show you below, when your account will resume. YouTube TV also mentions that your recordings will be kept, which is a big deal.
Pause your YouTube TV membership
Now, just tap on Pause.
You’ll now get a confirmation that your account is put on pause (you’ll also get an email with details). And you’re all set.
That’s just how easy it is to pause your YouTube TV account. You can also choose to unpause it at any time. So if you paused it by mistake, or paused it for too long, you can unpause it and be back in business. Keep in mind that if you share this membership with others, their accounts will also be paused.
What’s the difference between cancelling and pausing YouTube TV?
Cancelling means that you’re not planning to return anytime soon. While pausing means that you plan to return in a month or two, or even longer.
If you do want to get rid of YouTube TV for a couple of months, pausing is the right way to go. This is because it will keep all of your shows in your library. While cancelling will get rid of it all.
However, with this price hike, YouTube TV is likely going to be seeing a whole lot of people cancelling their membership, unfortunately. Even though YouTube TV is a really good service – I’d still say, one of the best out there. At $65 per month, it’s a pretty tough ask. Especially since YouTube TV only has one plan, so you’re stuck paying for all of those channels at $65/month. Instead of having a smaller plan option that costs, say $50 per month for fewer channels.
Pausing is a good idea if you are looking to cut some costs for a few months, or if your favorite shows are off season now, so you don’t need YouTube TV. And that will save you $65 per month, which is no small cost, to be quite honest. Most other streaming Live TV services don’t really offer this ability. So this is a big deal.
YouTube TV has continued to improve its service, and is looking to add some more flexible packages. So we may not see any more price increases on the base plan. But we may lose some channels from that base plan. With them moving into the add-ons. This is simply because the costs to carry these channels are getting pretty pricey.
The post How To Cancel YouTube TV appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Warcraft Arclight Rumble: Everything You Need To Know – March 2023

This morning Blizzard officially announced Warcraft Arclight Rumble, a strategy/tower offense game based on the Warcraft universe coming to Android and iOS devices. This game wasn’t a complete surprise thanks to a few rumors. But up until this morning’s reveal many elements were still unknown. The name, basic gameplay features, and much more were a mystery until now.
And while there is still a good amount of information Blizzard hasn’t mentioned, there’s a lot of details that interested players can get a hold of following today’s announcement. We’ll break down everything there is to know so far about the upcoming title. Basically, this guide will serve as your go-to collective of information about Warcraft Arclight Rumble. Laying out all the important details about Blizzard’s first Warcraft game for mobile devices.
What is Warcraft Arclight Rumble?
As mentioned above, Warcraft Arclight Rumble is a strategy game for mobile devices. It’s set in the Warcraft universe, and is described by Blizzard as a tower offense game. At first glance, this might look like just another Clash Royale clone. But there appears to be far more that Warcraft Arclight Rumble offers than just competitive PvP.
In the game you’ll build armies of familiar Warcraft characters, defend your base, and attempt to take out your opponent’s base to claim victory. That’s the gist of it. Luckily Blizzard seems to have baked a ton of content into the game. And that bodes well for players (like myself), who aren’t as big on PvP tower offense games. In fact, Warcraft Arclight Rumble will feature both PvE and PvP game modes. Which means you’ll have something to dive into even if you’re not a huge fan of competitive gameplay.
With over 65 characters to collect and each character having their own unique skills, there will be tons of ways to build up your strategy to achieve your goal.
When is Warcraft Arclight Rumble Releasing?
Blizzard hasn’t set a launch date yet, but it has said that it wants to get the game into the hands of players this year.
Will there be any gameplay tests?
Yes. In fact, Blizzard is planning to hold some upcoming regional closed beta tests in the near future. It hasn’t said when these tests would begin though. Or what regions would be included. For Diablo Immortal, Blizzard kept the regional tests to Australia, New Zealand, and parts of Southeast Asia. Keep that in mind as Blizzard could be looking to extend the tests to those same regions.
How many game modes will there be?
Blizzard doesn’t say exactly how many game modes there will be in total. But there are multiple modes. Including a single player campaign, PvP battles, co-op play, and more.
Co-op play can include dungeons and raids, too. Allowing those looking for more of a challenge to take on harder content that requires working together with other players. Blizzard also says that there will be varied content to do every single week. With new weekly dungeons, likely new weekly raids and more.
Single player missions will have “bite-sized strategic puzzles to solve” giving just a bit of challenge to solo players. As of now Blizzard has confirmed Conquest, Dungeons, Raids, Co-Op, and PvP modes.
How many characters will there be and who are they?

In Warcraft Arclight Rumble, characters are presented in the form of tabletop miniatures. There are more than 65 different miniatures to collect comprised of both heroes and villains from the Warcraft universe. This also includes leaders like Jaina Proudmoore, Tyrion Fordring, Maiev Shadowsong and others. All of the leaders that have been announced so far are listed below, separated by the five families. Which include the Alliance, the Horde, the Undead, Beasts, and Blackrock.
Chances are Blizzard will add more leaders as time goes on. But the ones below are what players should expect at launch. Complete with brief descriptions of their abilities. Note that ability descriptions are not entirely specific at this time due to limited information.
Alliance Leaders
Tirion Fordring – Defensive tactics to bolster ranks
Maiev Shadowsong – Stealth tactics to quietly take out the enemy and/or provide units with stealth for easy movement
Jaina Proudmoore – Healing and magic tactics to keep units alive and deal massive damage
Horde Leaders
Grommash Hellscream – Sends out fast attacking troops to overwhelm the battlefield
Sneed – Siege units grab extra gold
Cairne Bloodhoof – Uses area of effect stuns to control enemies
Charlga Razorflank – Disables enemy defenses to help beast allies stampede and overwhelm the enemy
Hogger – Deploys fast-attacking units
Blackrock Leaders
Rend Blackhand – Flying units become one gold cheaper for faster deployment
General Drakkisath – Deploys searing elemental magic users to burn opponents to a crisp
Undead Leaders
Bloodmage Thalnos – Casts spells and grows stronger with every cast
Baron Rivendare – Summons endless armies of the undead to haunt the battlefield
What are the maps?

So far Blizzard hasn’t announced all of the maps that will be available. There will be over 70 maps to play in the single player campaign and more. Including Gurubashi Arena, Un’Goro, and others. Various maps will be available across The Eastern Kingdoms and Kalimdor, so don’t be surprised to see maps based on Orgimmar, the Under City, Stormwind and other high-profile zones. Once more information about maps is available we’ll have it listed here.
Does Warcraft Arclight Rumble have any social features?
Blizzard has designed Warcraft Arclight Rumble to include quite a few different social features and benefits. You can play co-op missions with friends, but you can also create and join guilds to gain a number of benefits. Such as taking on raids and earning progress towards weekly and daily rewards.
You can also chat with your guild friends in-game if you feel like taking a breather and just having a conversation. With guilds in play, expect large-scale challenges and battles between guilds for even more ways to enjoy all the chaos.
What is gameplay progression like?
As you progress through the game you’ll encounter tougher and tougher battles and even tougher challenges. Whether you win battles or lose, you’ll gain a certain amount of XP so your characters can all level up. This will not only make each of your army units stronger, but they’ll also gain more health and their abilities will become stronger too.
Augment your strategy with character talents

Leveling up characters also unlocks talents. Like Maiev Shadowsong’s Cloak Of Shadows, which causes her to cast smoke bomb to stealth all surrounding allied units, allowing them move undetected around the map. Another talent is the S.A.F.E. Pilot’s Comin’ In Hot!, which ignites the battlefield with a barrage of deployed rockets to damage enemies in the nearby area.
If you play with the Warsong Raider, you can use talents like Saboteur. This talent will cripple towers that you attack which reduces the tower’s damage dealt by 50% for 3 seconds. There’s also Single-Minded Fury which turns the Warsong Raider into a siege unit to ignore enemy units.
As you can see, there’s going to be a lot of variety here in how you can win. So mix and match you units and try out different talents to see what works best for you.
Tips to help with a strategic win

With so many different playable heroes and villains, there’s going to be a lot of different strategies for you to employ that can help you achieve victory. But there are a few main objectives you’ll want to focus on.
Defend your base

When you launch the battle, you’ll start by deploying units from your base. If the enemy destroys your base it’s game over. So don’t let them destroy your base. Beyond that, there are other strategic points and elements to pay attention to.
Control the meeting stones

These are strategic points of control on the map. Whoever controls the meeting stone can deploy units from that point. These appear to be located in the middle of the map, so they make for a great starting point for future deployed units as you’ll be closer to the boss and the enemy base. It doesn’t necessarily have to be your first objective to control the meeting stones. But they should be high up on your list.
Capture the guard towers

The guard towers are like that extra little bit of oomph that can help turn the tide of battle. Capture these, and you’ll “have a forward position on the map to assault the boss directly.”
Gather “shinies”

Throughout the map you may notice valuable points of interest like gold nodes and treasure chests. You’ll want to place at least some focus on gathering these nodes as they can reward you with more gold and useful items. Gold of course is the main in-game currency used to buy and deploy more units. So it’s better for you to have these than the enemy.
Synergize your units
Each set of units has their own strengths and weaknesses. So it would benefit you to get to know the units you’re thinking of taking with you into battle. For example, flying units are strong against melee units. Siege units do more damage to guard towers. Ranged units do more damage to flying units. And magic units are strong against infantry. Familiarize yourself with these details and you just might have an easier time in the battle.
Check out the trailers
Blizzard has put out a few trailers worth a watch, including a dev insight video that explains an overview of the game. There’s also a cinematic and a gameplay reveal trailer. You can watch all of those below.
Pre-register for the game
Pre-registration for the game is live right now for Android devices through Google Play. You can pre-register for the game through battle.net here. Or head straight to Google Play through the button below.
Warcraft Arclight Rumble
The post Warcraft Arclight Rumble: Everything You Need To Know – March 2023 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Meta to lay off another 10,000 employees

Meta CEO Mark Zuckerberg has just confirmed that the company will lay off 10,000 employees, and 5,000 open positions for hire will be closed.
Laying off employees to cut costs has become an epidemic in the United States. Tech companies are at the core of this change, and over 94,000 employees working in the US tech companies have been laid off so far in 2023 (via Crunchbase). Meta axed 11,000 jobs in November last year, and 10,000 more jobs will be removed soon. The company’s overall headcount will reduce to around 66,000 after these layoffs.
Meta has frozen its hiring to restructure the efforts and different departments. Zuckerberg says the process might take until the end of 2023 for the company’s headquarters in the US. After passing this transition period, Meta might begin hiring new employees again. The company’s tech departments will go through restructuring in late April, and business teams in late May.
Meta to lay off 10,000 workers and closes 5,000 job opportunities
According to Zuckerberg’s letter, Meta will “announce restructuring plans focused on flattening our orgs.” In simple terms, this statement means the company will reduce the number of departments and managers to reduce bureaucracy. It also suggests that Meta wants to focus on projects that are high priority. The CEO confirmed that Meta “will ask many managers to become individual contributors.”
Employees working at the Reality Labs hardware and metaverse division will reportedly get affected. We recently reported that Meta Quest Headsets are up to 33% off due to low sales, and the company has lost $13.7 billion on the Reality Labs unit. The company needs cash to stay operational, and that may be why it launched Twitter-like Meta Verified. A verified badge by Meta costs $11.99 monthly on the web and $14.99 on mobile apps.
Zuckerberg also asserted that 2023 would be the “year of efficiency” for Meta. He said the company is now working “faster” due to last year’s layoffs. “A leaner org will execute its highest priorities faster. People will be more productive, and their work will be more fun and fulfilling.” Zuckerberg said.
The post Meta to lay off another 10,000 employees appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

How to install and use browser extensions on Firefox Mobile

One of the perks of using web browsers on your desktop is the selection of extensions that you can add to them. They add additional functionality to your browsing. Think of them as the equivalent of downloading apps to your phone. Firefox has been testing browser extensions for its mobile app, and now they’re available for the public.
So, if you’re looking to add and use these add-ons to improve your browsing experience, you can. But, how do you install them? How do you access and use them after you’ve gotten the add-ons? Here’s a handy guide to show you how to.
In case you don’t know what browser extensions are
So, web browsers come with a selection of features that define the whole browsing experience. However, there could always be more that it can do. It’s possible to add additional functionality to your browser that the developer didn’t originally put in it. It’s possible to add more features to the browser through what are called browser extensions.
Browser extensions can be thought of as little programs that you can install onto your browser that perform certain tasks. These extensions are typically developed by third-party developers. A developer can make an extension to do just about anything.
There are all types of extensions that you can add on desktop browsers like Google Chrome and Microsoft Edge. These include voice-to-text dictation extensions, spell-check extensions, picture-in-picture extensions, and thousands more. However, for Firefox mobile, there are far fewer.
How to install browser extensions on Firefox Mobile
The first thing you’ll want to do is download the Firefox app or make sure that you’re using the most up-to-date version of it. Open the app and access the three-dot menu on either the top or bottom of the screen. There, in the top section, you’ll see the Add-ons menu item. Tapping on it will open the browser extension sub-menu.
The extensions menu
You’ll see the list of all of the available add-ons that you can install. While there are thousands of add-ons for desktop browsers, there are only 22 at the time of writing this article. The company is currently working on delivering more extensions, so you’ll see the list get longer as time goes on.

Each item will show you the title of the add-on, a short description of it, and its rating between one and five stars. Tap on the item to see additional information on it. You’ll see information like a longer description, the author, the version number it’s on, when it was last updated, and a link to the homepage.

Adding the extensions
If you want to add the browser extension, tap on the “+” button on the right side of the item. When you do that, you’ll see a little popup appear showing you the permissions that the extension needs to function. Review those permissions carefully and decide if you want to give those permissions.
If you’re comfortable, tap on the Add button on the bottom right. After that, the browser will download and install the add-on. When it’s installed, you’ll see another pop-up appear giving you the option to allow the extension while in private mode. After that, you’re good to go.

Managing the add-ons
When you access the three-dot menu again, you’ll see a little arrowhead on the Add-ons button. When you tap on it, you’ll see the list of some of your installed extensions pop up at the bottom of the screen. If you want to add more extensions, tap on the Add-ons Manager button at the bottom.
When you do that, you’ll see the list of all available extensions just as before. Only, the extensions you’ve installed will be pinned to the top.
If you tap on an extension that you’ve already installed, you’ll see a different page pop up. you’ll see the toggle to enable/disable it along with the toggle to allow/disallow it to run in private mode. Under those, you’ll see the Settings, Details, and Permissions buttons.
Lastly, you’ll see the Remove button under all of those options. When you tap it, the browser will remove it immediately. There’s no confirmation screen, so you’ll want to be careful not to press it by accident.
Some recommended add-ons
Read Aloud: A Text to Speech Voice Reader is a handy plug-in to install if you want to have your text read back to you. This is also an extension that you can install on the desktop version of Chrome. It’s a useful tool that will read back any selected text.
You’re able to dig into the settings for the extension and customize it to function how you please. You’re able to change the language, speed, pitch, and volume of the voice.
BitWarden is a useful and free password manager that you can use if you want to keep all of your passwords under one roof. It’s able to generate strong passwords for different services. The passwords always comply with the security requirements of each site.
You know that your information is safe because BitWarden uses world-class end-to-end encryption. This keeps it protected from people who try to hack into your account and steal your passwords.
Search By Image is a powerful and reliable reverse image search tool. It works with more than 30 different search engines. With this tool, you’re able to upload an image and search for the possible source of it. It’s useful if you’re trying to check the authenticity of an image.
These are only a few of the add-ons that you can use. As time goes on, you’ll see more useful browser extensions. You never know if your next favorite extension is right around the corner.
The post How to install and use browser extensions on Firefox Mobile appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

PowerA now offers a mobile gaming clip for the PS5 controller

PowerA makes all kinds of gaming accessories and now that includes a new mobile gaming clip for the PS5 controller and one for the Xbox Series X|S controller. These new mobile gaming clips are also compatible with the controllers from Sony and Microsoft’s past generation consoles, the PS4 and Xbox One.
Both clips are relatively the same but the Xbox model (officially called the MOGA Play & Charge Gaming Clip) does have one slight advantage. It lets you mount your phone and charge it at the same time. This is all thanks to its integrated power bank with a 1,500mAh battery capacity. So you can keep your phone topped up while playing mobile or cloud games.
The PlayStation model, called the MOGA Mobile Gaming Clip, doesn’t have a power bank. It does however end up being a little bit cheaper in price because of that. Which is a win in our book.
You can secure the PS5 controller clip from PowerA right now
And just in case you use or prefer an Xbox controller for your mobile gaming needs, it’s available as well. Both new controller clips from PowerA can be picked up through the company’s Amazon store. The PlayStation version retails for $19.99 and the Xbox version retails for $29.99. That being said, the PlayStation model is only available for pre-order, and doesn’t actually launch until March 21. Whereas the Xbox model launches today, March 14. The Xbox clip also seems to be out of stock through Amazon at the moment, but you can grab it directly from PowerA.
Both clips support phones that are up to 3.25-inches wide so they should fit almost any phone. They also come with grippy rubberized clamps to ensure that your phone isn’t slipping out or getting scratched up. And since this is a controller clip, it’ll support both Android and iOS devices. As nothing specific to either platform plugs into the controller clip. Making this a perfect option for sharing in households that have both device types.
PowerA MOGA Mobile Gaming Clip – PlayStation
PowerA MOGA Play & Charge Gaming Clip – Xbox
The post PowerA now offers a mobile gaming clip for the PS5 controller appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

OpenAI introduces the next evolution of ChatGPT: GPT-4

Just when you thought that ChatGPT couldn’t get any scarier, OpenAI introduces us to GPT-4. This is the fourth iteration of the company’s powerful chatbot, and it brings some notable improvements.
It’s hard to imagine that ChatGPT could become any more powerful, but that’s the nature of technology. According to the company, GPT-4 exited testing back last August. Now, it’s available for people to try.
OpenAI unveils GPT-4. What can it do?
There are some notable improvements to GPT-4 that avid users will love. This includes several quality-of-life improvements.
Let’s start with the big difference; you can use images as input. The company gave an example of a user inputting an image of a bunch of balloons. Then, they asked it what would happen if the strings holding the balloons were cut. GPT-4 responded by saying that all of the balloons would fly away.
GPT-4 can provide additional context based on what’s in the image. If you input an image of a bunch of cooking ingredients, it will tell you what they are. Not only that, but it can tell you the possible dishes that you can make with them. Basically, you can input the image and ask GPT-4 whatever you want.

GPT-3 is able to create pretty long-form content. Its responses can be as long as 3000 words. That’s sufficient to jot down full articles, short stories, poems, scripts, etc. However, GPT-4 takes things up several notches and increases the number of words by more than eight times. GPT-4 can produce responses up to 25,000 words.
There are a ton of other improvements to this chatbot, so if you’re interested in learning more about it, OpenAI has a whole page dedicated to GPT-4. You can get a glimpse of what it has to offer.
Who can use it?
The company released GPT-4 to the public today and you can access it now. The only thing is that it’s exclusive to GPT Plus users. This is the $20/month subscription that offers additional features.
The post OpenAI introduces the next evolution of ChatGPT: GPT-4 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Sony is currently developing a PS5 Pro, plans to launch next year

A PS5 Pro launch is now rumored to be planned for 2024, according to a new report from Tom Henderson at Insider Gaming. The PS5 Pro has been a question ever since the launch of the PS5 and PS5 Digital Edition back in 2020. With consumers wondering whether or not Sony would follow in the footsteps of the PS4 by launching a Pro model a few years later.
Coming up this Fall, it’ll be three years officially since the PS5 was released. But there won’t be a PS5 Pro sitting on the shelves this coming holiday season. Instead, Sony is looking to next year for the release of its Pro model PS5 console. This is stated to be a “tentative” release date though. So keep in mind that things could change. Sony could choose to push the date further out or further forward for an earlier release.
The PS5 Pro will tentatively launch in late 2024, and is currently in development
The report states that Sony is actively working on the development the PS5 Pro console, but it doesn’t mention much about specs or hardware. In addition to the tentative release date though, there may be a clue as to what Sony is planning. Sony has filed a new patent that mentions improvements to its ray tracing effects. Specifically the patent was filed by PS5 architect Mark Cerny, and refers to a “System And Method For Accelerated Ray Tracing.” As well as a “System And Method For Accelerated Ray Tracing With Asynchronous Operation And Ray Transformation.”
This suggests Sony is working on improving the ray tracing for the Pro model console. And that could lead to improved graphics. Just like with the PS4 Pro compared to the PS4.
Before Sony releases a Pro version of the PS5, it’s expected to launch a another PS5 for 2023. This would be a replacement for the standard model near the end of this year. Said to be a PS5 with a detachable disc drive to help cut down on production costs. Alleviating the need for a Disc version and a Digital version.

Sony Interactive Entertainment has filed a new patent that suggests the format holder is looking to optimise its ray tracing effects on #PS5
— Gamingnews (@Onion00048) February 25, 2022

The post Sony is currently developing a PS5 Pro, plans to launch next year appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Senators want to protect online data with Data Care Act

The US senators have reintroduced the Data Care Act to safeguard users’ online data. The bill was first introduced in 2018.
Lawmakers in the United States have brought tech companies under the radar to scrutinize their measures to protect users’ data. The US House Judiciary recently subpoenaed the Big Tech CEOs over censorship claims. Senator Brian Schatz from Hawaii is now reintroducing the Data Care Act to make websites, apps, and other online providers “reasonably secure” individual identifying data. Schatz is accompanied by 18 other senators.
According to the bill details, companies should notify users of data breaches, and they can’t also use the data in ways that harm users. Additionally, the third parties with whom the data is shared must treat the data with respect and care.
“Websites and apps that collect data from their users need to be protecting this data, not using it to harm them,” said Senator Schatz. “Doctors and lawyers are required to protect people’s data, and our bill will help ensure online companies aren’t exploiting it, either.”
Senators keep tech companies accountable over online data with Data Care Act
If rules are violated, the Federal Trade Commission (FTC) can impose a fine on both companies and third parties. Each state can also introduce civil enforcement actions, but FTC can intervene if needed.
The Data Care Act is a bipartisan bill, but it’s mostly supported by Democrats like Elizabeth Warren and Amy Klobuchar. The Democrats have the majority in the Senate and Republicans control the House. So, the Data Care Act. needs approvals from both sides. The bill also couldn’t come to a vote in 2018, but it’s more likely now to get a majority vote as lawmakers are more sensitive toward online data and privacy.
Both Democrats and Republicans seem to be in favor of bills that keep Big Tech accountable. Besides the American tech companies, foreign apps, like TikTok, have become a source of concern for lawmakers. The Senate has recently passed a bill that allows the White House to ban TikTok.
The post Senators want to protect online data with Data Care Act appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Samsung's March 2023 update live for the Galaxy S10 series

Samsung has released the March 2023 Android security patch for the Galaxy S10 series. The latest security update is currently rolling out to the Galaxy S10e, Galaxy S10, and Galaxy S10+ in Europe. The company should cover the Galaxy S10 5G with the new SMR (Security Maintenance Release) in the coming days. It should also expand the release to other markets soon, including the US.
The March SMR for Galaxy devices patches more than 60 vulnerabilities. These include 23 Samsung Vulnerabilities and Exposures (SVE) items. SVEs are Galaxy-specific privacy and security flaws. These flaws don’t exist on Android products from other brands. The Korean firm patched issues with Settings, SystemUI, Bluetooth, Galaxy Themes Service, Exynos baseband, Samsung Keyboard, Call application, and many other system apps, services, and components. Some of these flaws allowed local attackers to access protected data or sensitive information without proper permission.
Apart from these Galaxy-specific patches, the March SMR for Samsung’s Android devices also includes 40-odd patches part of Google’s latest ASB (Android Security Bulletin). These are patches for vulnerabilities in Android OS and other partner components, provided by the respective vendors. At least five of these flaws were labeled critical by the Android maker. Some of them allowed remote code execution, paving a way for attackers to remotely take control of an affected device without the victim’s knowledge.
Samsung pushes the March security update to the Galaxy S10 series
Samsung has been seeding these vulnerability fixes to its Galaxy devices since last week. It has already updated the Galaxy S23, Galaxy S22, Galaxy S21, and Galaxy S20 phones to the March SMR. The Galaxy S10 lineup is now joining the party too. According to SamMobile, which first reported this rollout, users of the Galaxy S10e, Galaxy S10, and Galaxy S10+ in Bulgaria, Serbia, the Baltic region, the Czech Republic, and the Netherlands are receiving this update with the firmware build number G97xFXXSGHWC1. A wider release should be just around the corner.
The Galaxy S10 trio doesn’t seem to be picking up anything else with this update. Samsung is only pushing the latest vulnerability fixes to its 2019 flagships. And this isn’t surprising. Having already completed four years in the market, the devices are at the fag ends of their lives. They will only pick a few more security updates before the company drops official support for them. The Galaxy S10 series stopped getting feature updates after Android 12. If you’re using any of these phones, you should consider upgrading to a newer mode. You can check out these Galaxy S23 deals.
The post Samsung’s March 2023 update live for the Galaxy S10 series appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Galaxy Z Fold 5 & Flip 5 could be world’s first dust-resistant foldables

In 2021, Samsung launched the Galaxy Z Fold 3 and Galaxy Z Flip 3 as the world’s first smartphones with an official IP (ingress protection) rating for water resistance. Things remained unchanged last year, with the Galaxy Z Fold 4 and Galaxy Z Flip 4 both coming with an IPX8 rating. The company could now take things up a notch this year. The Galaxy Z Fold 5 and Galaxy Z Flip 5 could be dust-resistant too.
Samsung is developing a new type of hinge for its fifth-gen foldables. The waterdrop hinge on the Galaxy Z Fold 5 and Galaxy Z Fip 5 will allow the phones to close shut when folded. The flexible display panel will fold in the shape of a drop of water, thus reducing the crease on the screen. The change will also make the phones thinner and lighter, with at least ten grams taken off last year’s Fold model which weighed a whopping 263 grams.
But that isn’t all. According to Twitter tipster @chunvn8888, the gap-less design of the Galaxy Z Fold 5 and Galaxy Z Fip 5 could enable Samsung to offer an official IP rating for dust resistance (likely IP68). The company is currently evaluating the technical feasibility of this implementation. So it isn’t set in stone just yet. But if the Korean firm pushes its limits, it could launch the world’s first dust-resistant foldables this year. Other brands have yet to achieve waterproofing.
Galaxy Z Fold 5 and Flip 5 could further improve Samsung’s foldable lineup
The foldable market is quickly getting crowded. We already have eight brands with at least one foldable smartphone under their belt (Oppo, Vivo, Huawei, Honor, Xiaomi, Tecno, and Motorola are the other seven). Two more brands are expected to enter the market later this year (OnePlus and Google).
Many of these brands have done a better job than Samsung in making the devices lightweight and slimmer. Some have even included a more usable cover display.
However, Samsung’s Galaxy Z models are still the world’s most popular smartphones. Not just because they are water resistant. While that’s a critical feature, Samsung’s Flex Mode is a game changer. It lets you unfold the devices at various angles. Not many foldables do that currently. The Galaxy Z lineup also benefits from the company’s robust set of software features that make them true companions for those who love multitasking on the go.
Of course, rivals are catching up to it fast. But Samsung is further improving its foldables this year by switching to a new type of hinge and potentially adding dust resistance.
These improvements may help it maintain a lion’s share in the market for another year. It remains to be seen which brand emerges as the biggest threat to Samsung in the foldable market. Industry analysts expect the market size to double this year in terms of volume.
The post Galaxy Z Fold 5 & Flip 5 could be world’s first dust-resistant foldables appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

You can preload the Diablo IV beta starting this Wednesday

The Diablo IV beta starts this week and you’ll be able to preload the game beginning this Wednesday. In an updated post about the beta, Blizzard highlighted a few additional details about the content of the game during the beta period. As well as when you can install the necessary game files to be prepared for when the beta goes live.
As it turns out, you can preload the Diablo IV beta beginning on Wednesday, March 15 at 9am PST. This time is the same for all available platforms. So that means PC players, PlayStation players, and Xbox players can all access the preload. However, the preload times are not the same for both the early access beta and the open beta. Those two betas are happening a week apart.
The Diablo IV open beta preload begins March 22
If you didn’t get in to the early access beta, then you will need to wait a little bit longer to preload the game. Don’t worry though, there will still be time to install the files ahead of the beta going live. To recap, the open beta begins on March 24 at 9am PST. The preload time for this beta, which is next week, will be on March 22 at 9am PST. So you will have exactly 48 hours to get the game installed and be prepared for that Friday morning.
Those who take part in either beta weekend will want to keep an eye out for a massive world boss, Ashava. Which will only pop up at certain times and can reward “a sizable loot drop” if the boss is taken down. For the early access beta, he’ll pop up at 10am, 12pm, 10pm, and midnight PST. For the open beta he’ll appear on March 25 at all four of those same times.
Here are the beta PC specs
In addition to the beta preload times, Blizzard has also shared the minimum and recommended specs for the beta. You’re going to need at least 45GB of available space to hold the game files. So clear out some room if you’re running low.
Blizzard also recommends at least 16GB of RAM, an NVIDIA GeForce GTX 970 or AMD Radeon RX 470 GPU, and an Intel Core i5-4670K or AMD R3-1300X CPU. This is if you want to run the game at 1080p at 60 frames per second with medium graphics settings. But, you can skate by with the minimum specs which are at least 8GB of RAM, an NVIDIA GeForce GTX 660 or AMD Radeon R9 280 GPU, and an Intel Core i5-2500K or AMD FX-8100 CPU. You’ll also need DirectX 12 regardless.
The post You can preload the Diablo IV beta starting this Wednesday appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Samsung to launch a new Galaxy SmartTag later this year

More than two years after launching its first smart object tracker, Samsung is reportedly preparing to launch a succeeding model. The Korean firm plans to launch a second-gen version of its Galaxy SmartTag in the second half of this year. The reported timeline suggests it will arrive alongside the new foldables and wearables.
Samsung launched the original Galaxy SmartTag and Galaxy SmartTag+ alongside the Galaxy S21 series in January 2021. The former is a Bluetooth-powered tracker while the latter adds ultra-wideband (UWB) support. These tiny tech pieces work in conjunction with the company’s SmartThings IoT (internet of things) platform to help you find lost objects through a crowdsourced network. You can locate your object using SmartThings Find. Galaxy SmartTags will exchange encrypted signals with the SmartThings IoT network to let you know about its location.
The two smart trackers also feature a physical button that lets you remotely ring your smartphone or tablet should you misplace them. The same button can be programmed to serve as a remote controller for your IoT and smart home devices. Despite all of these capabilities, Samsung’s first foray into smart trackers doesn’t seem to have gone as planned. Two years have passed with no sign of new models. Perhaps this market never took off as the company has anticipated. Apart from Apple, not many have succeeded here.
But Samsung isn’t giving up just yet. It is now gearing up to launch a new version of the Galaxy SmartTag, sources have told SamMobile. Unfortunately, no other information is available at the moment. It’s unclear if the Korean firm will launch two models once again. We also don’t know what improvements it will bring to the table. The publication speculates that Samsung may offer a better wireless range, louder beeper volume, and enhanced security measures that prevent misuse or unauthorized tracking.
Samsung is developing a second-gen Galaxy SmartTag
We should hear more about the second-gen Galaxy SmartTag in the coming months as Samsung progresses with its development. As said earlier, the company plans to launch it in the second half of 2023. More precisely, somewhere between July and September. That’s when it is expected to unveil the Galaxy Z Fold 5 and Galaxy Z Flip 5 foldables too. The launch event should also see the unveiling of the Galaxy Watch 6 series and a new pair of TWS earbuds. The Galaxy S23 FE may be part of the lineup as well. We will keep you posted.
The post Samsung to launch a new Galaxy SmartTag later this year appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Galaxy Z Fold 5 may not have an upgraded camera

Samsung may not equip the Galaxy Z Fold 5 with a 200MP camera, or even a 108MP unit. According to the noted tipster Ice Universe, the upcoming foldable will stick to a 50MP sensor for the primary rear camera. They precisely claim that it’s the “same camera module” found on the 2022 model. It is reportedly “impossible” for the Korean firm to equip the handset with the 200MP camera found on the Galaxy S23 Ultra. The source doesn’t explain whether it has to do with costs or if it’s a technical limitation.
Galaxy Z Fold 5 may not get improved cameras
Based on the leaks and rumors so far, the Galaxy Z Fold 5 looks set to bring plenty of upgrades to Samsung’s foldable lineup this year. Most notably, the handset could be thinner and come with a less visible display crease. The company has developed a new waterdrop-type hinge to make this possible. We are also expecting improvements in terms of durability and overall functionality of the phone.
There have been talks about camera upgrades too. But if the latest rumor is accurate, that won’t be the case. The Galaxy Z Fold 5 would come with the same camera setup as its predecessor. At least the primary rear shooter will remain unchanged.
This would be a little disappointing. Not because Samsung should have included a 108MP or 200MP camera. A 50MP unit is fine. But an unchanged sensor isn’t. The company could have equipped the new foldable with the improved camera hardware.
The Galaxy Z Fold 4’s 50MP camera has an aperture of f/1.8, Dual Pixel PDAF (Phase Detection Auto Focus), and OIS (Optical Image Stabilization). While it is no slouch, there’s always room for improvement. The fifth-gen foldable would have benefitted more from Samsung’s improved camera software and processing if it got hardware improvements too.
But not to be. Hopefully, the company has optimized the sensor to make it work better. After all, smartphone photography is a lot about software rather than hardware.
No S Pen slot, unchanged cover display
Rumors about the Galaxy Z Fold 5 have been coming quite frequently in recent weeks. The word is that Samsung will not include a built-in S Pen slot because it wants to make the foldable thinner. And an unchanged length and breadth mean the cover display may not change either. We should hear more about the Galaxy Z Fold 5 and Galaxy Z Flip 5 in the build-up to their launch in the second half of the year.
The post Galaxy Z Fold 5 may not have an upgraded camera appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Samsung loses again as Qualcomm announces next Snapdragon launch

Qualcomm has announced a new Snapdragon launch event for next week. The March 17 event in Beijing, China is expected to bring the Snapdragon 7+ Gen 1, its latest premium mid-range chipset. There are also hints of it being the Snapdragon 7 Gen 2, but we don’t have any confirmation yet. Either way, while a new processor is a win for most Android OEMs, it isn’t for Samsung, albeit for a different reason. The Korean firm once again lost out against TSMC in the race to manufacture a Qualcomm chipset.
The Snapdragon 7+ Gen 1 is a 4nm chipset. There haven’t been many leaks or rumors about this Qualcomm processor, but we have a few details. A Geekbench listing recently revealed that the chipset (identified by the part number SM7475) has one Cortex-X2 prime CPU core clocked at 2.92GHz, three Cortex-A710 mi-cores operating at a maximum frequency of 2.5GHz, and four Cortex-A510 efficiency cores clocked at 1.8GHz. The Adreno 725 GPU handles graphics with a maximum clock speed of 580Hz.
This would be the first Snapdragon 7 series Qualcomm processor to feature ARM’s Cortex-X series CPU. Industry insiders are calling the Snapdragon 7+ Gen 1 an underclocked Snapdragon 8+ Gen 1, which is a flagship chipset launched last year. The upcoming processor scored 1,232 points in the single-core CPU test and 4,095 points in the multi-core CPU test during the aforementioned Geekbench run. These numbers are pretty impressive for a mid-range chipset. Thankfully, it won’t be a long wait before the Snapdragon 7+ Gen 1 is official. Stay tuned for the launch event next week.
TSMC will manufacture the next Qualcomm Snapdragon processor
Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 7+ Gen 1 is a big loss of business for Samsung Foundry. The Korean firm manufactured last year’s Snapdragon 7 Gen 1 and was likely hoping to get the contract for its successor as well. But it was not to be. Its Taiwanese rival has snatched the contract for the Snapdragon 7+ Gen 1. Qualcomm opted for the latter’s solution because of power efficiency and yield issues with that of Samsung.
This is precisely the reason why the American chip giant switched to TSMC for manufacturing its Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 processor. It is rumored to stick with the Taiwanese firm for its future chips as well. As for Samsung, it is losing trust in the industry. Tesla and others have also switched to TSMC from it in recent months. Even its mobile division doesn’t want to use Samsung Foundry chips in flagship products. It remains to be seen if the Korean firm bounces back anytime soon.
The post Samsung loses again as Qualcomm announces next Snapdragon launch appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Modern Warfare II Season 02 Reloaded adds duels, raid 2 and more

Modern Warfare II is set to transition into Season 02 Reloaded soon and with it comes a ton of new content. This includes a new mode called One in the Chamber, which will allow players to essentially duel each other using pistols.
As the name implies, players will get a pistol and a single bullet in the chamber of their gun. A shot to any part of the body is a one hit kill. But scoring that kill refunds your bullet so you can take on the next opponent. Miss, and you’re more than likely dead. One in the Chamber is a free-for-all match type so you’ll be going in alone against all other opponents. The goal obviously being to come out as the last person standing.
The mode won’t be exactly like a proper duel. Since you won’t be standing in front of your opponents waiting to shoot on queue. But it’s as close as we’re probably going to get to an old Western showdown. In addition to One in the Chamber, Season 02 Reloaded for Modern Warfare II will also add the second raid episode, new maps, and new operator bundles like this one based on Shredder from TMNT.
Modern Warfare II will get its second raid with Season 02 Reloaded

The upcoming Season 02 Reloaded is going to be making some nifty changes. One of these changes is a nice quality of life improvement to the raid episodes. Starting next week Wednesday, when the second raid episode goes live, players will be able to jump right in with their squad and tackle the new challenges ahead.
With the previous raid episode, players had to first acquire a raid assignment to unlock the raid episode. These could be found by completing various challenges across Warzone 2 and multiplayer. Going forward, raid assignments will no longer be needed for either raid episode.
Outside of the new raid, players are being treated to a new 6v6 core multiplayer map called the Himmelmatt Expo. There’s also going to be two more modes added. All or Nothing which is another free-for-all match type where you have throwing knives and a pistol with no ammo. The goal being to reach 20 eliminations before the other players. The third and final new mode coming to the game is called Drop Zone. This is a team-based mode where you must guard and hold the drop zone to earn points. Every 15 seconds your team holds the drop zone, a care package will be dropped nearby.
New Path of the Ronin challenges will have you chasing special camos

MW II’s Path of the Ronin event is coming to a head for its first set of challenges. Which are based on the seven virtues of the Bushido code. You’ll have until March 15 at 9am PST to complete these, at which point the challenges will shift.
The Path of the Ronin event will then task players with an entirely new set of challenges to unlock specialized camos. Each challenge corresponds to one of the game’s weapon types. Complete each challenge to unlock the Winds of Ash camo for every weapon in that weapon type category. If you unlock the camo on every weapon type, then you’ll also unlock a second camo called Bowing Blossoms which can be used on every weapon in the game.
But, be prepared for a grind. As it seems like the challenges may take quite a bit of time for some players.
The post Modern Warfare II Season 02 Reloaded adds duels, raid 2 and more appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Recap/Summary of the Digital Market Act workshop in Brussels

This Monday, I was in Brussels to attend a stakeholder workshop for the Digital Market Act (DMA) organized by the European Commission. For those who aren’t familiar with the DMA, it’s a new law that the European Parliament voted on recently and one of its goals is to force interoperability between messaging services by allowing small players the ability to communicate with users from the so-called gatekeepers (e.g., WhatsApp).

I attended this meeting as a representative of KDE and NeoChat. NeoChat is a client for the Matrix protocol (a decentralized and end-to-end encrypted chat protocol). I started developing it with Tobias Fella a few years ago during the covid lockdown.

I learned about this workshop thanks to NLNet, who funded previous work on NeoChat (end-to-end encryption). They put Tobias Fella and me in contact with Jean-Luc Dorel, the program officer for NGI0 for the European Commission. I would never have imagined sitting in a conference room in Brussels, thanks to my contribution to Open Source projects.

I work on NeoChat and other KDE applications as a volunteer in my free time, so I was a minor player at the workshop but it was quite enlightening for me. I expected a room full of lawyers and lobbyists, which was partially true. A considerable amount of attendees were people who were silent during the entire workshop, representing big companies and mostly taking notes.

Fortunately, a few good folks with more technical knowledge were also in the room. With, for example, people from Element/Matrix.org, XMPP, OpenMLS, Open Source Initiative (OSI), NlNet, European Digital Rights (EDRi) and consumer protection associations.

The workshop consisted of three panels. The first was more general, and the latter two more technical.

Panel 1: The Scope, Trade-offs and Potential Challenges of Article 7 of the DMA

This panel was particularly well represented by a consumer protection organization, European Digital Rights, and a university professor, who were all in favor of the DMA and the interoperability component. Simon Phipps started a discussion about whether gatekeepers like Meta should be forced to also interop with small self-hosted XMPP or Matrix instances, or if this would only be about relatively big players. I learned that, unfortunately, while it was once part of the draft of the DMA, social networks are not required to interop. If Elon had bought Twitter earlier, this would have probably been part of the final text too.

From this panel, I particularly appreciated the remarks of Jan Penfrat from the EDRi, who mentioned that this is not a technical or standardization problem, and pointed out that some possible solutions like XMPP or Matrix already exist and have for a long time. There were also some questions left unanswered, like how to force gatekeepers to cooperate, as some people in the audience fear that they would make it needlessly difficult to interoperate.

After this panel, we had a short lunch, and this was the occasion for me to connect a bit with the Matrix, XMPP and NlNet folks in the room.

Panel 2: End-to-End Encryption

This panel had people from both sides of the debate. Paul Rösler, a cryptography researcher, tried to explain how end-to-end encryption works for the non-technical people in the audience, which I think was done quite well. Next, we had Eric Rescorla, the CTO of Mozilla, who also gave some additional insight into end-to-end encryption.

Cisco was also there, and they presented their relative success integrating other platforms with Webex (e.g. Teams and Slack). This ‘interoperability’ between big players is definitively different from the direction of interoperability I want to see. But this is also a good example showing that when two big corporations want to integrate together, there are suddenly no technical difficulties anymore. Cisco is also working on a new messaging standard (which reminds me a bit of xkcd 927) as part of the MIMI working group of the IETF that they have already deployed in production.

Next, it was the turn of Matrix, and Matthew Hodgson, the CEO/CTO at Element showed a live demo of client-side bridging. This is their proposed solution to bridging end-to-end-encrypted messages across protocols without having to unencrypt the content inside a third-party server. This solution would be a temporary solution; ideally, services would converge to an open standard protocol like Matrix, XMPP or something new. He pointed out that Apple was already doing that with iMessage and SMS. I found this particularly clever.

Last, Meta sent a lawyer to represent them. The lawyer was reading a piece of paper in a very blank tone. He spent the entirety of his allocated time telling the commission that interoperability represents a very clear risk for their users who trust Meta to keep their data safe and end-to-end encrypted. He ignored Matthew’s previous demo and told us that bridging would break their encryption. He also envisioned a clear opt-in policy to interoperability so that the users are aware that this will weaken their security, and expressed a clear need for consent popups when interacting with users of other networks. It is quite ironic coming from Meta who, in the context of the GDPR and data protection, was arguing against an opt-in policy and against consent. As someone pointed out in the audience, while Whatsapp is end-to-end-encrypted, this isn’t the case for Messenger and Instagram conversations, which are both also products of Meta. The lawyer quickly dismissed that and explained that he only represented Whatsapp here and couldn’t answer this question for other Meta products. As you might have guessed, the audience wasn’t convinced by these arguments. Still, something to note is that Meta had at least the courage to speak in front of the audience, unlike other big gatekeepers like Microsoft, Apple and Google who were also in the room but didn’t participate at all in the debate.

Panel 3: Abuse Prevention, Identity Management and Discovery

With Meta in the panel again, consent was again a hot subject of discussion. Some argued that each time someone from another server joins a room, each user should consent so this new server can read their messages. This sounds very impractical to me, but I guess the goal is to make interoperability impractical. It also reminds me very much of the GDPR popup, in which privacy-invading services try to optimize using dark patterns so that the users click on the “Allow” button. In this case, users would be prompted to click on the “Don’t connect with this user coming from this untrusted and scary third party server” button.

There was some discussion about whether it was the server’s role to decide if they allow connection from a third-party server or the user’s role. The former would mean that big providers would only allow access to their service for other big providers and block access to small self-hosted instances. The latter would give users a choice. Another topic was the identifier. Someone from the audience pointed out that phone numbers used by Whatsapp, Signal and Telegram are currently not perfect as they are not unique across services and might require some standardization.

In the end, the European Commission tried to summarize all the information shared throughout the day and sounded quite happy that so many technical folks were in the room and active in the conversation.

After the last panels, I went to a bar next to the conference building with a few people from XMPP, EDRi, NlNet and OpenMLS to get beers and Belgian fries.

Source: opensource.org

Modern Warfare II is doing a Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles collab

Call of Duty: Modern Warfare II is doing its next big collab and this time it’s with a well-known pop culture franchise – Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles. This isn’t the first collaboration the game has had since its launch. Back in 2022 Activision added bundles based around different football players, including Messi, Pogba, and Neymar Jr., each with a set of tracer pack weapons and a few other items.
This is however the first time this game has done a collaboration with another TV show/game franchise. The official Call of Duty Twitter began teasing the collaboration yesterday afternoon. Alluding to what could only be TMNT’s most notorious villain, Shredder, being added to Modern Warfare II as an operator.
Today, the same account has confirmed that Shredder will be joining the game as an operator later this month.
The Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles collab launches in Modern Warfare II on March 21

Players will still need to wait a couple of weeks before they can jump into the game as the leader of the Foot Clan. Shredder officially arrives in the game on March 21.
He’ll be launching as part of a bundle coming with Season 02 Reloaded, which launches a week earlier on March 15. In the bundle, players will get the Shredder operator, a weapon blueprint for the Dual Kodachi blades that look like Shredder’s infamous bladed claws, and two more weapon blueprints. The Saki Assault Rifle and the Oroku Shotgun.
There’s also a weapon vinyl, a vehicle skin for the light tank, and a weapon charm. While bundle prices vary, expect this one to cost around 2,400 CoD points. Which is about $20, and what most of the flashier bundles cost. So hopefully you’re either saving up those points or you’re prepared to spend a little money if you want this set.
It’s a bit spendy, but if you grew up with TMNT, it’s a small price to pay for nostalgia. Does this collab mean other TMNT characters will make it into the game? Not likely. But stranger things have happened.
The post Modern Warfare II is doing a Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles collab appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Apple will launch its classical music app later this month

Every music streaming service has something that makes it stand out, and Apple will unveil one that will definitely stick out. According to CNBC, Apple will launch its classical music-only app later this month.
Shocker: people still listen to classical music nowadays (GASP!). We can’t deny that classical music just doesn’t get as much attention as more modern genres of music. Streaming apps usually treat classical music as an afterthought while today’s latest hits overshadow it.
This leads classical music lovers to see incomplete libraries of music. They’ll search only to find sections of larger collections of works. “Looking for that 10-volume collection of Muzio Clementi’s piano sonatas? Well, here are volumes 2, 4, and 7. Enjoy!”
Apple will launch its classical music app later this month
It seems that Apple wants to help those distraught classical music lovers. We first got word about this potential app over a year ago, and the company has now officially announced it.
It bears the Apple Music name (being called Apple Music Classical), but it’s actually its own standalone app. It seems like a good idea for the company to make it its own app. It’s more assuring going to an app dedicated specifically to classical music rather than it being a section in the main app.
Apple says that its classical music app will boast more than 5 million tracks, and that’s quite the collection. Not only that, but the platform will have thousands of exclusive albums at launch. That’s really interesting, as it gives Apple Music Classical something else that other platforms don’t have.
We’re not sure how many classical music tracks platforms like YouTube Music and Spotify have, but we’re not sure they have as many as 5 million. Having exclusive content is just the icing on the cake.
The app will officially launch on March 28th. If you’re excited, you can find the app on the Apple App Store now and pre-order the app. If you’re an Apple Music subscriber, you’ll be able to use the app for no charge. If not then you’ll need to pay a monthly fee. We don’t know what the price is just yet.
The post Apple will launch its classical music app later this month appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Call Of Duty: Mobile to be phased out after Warzone Mobile launch

Call Of Duty: Mobile is likely going to be phased out over time after the launch of Warzone Mobile. GamesRadar reports. Warzone Mobile is slated to be released later this year and is going to be the true mobile adaption to Activision’s insanely popular Call of Duty battle royale game. Like its PC and console counterparts, it’ll be free-to-play and feature many of the same gameplay mechanics, maps, weapons and more.
It will also feature cross-progression. So anything you do in that game will translate to progress in the PC and console versions. This includes having access to any of your loadouts created in Warzone 2 or multiplayer for MW II, as well as weapons, operators, and operator skins. It will not however allow for cross-play. Call of Duty: Mobile does have its own battle royale mode. But it’s quite different from Warzone, and it has its own progression system and seasonal battle passes. All separate from Warzone and Warzone 2.
Call of Duty: Mobile will be phased out overtime, but only outside of China
A big part of the phase out, it seems, is that Activision wants players to have more continuity. And a shared progression system between Warzone Mobile and Warzone 2 for consoles and PC can deliver that.
The phase out is only expected to happen for the game outside of China though. It’s unclear what this means for players elsewhere. Especially with regard to the money players have spent on the game to acquire items, weapons, and operators.
Though it shouldn’t be hard to imagine. Since there’s no continuity between both games, anything purchased is likely to be gone once the game is phased out. This would hardly be the first time something like this has happened in a game. Knowing that doesn’t make things any easier though. It’s also worth noting that players of Call of Duty: Mobile outside of China may want to really think hard about spending any money on in-game purchases going forward.
If the game is set to be phased out after Warzone Mobile’s release, then anything you acquire through purchases may not be available for long.
The post Call Of Duty: Mobile to be phased out after Warzone Mobile launch appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

How to use Discord voice chat on PS5

Today Sony finally rolled out the system software update that enabled Discord voice chat for all PS5 users, and we’re here to help you get it set up so you can use it when playing games.
While Sony has created a perfectly fine voice chat system for PS5, it’s just not as good as Discord. Even if you find them comparable in quality, you just may prefer Discord because that’s what your friends use. And that can be a big deal if you play games with your friends that are cross-platform and they’re on Xbox or PC. So, this is where the Discord voice chat for PS5 comes in handy and why you may prefer to use it instead.
In this guide we’ll walk you through the steps to set it up so you’re ready to go anytime you want to hop into a chat.
How to use Discord voice chat on PS5

To get started, you’ll need to set everything up first and there are a handful of steps. Once everything is configured, using voice chat for all future sessions is pretty quick and easy. So let’s get to it.
Update your PS5’s system software
You should have a system software update to download as the update was pushed out to all users globally this morning. If you leave your PS5 in rest mode and have auto updates turned on, then the update is probably already installed. But it’s worth double checking.
Update your Discord mobile app
After the system software update on PS5, make sure your Discord mobile app is updated to the most recent version as well. Head to the Play Store or App Store and initiate the update.
Link your Discord account to your PS5
Next you’ll need to link your Discord account to your PS5. Here’s how you do that.
Go to the PS5’s settings menu

Start by going to the settings menu on your PS5. You can find this in the top right corner of the main screen. It looks like a little cog.
Open the Users and Accounts menu

Once inside settings, go to the Users and Accounts menu.
Open the Linked Services menu

Now go to the Linked Services menu. In this menu you’ll find Discord as one of the account options you can link to your PS5 console. Click on Discord and the click on Link Account.
Scan the QR Code in the Discord app

Once you click on Discord in the Linked Services menu and click Link Account, the next screen will have you complete the link with one of two methods. The easiest way is to scan the QR code that you see on your PS5 screen using the mobile app. To do this, launch the mobile app and then tap on your profile avatar. This will bring up your account settings and towards the bottom of the menu you should see an option to “scan a QR code.” This is used to log you in with your Discord credentials on other platforms and to link your Discord account.
The other method is to open the browser on your mobile device or computer and head to discord.com/activate, then enter the 8-digit code you see on the screen. If you scan the QR code, you shouldn’t need to enter the 8-digit code as a second step. After the QR code scans, you should be all set, and see a screen that says your accounts are now linked like in the image above.
Launch the Discord mobile app
Now launch the Discord mobile app again if it isn’t already open on your phone.
Find a voice channel and join it

Find the voice channel you want to join so you can talk with your friends while you play on PS5. Join that voice channel. Once you’re in, drag up the panel at the bottom of the screen. You’ll see an option to transfer the call to PlayStation. Tap on that.
Select the console to transfer the call to

Next, select the console to transfer the call to. If you only have one PlayStation in the home, then you’ll only see the one option. Select that console and click on the Join Call on PlayStation button at the bottom.
You’re all set!

And that’s how you set up and use Discord voice chat on PS5. Once you’ve transferred the call, you’ll see a pop up notification on your PS5 that says the call has been transferred and that you’ve joined that voice channel. And if you go to the party chat menu you can see the Discord voice channel you’re in as well as who else is in there with you. You can also adjust a few settings and leave the voice channel from here.
The post How to use Discord voice chat on PS5 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

How to watch the 2023 Big Ten Men's Basketball Tournament online without Cable

It’s March, and for fans of College Basketball, that means March Madness. Now, before we get to the big NCAA Tournament and crown a new National Champion, we have the conference tournaments. Including this Big Ten Tournament in Chicago.
The Big Ten is one of the larger conferences in College Basketball, with 14 teams. That means that there’s going to be a handful of teams that will get to skip the first round, and a few more that get to skip the second round as well. Making for an interesting looking bracket. But in the end, there will only be one Big Ten Men’s Basketball Tournament champion. And that might be Purdue. However, in this tournament, we’ve seen lower seeds make it quite far. It is March Madness after all.
Here’s how you can watch the Big Ten Men’s Basketball Tournament this year.
What’s the Big Ten bracket?
The bracket has been announced, and since it does have 14 teams, some teams do get to skip out on the first round. Here’s the full bracket.

In the Big Ten Tournament, the top four seeds get a double bye. While the next four seeds get a single bye. So only the 11, 12, 13 and 14 seeds play on the first day. So in order to go the full distance, from one of the bottom seeds, that’s five games in five days you need to win. However if you’re in the top four seeds, that’s only three games in three days. A much easier task.
Purdue pulled out the regular season championship for the Big Ten this year. While the rest of the field – except Minnesota and Ohio State – mostly had the same record until the last couple of games. So this could end up being a pretty crazy tournament.
When is the Big Ten Tournament?
The Big East Men’s Basketball Tournament will kick off at 5:30PM CT on Wednesday, March 8 with the number 13 seed Ohio State taking on the 12 seed Wisconsin. Then, 25 minutes after that game ends, number 14 Minnesota will take on number 11 Nebraska. There will be four games on Thursday, another four on Friday, then two on Saturday and the Championship on Sunday, March 12.
Where can I watch the Big Ten Tournament?
The 2023 Big Ten Men’s Basketball Tournament will air on the Big Ten Network (BTN) and CBS. Only the semifinals and the championship will air on CBS, the rest of the games will be on BTN. Since these games are all being played in the same arena, the United Center in Chicago, these games won’t overlap. In fact, for a good number of the games, they will start 25 minutes after the previous one finished. So you can watch every single game in the Big Ten Tournament.
YouTube TV
YouTube TV is our best option for watching the Big Ten Men’s Basketball Tournament. That’s because it does have BTN available, as well as CBS. So you’ll be able to watch it all on YouTube TV. And one of the best features here is that there is unlimited cloud DVR. So you can record all the games and go back through and watch them later. You can also catch up with key plays from YouTube TV. Making it easier to watch the game, if you’re late.
YouTube TV does offer a free trial and you can sign up here.
Hulu + Live TV
Hulu + Live TV is a good option, if you don’t like YouTube TV. It’s not that we don’t like Hulu + Live TV, it’s just more expensive and doesn’t offer a whole lot more. For $70 per month, you can get BTN and CBS, along with most of the NCAA Tournament channels, to experience March Madness. It also has unlimited cloud DVR like YouTube TV.
Hulu does offer a free trial for Live TV, which you can sign up for right here.
When is Selection Sunday?
Selection Sunday is happening on March 12. That will be following the conclusion of Sunday’s conference championship games. Typically, CBS airs the Selection Sunday show between 6PM and 8PM ET. Though sometimes it can run a bit late if the 4PM games go into overtime.
During the show, we’ll find out who is in the NCAA Tournament this year, and who is not. While we have “experts” doing bracketology all year long, we kind of have a good idea of who is in and who’s not, the committee can still surprise us. It’ll also be interesting to see who gets to play who.
Keep in mind that conference tournament winners do get an automatic bid into the NCAA Tournament. So 32 teams will already be in the field, and the committee will need to add another 36 teams. As well as seeding them in the correct order. With four regions of 16 teams. Along with the first four games, there’s a total of 68 teams that get into the tournament. And the excitement of March Madness is upon us.
For the NCAA Tournament, the First Four games will take place in Dayton, OH on March 14-15. With the first and second rounds taking place March 16-19. The regionals happening from March 23-26. And the Final Four happening on April 1, with the National Championship on April 3 at NRG Stadium in Houston.
The post How to watch the 2023 Big Ten Men’s Basketball Tournament online without Cable appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Realme just copied Apple's homework and didn't make it look different

So, we know that Apple’s pretty conservative when it comes to changing its phones’ designs. The iPhone 14 looks like a mirror image of the iPhone 13 and the iPhone 12… and the iPhone 11. However, the iPhone 14 Pro brought an interesting feature called the Dynamic island. Well, it looks like this inspired the Realme C55- it inspired this phone A LOT, it seems.
Back when Apple unveiled the iPhone 14 Pro, it definitely made waves in the tech community. The Dynamic Islande takes the pill-shaped punch-hole and makes it a part of the software experience. While housing the sensors, it also “expands” to show you information.
This was something that no other company thought of. Instead of trying to hide the punch-hole, Apple made it a part of the UI. While it was panned a bit, it was nice to see the company bring that bit of innovation.
The Realme C55 copies Apple’s homework but doesn’t do much to make it look different
Apple takes features from Android, Android takes features from Apple. It’s the cycle that made the tech world what it is today. However, there are those times when a company, unapologetically, copies another company’s idea. This seems to be the case with the Realme C55, according to GSMArena (via Engadget).
So, the 6.72-inch display has a punch-hole up top. It’s called the “Mini Capsule”, and it will “extend” to show you additional information just like the iPhone 14 Pro’s Dynamic Island.

From the information we have now, it looks like it will show you information like your step count, charging status, walking distance, etc. As time goes on, we expect the company to add on more types of information displayed. We’re not sure if any third-party companies will make their apps compatible with the Mini Capsule.
We know that emulation is a crucial ingredient for innovation. Regardless, we can’t deny that this is a pretty close clone of the function.
Other specs
As for the other specs, we’re looking at an FDH+ display, 8GB of RAM, 256GB of storage, a MediaTek Helio G88 SoC, and Android 13.
The post Realme just copied Apple’s homework and didn’t make it look different appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Discord voice chat for PS5 is finally here

Discord voice chat has finally arrived for PS5 users, after months of waiting following leaks and then an official announcement. For the past few months, this feature has been in testing. And essentially, it’s just a way to circumvent having to stay connected to Discord using the mobile app or your PC. The newly added integration presents a handful of benefits and removes at least one giant pain point – having to decide between listening to the game audio or the chat audio.
The only real way around this is having a headset that allows a connection to the PS5 and the chat simultaneously. Something like the SteelSeries Arctis Nova Pro Wireless allows this function. But it’s not exactly an affordable headset. Now, none of that matters, because official on-console support is available. You can use whatever headset you want to connect to the PS5 as long as it’s compatible, and simply transfer the Discord call to the console. There is a bit of setup, but that’s easy enough to do.
Discord voice chat on PS5 is part of a larger system software update
For me personally, the Discord voice chat is the biggest part of this update. Because it’s something I’ve been waiting on for a long time. But it’s not the only new feature for PS5 users.
Today Sony pushed out a system software update that adds in other changes and improvements. Including some improvements to the 1440p VRR support that was added in an earlier update. Basically, most of the feature changes are things that users on the most recent beta have already had access to. Everything included in today’s update is just rolling out to users globally.
Other key features available to all users today include the “join game” icon in party chats, and tile for games that show “friends who play.” The update is available to install on your PS5 now and you can read more about all the features in our post about the beta.

The post Discord voice chat for PS5 is finally here appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

How to watch the 2023 Big East Men's Basketball Tournament online without Cable

It’s March. And for sports fans, that means one thing – March Madness. But before we get to the NCAA Tournament, we have a ton of conference championships. Including this one for the Big East.
The Big East is a conference with 11 teams, so the bracket does look a bit odd. But that also means that a handful of teams get to skip the first round of games. And after a long basketball season, that is definitely good to have. The number one seed here in the Big East is Marquette. With Xavier, Creighton and UConn rounding out the top four. This is a conference, that historically, has a pretty big presence in the NCAA Tournament.
Here’s how you can watch the Big East Men’s Basketball Tournament this year.
What’s the Big East bracket?
The bracket has been announced, and since it does have 11 teams, some teams do get to skip out on the first round. Here’s the full bracket.

As you can see, five teams skip the first round. With the first round having three games, and then four in the second round. So Marquette, Xavier and Creighton don’t know exactly who they are playing just yet. This is bound to be a great tournament, though.
When is the Big East Tournament?
The Big East Men’s Basketball Tournament will kick off at 3PM ET on Wednesday, March 8 with the number eight seed St. John’s taking on the number nine seed Butler. All of the games will be on FS1, including the Championship game on March 11.
Like most of the tournaments, the Big East Tournament will take place on subsequent days. And in order to win the tournament, your team needs to win at least three games. If they are a six seed or lower, they’ll need to win four. That many wins in as many days can be pretty tough, but an automatic bid to the NCAA Tournament is on the line here.
Where can I watch the Big East Tournament?
The 2023 Big East Men’s Basketball Tournament will air on FS1. Some games might get moved over to FS2, depending on what other games and tournaments FS1 is set to air. Remember, that since these are all being played at the same arena – Madison Square Garden in New York City – that these games won’t overlap. And that can also mean that some might get pushed back.
Sling TV
Sling TV is going to be the best place to watch the Big East Men’s Basketball Tournament. It does have FS1 (as well as FS2) available in the Sling Blue package. Which is normally $40 per month, but right now they are running a promo where you can get it 50% off for the first month. That makes it just $20 and you can cancel after March Madness is over.
Sling TV does offer a 7 day free trial, and you can sign up for it here.
YouTube TV
YouTube TV is our second option for watching the Big East Men’s Basketball Tournament. That’s because it is quite a bit more expensive than Sling TV, at $65 per month. But you are getting all of the channels for this tournament and almost every other basketball tournament – including the NCAA Tournament later this month. On top of that, YouTube TV does offer unlimited cloud DVR, so you can record to watch later on.
YouTube TV does offer a free trial and you can sign up here.
Hulu + Live TV
Hulu + Live TV is a good option, if you don’t like Sling TV or YouTube TV. It’s not that we don’t like Hulu + Live TV, it’s just more expensive and doesn’t offer a whole lot more. For $70 per month, you can get FS1, along with most of the NCAA Tournament channels, to experience March Madness. It also has unlimited cloud DVR like YouTube TV.
Hulu does offer a free trial for Live TV, which you can sign up for right here.
When is Selection Sunday?
Selection Sunday is happening on March 12. That will be following the conclusion of Sunday’s conference championship games. Typically, CBS airs the Selection Sunday show between 6PM and 8PM ET. Though sometimes it can run a bit late if the 4PM games go into overtime.
During the show, we’ll find out who is in the NCAA Tournament this year, and who is not. While we have “experts” doing bracketology all year long, we kind of have a good idea of who is in and who’s not, the committee can still surprise us. It’ll also be interesting to see who gets to play who.
Keep in mind that conference tournament winners do get an automatic bid into the NCAA Tournament. So 32 teams will already be in the field, and the committee will need to add another 36 teams. As well as seeding them in the correct order. With four regions of 16 teams. Along with the first four games, there’s a total of 68 teams that get into the tournament. And the excitement of March Madness is upon us.
For the NCAA Tournament, the First Four games will take place in Dayton, OH on March 14-15. With the first and second rounds taking place March 16-19. The regionals happening from March 23-26. And the Final Four happening on April 1, with the National Championship on April 3 at NRG Stadium in Houston.
The post How to watch the 2023 Big East Men’s Basketball Tournament online without Cable appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

How to watch the 2023 Big 12 Men's Basketball Tournament online without Cable

It’s March. And for sports fans, that means one thing – March Madness. But before we get to the NCAA Tournament, we have a ton of conference championships. Including this one for the Big 12.
The Big 12 is a conference with only 10 teams – kinda strange right? Which offers a pretty strange bracket for March. But it is a more straight-forward bracket compared to some other conferences. The favorite for this tournament is obviously the regular season champion, Kansas. Who is also projected to get the #1 overall seed in the NCAA Tournament next week. Of course, if they don’t win the tournament, that could affect that seeding for the NCAA Tournament. Of course, they are definitely in this year, so whatever happens in this tournament, Kansas is dancing in March.
Here’s how you can watch the Big 12 Men’s Basketball Tournament this year.
What’s the Big 12 bracket?
The bracket has been announced, and since it does have 10 teams, some teams do get to skip out on the first round. Here’s the full bracket.

As you can see, only four teams play in the first round, for a shot to play the 1 and 2 seeds. Which are Kansas and Texas. The good thing here, is unlike other conferences, teams only need to win a max of four games to win the conference tournament. But, a 7 or lower seed winning is pretty unlikely. Especially since they would need to get through Kansas, a pretty big basketball powerhouse, even in 2023.
When is the Big 12 Tournament?
The Big 12 Men’s Basketball Tournament will kick off at 6PM CT on Wednesday, March 8 with West Virginia taking on Texas Tech. Followed by Oklahoma State vs Oklahoma around 8:30PM CT.
The next round takes place on each day after that. So if you are in the first round and make it to the championship game, that’s five games in five days. The championship game will take place on Saturday, March 11 at 5PM CT on ESPN. So it’s one of the conferences that does end its tournament the day before Selection Sunday.
Where can I watch the Big 12 Tournament?
The 2023 Big 12 Men’s Basketball Tournament will air on ESPN, ESPN2 and ESPNU this week. The Big 12 is one of the few bigger power conferences that doesn’t have their own network. So every game is on the family of ESPN networks here.
Every game until the championship, will be on multiple ESPN channels. And that’s because in some regions ESPN may have a different game on, since they do have rights to a lot of games during the conference tournament week.
Sling TV
Sling TV is going to be the best place to watch the Big 12 Men’s Basketball Tournament. It does have the ESPN family of networks available in the Sling Orange package. Which is normally $40 per month, but right now they are running a promo where you can get it 50% off for the first month. That makes it just $20 and you can cancel after March Madness is over.
Sling TV does offer a 7 day free trial, and you can sign up for it here.
YouTube TV
YouTube TV is our second option for watching the Big 12 Men’s Basketball Tournament. That’s because it is quite a bit more expensive than Sling TV, at $65 per month. But you are getting all of the channels for this tournament and almost every other basketball tournament – including the NCAA Tournament later this month. On top of that, YouTube TV does offer unlimited cloud DVR, so you can record to watch later on.
YouTube TV does offer a free trial and you can sign up here.
Hulu + Live TV
Hulu + Live TV is a good option, if you don’t like Sling TV or YouTube TV. It’s not that we don’t like Hulu + Live TV, it’s just more expensive and doesn’t offer a whole lot more. For $70 per month, you can get all of the ESPN channels, along with most of the NCAA Tournament channels, to experience March Madness. It also has unlimited cloud DVR like YouTube TV.
Hulu does offer a free trial for Live TV, which you can sign up for right here.
When is Selection Sunday?
Selection Sunday is happening on March 12. That will be following the conclusion of Sunday’s conference championship games. Typically, CBS airs the Selection Sunday show between 6PM and 8PM ET. Though sometimes it can run a bit late if the 4PM games go into overtime.
During the show, we’ll find out who is in the NCAA Tournament this year, and who is not. While we have “experts” doing bracketology all year long, we kind of have a good idea of who is in and who’s not, the committee can still surprise us. It’ll also be interesting to see who gets to play who.
Keep in mind that conference tournament winners do get an automatic bid into the NCAA Tournament. So 32 teams will already be in the field, and the committee will need to add another 36 teams. As well as seeding them in the correct order. With four regions of 16 teams. Along with the first four games, there’s a total of 68 teams that get into the tournament. And the excitement of March Madness is upon us.
For the NCAA Tournament, the First Four games will take place in Dayton, OH on March 14-15. With the first and second rounds taking place March 16-19. The regionals happening from March 23-26. And the Final Four happening on April 1, with the National Championship on April 3 at NRG Stadium in Houston.
The post How to watch the 2023 Big 12 Men’s Basketball Tournament online without Cable appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Angry Birds might be flying back to the Play Store

The Google Play Store lost one of the most popular mobile games on the market, and it was a sad day all around. However, don’t dress in mourning just yet. It appears that Angry Birds could be returning to the Google Play Store. Only, it will have a different name.
In case you didn’t know, Rovio, the company behind everything Angry Birds, announced that it was delisting Angry Birds from the Google Play Store. The company did this because of the game’s impact on the company’s portfolio. Since the original Angry Birds was a product of 2009, it was developed long before the current age of mobile gaming: The Micro-Transaction Dynasty.
As stated before, the original Angry Birds was having a negative impact on the company’s portfolio. The thing is that the original Angry Birds is still the most popular of Rovio’s titles.
When people search for anything Angry Birds, it’s always the first title to come up. Now, this game cost $0.99 to download. The upfront cost discourages most people from buying it. It also pushed away from downloading the other Rovio games. So, think of Angry Birds as a dam keeping potential traffic from reaching Rovio’s other games.
Angry Birds might be returning to the Play Store
A Rovio employee told Axios (via Engadget) that the company could consider reversing the decision. At this point, we don’t know many details about this. The game is currently available on the Apple App Store under the name “Red’s First Flight”. It seems odd that the company opted to keep it for iOS devices.
If Rovio decides to bring it back to the Play Store, there’s a chance that it could return under that name. We’re still in the dark about when (or even if) the game will make it back onto the Play Store. What we do know is that if it does make it back, then it should be a good day. Maybe it would spark some more downloads.
The post Angry Birds might be flying back to the Play Store appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Hogwarts Legacy gets a delay for PS4 and Xbox One consoles

The wizarding world of Hogwarts Legacy is currently available on PC, PS5, and Xbox Series X|S, and is slated for release on PS4 and Xbox One as well. But it looks like the launch of the game on those last two consoles is being met with a delay. The dev team behind the game has reached out to fans on its official game twitter account, noting that the last-gen console version isn’t going to release on the originally planned date. Which was supposed to be April 4.
The team says it wants to deliver the best game possible. And as happy as it is to see people enjoying the game, it needs more time to put on some finishing touches for PS4 and Xbox One owners.
According to the tweet (spotted by engadget), Hogwarts Legacy is being delayed for PS4 and Xbox One until May 5. The delay is only a month, so not a terribly long time. In the grand scheme of things, a short wait could do the game some good. And it seems clear the development team doesn’t feel it’s quite ready for last-gen consoles.
That being said, this isn’t the game first delay for PS4 and Xbox One. It’s not even the first delay period.
Hogwarts Legacy was supposed to launch for PS4 and Xbox One on February 10
Prior to the April 4 launch, Hogwarts Legacy was supposed to be released for all platforms on the same date. February 10. But just before the launch it was delayed for last-gen consoles. This pushed the date out to April 4, which has now once again been pushed back. This time to May 5.
That is to say PS4 and Xbox One owners shouldn’t be surprised if there is another delay. That being said, if the devs feels a delay is needed, then it’s probably needed. The last thing they and players want is to have the game release on last-gen consoles with game-breaking bugs.

We’re overwhelmed with gratitude for the response to Hogwarts Legacy from fans around the globe. The team is working hard to deliver the best possible experience on all platforms and we need more time to do this. Hogwarts Legacy will launch for PS4 and Xbox One May 5, 2023. pic.twitter.com/UjEIPXDZj2
— Hogwarts Legacy (@HogwartsLegacy) March 6, 2023

The post Hogwarts Legacy gets a delay for PS4 and Xbox One consoles appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Galaxy S20 & Galaxy Z Flip 5G get One UI 5.1 in the US

Samsung has released the One UI 5.1 update for the Galaxy S20 series and the Galaxy Z Flip 5G in the US. The devices follow dozens of other models in the party, including the LTE model of the original clamshell foldable. The new One UI version brings several new features and improvements.
The One UI 5.1 update for the Galaxy S20, Galaxy S20+, and Galaxy S20 Ultra is initially rolling out to the carrier-locked variants. Depending on your carrier, you will receive a new OTA (over the air) package with the firmware build number G98*USQU3HWB3 or G98*USQU3HWB5. As of this writing, the rollout has hit units on T-Mobile, Metro, and US Cellular networks. Units on the remaining networks should also pick up the latest release soon. The update should also be available for factory-unlocked variants of the 2020 Samsung flagships in the coming days.
Meanwhile, if you’re using the Galaxy Z Flip 5G in the US, One UI 5.1 for your phone comes with firmware version F707U1UEU3HWB1. You might have noticed that it’s the unlocked variant (model number SM-F707U1).
Samsung hasn’t released the update for the carrier-locked variant yet. The rollout is widely available for unlocked models, though. So it should just be a matter of time before all Galaxy Z Flip 5G users in the US can get the taste of One UI 5.1. As said earlier, both carrier-locked and unlocked units of the LTE model have already received this update.
This update contains plenty of goodies for Galaxy S20, Galaxy S20+, Galaxy S20 Ultra, and Galaxy Z Flip 5G users. One UI 5.1 adds new selfie effects to the camera app, Shared Family Album to Gallery, new and improved gestures for enhanced multitasking, smart settings suggestions, improved widgets, enhanced image remastering, activity-based automatic changing of wallpapers, improvements to stock apps, and more.
The Galaxy S20 and Galaxy Z Flip 5G aren’t getting the March update just yet
The latest update for the Galaxy S20 trio and Galaxy Z Flip 5G brings the February security patch. Samsung released the March patch earlier today, so it will take some time before the latest release reaches these phones. We will let you know when they get the March SMR (Security Maintenance Release). In the meantime, you can navigate to Settings > Software update > Download and install to check for updates manually. Since One UI 5.1 is a major update, you might want to download it over Wi-Fi rather than mobile data.
The post Galaxy S20 & Galaxy Z Flip 5G get One UI 5.1 in the US appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Meet the 2023 candidates for OSI’s board

The nominations for the Open Source Initiative board of elections just closed, March 6th. It’s time for voters to meet the candidates.

The OSI board of directors will renew three of its seats with an open election process among its full individual members and affiliates. We will be holding two elections:

Individual members will elect two directorsAffiliate organizations will elect one director

We encourage members to check out the list of Individual and Affiliate Candidates below. Read about their backgrounds and interest in serving on the board.

Each candidate page also features a comments section: OSI members can ask candidates about their plans, hopes, and views for the OSI (don’t endorse candidates there please).

Take advantage of the ability to ask questions as it’s the best way for you to learn about each candidate and what they hope to achieve as board members of the OSI.

Individual candidates:

Chris AniszczykAeva BlackJim JagielskiCatharina MarackeDuane O’Brien

Affiliate candidates:

Gael Blondelle (proposed by Open Forum Europe)Gabriele Columbro (proposed by Linux Foundation)Matt Jarvis (proposed by OpenUK)Anne-Marie Scott (proposed by Apereo Foundation)

Next steps

Voting opens this Friday, March 10. Individual full members and affiliate representatives will receive a ballot via email with instructions on how to vote. Only individuals who are Full Members at the time voting opens may vote in the Individual election. Only the official representative of the OSI Affiliates may vote in the Affiliate election, one vote per Affiliate. More details on the elections page.

Upcoming 2022 election schedule

March 10, 2022: Voting opensMarch 20, 2022 (9AM PST): Voting closes and results announced within 5 daysif needed: March 28, 2022: close run-off elections, announce resultsApril 21, 2022: elected members take seats

Source: opensource.org

Samsung pushes another update to the Galaxy Buds 2

Samsung‘s Galaxy Buds 2 TWS earbuds are receiving a new software update. It’s a relatively small update and comes just about a month after the last release. The buds seem to be getting some bug fixes and stability improvements. There may not be any new features in tow here, though.
The latest update for the Galaxy Buds 2 comes with the firmware build number R177XXUOAWB1 (via SamMobile). The OTA package weighs just about 3MB. A small OTA download size hints at a minor update and the official changelog confirms that. Samsung says the earbuds are getting stability and reliability improvements and nothing else. The company may be pushing some system optimizations to ensure more stable connectivity and user experience.
This software release for the Galaxy Buds 2 started rolling out a few days ago and is already available pretty widely. If you’re using the 2021 TWS pair from Samsung, you should be able to download the update via the Galaxy Wearable app on your connected smartphone, which must have an active internet connection. The app usually notifies you about new updates, but you can also manually check for them.
To manually update your Galaxy Buds, tap on the left hamburger menu on the Galaxy Wearable app’s home screen and select your earbuds. Now tap on Earbud Settings, go to the Earbuds software update menu, and tap on Download and install. Your phone will now start searching for available updates. If it finds any, you’ll be prompted to download it. If you don’t see any updates, wait a few days and check again.
Previous Galaxy Buds 2 update improved wireless charging
As said earlier, this is the second update for the Galaxy Buds 2 over the past month. While the latest release may not contain any user-facing changes, last month’s update brought charging stability improvements. It doesn’t notably change anything but the company likely pushed some internal improvements to the earbuds. For your reference, that update arrived with the firmware version R177XXU0AWA3.
Launched alongside the Galaxy Z Fold 3 and Galaxy Z Flip 3 foldables in August 2021, the Galaxy Buds 2 has yet to get a successor. Samsung followed the pair with the Galaxy Buds 2 Pro in August last year alongside its fourth-gen foldables. The Galaxy Z Fold 5 and Galaxy Z Flip 5 may now arrive with a new pair of TWS earbuds later this year. There haven’t been any rumors yet, but there’s still plenty of time for those.
The post Samsung pushes another update to the Galaxy Buds 2 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Google execs address confusion surrounding Bard AI's priorities

Google’s launch event for its Bard AI did not go as smoothly as planned, as the chatbot gave several incorrect answers during the presentation. This resulted in Googlers expressing their disappointment about the launch and even questioning CEO Pichai’s leadership. Now, according to a report from CNBC, Google executives are trying to address any confusion surrounding the company’s priorities for Bard.
During an all-hands meeting on Thursday, top executives attempted to answer questions as employees expressed their concerns about the chatbot’s potential impact on the company’s core search engine business. In response, Jack Krawczyk, the product lead for Bard, emphasized that the chatbot is not a search engine but rather an experiment that is meant to act as a creative companion for users. However, he acknowledged that some users may still attempt to use it as a search engine, and Google is working on addressing this issue with a new tool named “Search It.”
“The first public demo was demoralizing, sent our stock into a nosedive, and invited massive media coverage,” read an employee’s comment.
Google is facing the heat of competition
For over nine years, Google has been the dominant player in the search engine market, with its Chrome browser having a market share of over 60%. However, the launch of ChatGPT and its successful integration into the Bing browser have leveled the playing field, causing Google to fear its dominance for the first time.
With the launch of Bard, Google hoped to get ahead, but it is clear that the company currently lacks a plan. Previously, the company stated that Bard’s technology could integrate with search, but now top executives like Elizabeth Reid, vice president of engineering for search, are saying that the chatbot is “separate from search.”
This confusion towards Google’s approach has caused the company’s investors to fear that the search business might become obsolete as chatbots like Google Bard and ChatGPT will provide better answers to search queries.
The post Google execs address confusion surrounding Bard AI’s priorities appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Google Meet now cancels background noise on phones

Not everyone can join a Google Meet meeting on a desktop. Some people have to quickly jump in using their phones. One benefit that desktop users enjoy is the background noise cancelation feature. Now, Google Meet can cancel background noise for mobile users.
Google Meet has been rolling out several updates as we’re still weathering this hybrid work life. Recently, the company expanded its 360-degree backgrounds feature to the public. If you’re using your phone, you can turn around, and the background will move accordingly.
Google Meet now cancels background noise for phones
Desktop users on Google Meet had the noise cancelation feature while mobile users were left in the dust. This could make for an awkward meeting especially if it consists of both mobile and desktop users. Since it’s so much easier to port your phone to different locations, mobile users are more likely to be in noisy environments like sidewalks or coffee shops.
Thankfully, Google sought fit to trickle the noise cancelation feature to mobile users. The feature will filter out background noise like construction work, busy streets, room echo, typing, etc.
It specifically targets noise that’s not human which works for the majority of the time. One thing that Techradar notes is that, since it filters anything that’s not human, it won’t filter human speech from other sources. So, if there’s a radio on in the background or another conversation, it won’t be filtered out.
Since this is a feature for Google Workspace, it won’t be available to all users. It’s available for people using the Business Standard, Business Plus, Enterprise Essentials, Enterprise Standard, Enterprise Plus, Education Plus, the Teaching and Learning Upgrade, and Frontline.
Google also stated that this feature is currently unavailable to users in South Africa, UAE, and the immediate surrounding areas. We’re not sure if the company plans on expanding the feature to those markets eventually.
The post Google Meet now cancels background noise on phones appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Google Pixel Watch: Everything You Need To Know – March 2023

The Google Pixel Watch is official. Like, officially official. Yes Google showed it off at Google I/O back in May. But that was merely a teaser. This morning Google officially announced the Pixel Watch at its Fall Pixel event. And while we still have to put in some time with it for a proper review, we now know all there is (basically) to know about the ‘Google Pixel Watch.’
Whether you’re looking to move away from Apple or just another Wear OS option, Google is giving you another choice. And as a consumer that’s a good thing. Especially if you like the smooth domed glass design Google is offering. It’s also potentially the best smartwatch option for Pixel owners. Even more so for those looking to upgrade to the Pixel 7 or Pixel 7 Pro.
So let’s break down the Google Pixel Watch and all its nitty gritty details. Or at the very least, the most important parts of the device that you may be wondering about.
What is the Google Pixel Watch?

It’s Google’s first actual smartwatch. It was designed in-house and like the company’s Pixel phones, the Pixel Watch is meant to be the flagship device. It’s the posterchild for Wear OS and is a showcase of how seamless, feature-rich, stylish, and functional Google wants the platform to be.
The watch has actually been rumored for years but nothing of substance ever came up. That is not until earlier this year when Google teased it. Now Pixel fans have something tangible they can wrap around their wrists. As soon as it ships, of course. Speaking of shipping…
When does the Google Pixel Watch launch?
Technically, it launches today if you want to think about it like that. But in reality it launches later this month, officially on October 13. You can pre-order the watch starting today and as it stands it shows that deliveries will be made between October 14 and October 19. Although that all depends on the color you choose. Some seem to be shipping out earlier than others. We would say don’t let that sway your decision. But we get it if it does. When you’re excited about a product you tend to want it as soon as possible.
Update: November 9, 2022
The Google Pixel Watch officially launched on October 13, 2022.
How much does the Google Pixel Watch cost?
This will depend on which you model you buy. There are two available models of the watch. A Bluetooth/Wi-Fi-only model, and one that will connect through Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, or LTE. The Bluetooth/Wi-Fi model retails for $349.99, and the LTE model retails for $399.99. The color you choose has no impact on the cost. Keep in mind though that if you go with the LTE model, you might as well consider the additional cost of adding an LTE data plan to it. Which will be a recurring monthly fee you need to pay for as long as you want to use the LTE feature.
You can buy it directly from Google or from third-party retailers like Amazon and Best Buy.
Where will it be available?
For starters it will be available in 9 different counties. This includes the US, Australia, Canada, France, Germany, Ireland, Japan, Taiwan, and the UK. Google may launch the watch in other regions in the future, but it doesn’t confirm this. As for what stores or retailers you can buy it at, in the US you can grab the watch directly from Google, or from retailers like Amazon and Best Buy as we’ve linked above. It will probably be available from carriers as well in the LTE model.
Outside of the US, availability may vary and you’ll need to check with your local retailers.
What are the available colors?

Google will offer the Pixel Watch in three colors. Matte Black, Polished Silver, and Champagne Gold. And then the bands will come in a multitude of colors and styles, made from various materials. The band that comes with the watch is called the Active Band. This is essentially the Infinity Band that comes with the Fitbit Sense and Fitbit Sense 2. It has infinity-shaped loops and is made from a soft-touch silicone/rubber material. It’ll be available in Hazel with the Champagne Gold case, Obsidian with the Matte Black case, and either Chalk or Charcoal with the Polished Silver case.
You can also pick it up in Lemongrass as a standalone band option.
Additional band styles, you say?

Yep. Google has actually designed and is releasing a handful of different band options for Pixel Watch owners. The one big downside is that you can’t use the Pixel Watch with third-party bands or straps. Due to the Pixel Watch’s unique twist and click locking mechanism for the bands. This means you’ll have to buy the bands from Google. At least for now, unless Google ends up working with partners to allow officially licensed bands for the watch. Though we don’t see that happening unless the watch is popular enough and other brands want to make accessories for it.
As for the official Google options, right now there’s the Active Band, a Stretch Band, a Woven Band, a Crafted Leather Band, and a Two-Tone Leather Band. As for colors, you can find them listed below.
Google Pixel Watch Band colors
Active Band – Charcoal, Chalk, Obsidian, Lemongrass, Hazel (Price: $49.99)
Stretch Band – Linen, Rose, Obsidian (Price: $59.99)
Woven Band – Lemongrass, Coral, Ivy (Price: $59.99)
Crafted Leather Band – Obsidian, Ivy (Price: $79.99)
Two-Tone Leather Band – Linen, Charcoal, Chalk (Price: $79.99)
Metal Mesh Band – Matte Black, Polished Silver, Champagne Gold (Price: $129.99)
Metal Links Band – Matte Black, Brushed Silver (Price: $199.99)
That’s all of the officially available Pixel Watch bands for now. But it is worth mentioning that Google will offer both a metal link band and a metal mesh band at some point next year. They’re expensive though, so be prepared to spend a lot. They aren’t available to purchase yet, but Google does show them off in an official photo and they were shown off during today’s event.
What are the biggest features?

There are two big feature categories we’ll split things up into. Help features, and Health features. The help features include everything you’ve come to know and love from Google. Including Google Assistant, Maps, Calendar, Wallet and more. The watch also has an Emergency SOS for fall detection coming in 2023.
The Health features are everything that revolves around your health and fitness. And it’s all handled by Fitbit. The big features on the health side of things include Fitbit’s famous Active Zone Minutes, an ECG app for AFib detection, Sleep Score and Sleep Stages, Mindfulness Sessions and a whole lot more. In fact there’s a good bet that a lot of the features available on the Sense 2, are available on the Pixel Watch also.
Google does own Fitbit now after all. Users will also get third-party app support from Adidas, MyFitnessPal, Calm, Strava, Spotify and others. And when you buy a Pixel Watch from Google you get 3 months free of YouTube Premium, and 6 months free of Fitbit Premium.
How big is the watch?

It’s not a massive chunky boi if that’s what you’re wondering. It measures 41mm in diameter which is actually kind of small. Though certainly not the smallest smartwatch on the market. It’s also 12.3mm in height, and without the band it weighs 36g. Obviously, the band you choose will change the weight. And each band is going to alter that slightly based on the material.
For example, the leather and metal bands probably weigh the most. So with those on the watch likely weighs more than when you use the Active Band, Stretch Band, or Woven Band.
How long is the battery life?

Ah yes, the point of contention for literally every smartwatch on the planet. How long is going to last me? It’s an important question to ask. Because you definitely need to know if you’re going to have to charge the watch up every night. Or in the morning if it charges quickly enough to be done before you need to jet off to work or school. Or anywhere else you need to go during the day when you finally leave the house.
Unfortunately, the Pixel Watch battery life isn’t great. Google’s official statement and spec sheet lists that it lasts up to 24 hours on a single charge. Which, is quite honestly very disappointing. Especially when you consider the competition. The Galaxy Watch 5 lasts for up to 50 hours on a single charge. And the Pro model boosts that up to a surprisingly long 80 hours. Though we never experienced times that long ourselves.
As for charging speeds, Google says the Pixel Watch can charge up to 50% in just 30 minutes. A full 100% will take about 80 minutes. Or if you don’t need quite the full amount, 80% will take about 55 minutes. All things considered, the charge times are quick enough. So even if the battery only lasts a day on a single charge, if you’re not averse to either brining your watch charger with you or buying a second one for travel, you can easily give it some juice when needed.
What are the specs?
We did a full breakdown post of all the Google Pixel Watch specs and you can find that here. But the key highlights are as follows. It has a 292mAh battery, 32GB of storage, 2GB of RAM, and it runs on the Exynos 9110 System On Chip with a Cortex M33 co-processor. It also has an altimeter, a compass, an optical heart rate sensor, a blood oxygen sensor, a multi-purpose electrical sensor, an accelerometer, a gyroscope, and an ambient light sensor. It also comes running on Wear OS 3.5.
Is it waterproof?
It has a 5ATM rating, so, no. It’s not waterproof. It’s water-resistant. It can withstand being in up to 50 meters of water. Though not for more than 24 hours. So you can probably take it swimming, it’ll be fine in the rain, and it should hold up nicely to sweat. If you drop it in a shallow pool, it should be ok there too. But Google does recommend keeping it away from soapy water or other liquids. It also states that the watch shouldn’t be used during high-speed or high-impact water sports.
What about scratches?
The Pixel Watch comes with custom 3D Corning Gorilla Glass. Which is scratch-resistant. So it should be just fine if you stick it in a pocket with things like keys, coins, or accidentally bump it against stuff from time to time. That being said there’s no guarantee that continuously bumping it against walls or other hard surfaces won’t damage the display. So treat it like you would any other piece of electronic equipment you own. With care.
This isn’t the Galaxy Watch 5 Pro or the Apple Watch Ultra. Or any of the numerous watches from Garmin. All of which are built to withstand harsher conditions.
How long will Google support the Pixel Watch with updates?

At least three years. Google has officially guaranteed that the Pixel Watch will receive software support for three years. That means you can expect it to go from Wear OS 3.5 to how ever many versions Google can stuff into a three-year time frame. After that, there’s no more guarantees that the watch will be updated with newer versions of the OS. Or that it will receive any updates at all after that point.
Can you customize the watch face?
Of course. This is a Wear OS watch after all. Out of the box though, it will have 19 customizable watch face options. And it supports Google Photos for watch faces too. And don’t forget, you could just install Facer on it. Which has endless options for you.
Will it support the Pixel 7 and Pixel 7 Pro only?
Nope. It will support those phones, and Google does highlight that it will “work seamlessly with the Pixel portfolio.” But it will also work with any Android phone that runs on Android 8.0 or later. That should be most phones by now. Regardless of manufacturer. That being said, it wouldn’t be surprising if it worked best with a Pixel phone. Just as the Galaxy watches work best with Samsung Galaxy phones.
Google Pixel Watch
The post Google Pixel Watch: Everything You Need To Know – March 2023 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

YouTube is working on AI tools for creators, coming in 2023

YouTube is reportedly preparing some AI tools for its creators. These tools might be released in 2023.
Artificial intelligence (AI) is changing everything, and tech companies are striving to use it as a competitive advantage. After the unveiling of ChatGPT, the AI-driven efforts among Big Tech have been accelerated. Google, whose reign was in danger because of ChatGPT, immediately introduced its experimental conversational AI Bard. The search giant now wants to bring AI into its video-sharing platform YouTube.
Susan Wojcicki has recently left YouTube, and Neal Mohan is now officially behind the company wheels. The new CEO wrote a letter to YouTube communities and employees to highlight the platform’s focus for 2023. Among the promised horizons, Mohan has an emphasis on using AI for creators.
YouTube creators will soon have access to AI tools
Mohan says YouTube is currently offering the biggest creative canvas of any platform. He continues that the AI power is reinventing video, and creators can leverage AI to transform their storytelling and production value.
The new YouTube CEO suggests that creators can use AI to swap outfits to create a fantastical film setting. Mohan also adds that YouTube is currently busy developing such a feature, and new creator tools will be out in the coming months.
Given the copyright issues with AI, YouTube doesn’t want to take the risk and face backlash from artists. The platform has recently introduced a new marketplace for purchasing song licenses, and it might do the same for videos to solve AI copyright infringements.
Neal Mohan also alludes to YouTube’s vision for podcasting. As per the latest news, YouTube Music is adding podcasts to compete with Spotify. YouTube itself is also making it easier for podcasters to share their shows on the platform, thanks to new YouTube Studio tools. Mohan adds that podcasters can upload their shows on YouTube later this year with RSS integration.
Mohan’s vision for the future of YouTube seems promising, and the platform might go through big changes in 2023.
The post YouTube is working on AI tools for creators, coming in 2023 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Garmin's latest running watches feature AMOLED displays

Garmin has unveiled a fresh set of new running watches called the Forerunner 265 and the Forerunner 965, both of which feature AMOLED displays. These are Garmin’s first running watches with AMOELD displays and are designed to deliver advanced training metrics, recovery insights, and everyday health stats for runners who want assistance with training. This includes features like checking your heart rate variability and daily suggested workouts, as well as a morning report to see how well you slept.
The Garmin Forerunner 265 will come in two variations. The standard 46mm Forerunner 265 and the Forerunner 265S, which is 42mm. The Forerunner 965 meanwhile comes in only one size and sits around 47mm. You’re also looking at slightly different battery life for all three watches. The Forerunner 965 can last you up to 23 days in smartwatch mode, for example. The Forerunner 265 and 265S will last you up to 13 days and 15 days respectively. And naturally tuning it to GPS mode will reduce that down to just about a day in all three cases.
All three watches come with Garmin’s Body Battery feature to help you track and manage your body’s energy levels. This way you can decide on the best time for training or know when to rest instead. The slate of usual sport watch features are there too, such as Vo2 Max and Pulse Ox sensors, women’s health tracking, stress tracking, sleep tracking and more.
Garmin adds AMOLED display to its latest watches for even more visibility
There are a lot of features to love about both watch models, but the AMOLED displays deserve just as much attention. With the AMOLED displays on board, the watches are more visible no matter what the weather conditions are like. The displays are also full color and brighter than displays on past models. Garmin says you can also optionally keep them set to always-on, though keep in mind this will contribute to faster battery drain.
The Garmin Forerunner 265 and 265S are available today for $449.99 in multiple colorways. The Forerunner 965 is also available starting today at $599 and comes in multiple colorways as well.
The post Garmin’s latest running watches feature AMOLED displays appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Building the Pixel Watch was actually quite cheap

The Google Pixel was given some flack for being a quite expensive product compared to the other watches on the market. The LTE model of the watch will set you back $399. According to a report from CounterPoint, however, the cost to build a Pixel Watch is actually pretty low.
Anyone should know that it costs money to build the products that we use every day. The cost it incurs to build the product has an effect on the final price that you pay when you check out. With the price of tech going up, it will definitely surprise a lot of people how much it costs to make their favorite devices.
The cost to build a Pixel Watch is relatively low
The Pixel Watch, as great of a smartwatch as it is, is not cheap. You’re paying a premium price for it. So, how much does Google have to shell out to build one? Well, according to the report, it costs about $123 to manufacture an LTE Pixel Watch. So, you’re paying about 2.25 times the manufacturing cost for the watch itself.
This is to be expected, as there’s always a big gap between the manufacturing cost and the final price. So, $123 of what you pay goes to offset the manufacturing cost and the rest goes into the company. As you can imagine, R&D, building, marketing, and paying employees for the Pixel watch is rather expensive, so this is one of the reasons for the high price tag.
Also, even though the watch is rather expensive, we’re not quite sure that Google is even making a profit off of the product. The company needs to sell a lot of them to effectively recuperate the cost of building the watch. So, it’s likely that the company is still operating at a loss.
Looking at the graph, the processor and RAM chips were the biggest cost. It made up 26.9% of the cost. The display came in second place at 17.2% of the cost and third place belongs to the casing, waterproofing, and thermal treating at 14.7%.

If you’re looking to buy one of these devices, you can take a look at our review of it below. It comes in two variants. One is a Wi-Fi-only version and the other one uses LTE.
Pixel Watch Review
The post Building the Pixel Watch was actually quite cheap appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Best Ultra Short Throw Projectors – March 2023

Those that are looking to level up their entertainment space, might be looking to get themselves a nice projector. But then you’ll need to have the projector across the room and mounted on the ceiling. That’s where Ultra Short Throw Projectors come into play. These projectors can be as close as six inches from the wall, and provide up to a 100″ picture. And in some cases, even larger.
These projectors can be pretty pricey though, so we are here to help you find the best ultra short throw projector that you can add to your home.
Best Ultra Short Throw Projectors
In this list, we have ultra short throw projectors from many different brands. Including Samsung, LG, Epson, Optoma and many more. These also range in price from around $899 up to over $5,000. So depending on your budget, there is something here for everyone.

Where to buy
BenQ V7050i
Epson EpiqVision LS300
Hisense L9G TriChroma Laser TV
Optoma CinemaX P2
Samsung The Premiere LSP7T
BenQ V7050i

Price: $3,499
Where to buy: Amazon
Believe it or not, this is actually BenQ’s first ultra short throw projector, and it’s a pretty impressive one. This is a true 4K projector, with 2500 ANSI Lumens, so it’s going to be pretty bright. Even good for rooms with some direct sunlight. It also has 98% of the DCI-P3 color gamut, and HDR-Pro technology included.
You can get about 100-inches of screen, with just 8.7-inches of clearance from the wall, which is really impressive. BenQ also includes an Android TV dongle with this projector – but still no Netflix available, like most other projectors.
BenQ V7050i – Amazon

Price: $3,499
Where to buy: Amazon
The AWOL VISION LTV-2500 is a really impressive ultra-short throw projector, in fact, it’s the one I’ve been using for almost a year now. And I absolutely love it. Mostly because of how bright it is. It has a peak brightness of 2600 lumens. Which makes it perfect to use in a room that does get some sunlight as well.
This projector is a true 4K projector that can project up to a 150-inch screen, it also has Dolby Atmos and HDR10+ available. Giving you a great home theater experience. AWOL VISION is also including an Amazon Fire TV Stick 4K Max here. There’s a compartment on the back, that it can hide in, which makes it feel like Fire TV is built-in.
AWOL VISION LTV-2500 – Amazon
Epson EpiqVision LS300

Price: $1,999
Buy: Amazon
The Epson EpiqVision LS300 is probably the best value for your money on this list. It can provide up to a 120″ picture, and is ultra bright at around 3600 Lumens. That is one of the brightest ultra short throw projectors on the market right now.
Epson also uses Yamaha for its sound, so it should offer some really great sound from this small projector. It uses a custom-designed audiophile 2.1 speaker system, that provides some powerful bass. Epson says it can rival some soundbars too.
On the software side, this is running Android TV and Chromecast Built-in. Making it great for really anyone, as all your apps are going to be available here.
Epson EpiqVision LS300 – Amazon

Price: $899
Buy: Amazon
This is the cheapest projector on this list, and also the only one under a grand. But that doesn’t mean it’s a bad projector, quite the contrary. It is, however, the only 1080p projector on this list.
The JMGO O1 can offer 80 to 100″ pictures at FHD resolution. And this can be done with the projector just 10.6-inches away from the wall. JMGO also worked with Dynaudio to provide some epic sound with this projector. JMGO claims cinematic stereo sound out of the O1.
Software-wise, this is running a forked version of Android. It works, but most of your apps likely aren’t available. Luckily there are plenty of IO on the back. This includes two USB ports, two HDMI ports, an optical and a LAN. So you can plug in a Chromecast and a PS5.
JMGO O1 – Amazon
Hisense L9G TriChroma Laser TV

Price: $4.948
Buy: Amazon
The Hisense L9G is a rather interesting entry in this list, as it is the only one that comes with the ALR screen. Which also explains why it is so pricey – and the most expensive on this list.
This is another very bright projector, coming in at 3000 Lumens. Typically anything over say 2800 Lumens will be bright enough to use in a room with direct sunlight. It’s also 4K HDR, with Dolby Atmos support. Hisense has included 40W Dolby Atmos sound, so it’s going to give you a really great audio experience. Finally, this projector can offer up to a 120-inch picture.
Hisense L9G TriChroma Laser TV – Amazon

Price: $2,699
Buy: Amazon
The WEMAX Nova actually offers the largest picture of any projector on this list, coming in at up to 150 inches. Now that’s a great way to watch The Batman. It isn’t quite as bright as some others on this list though, at 2100 Lumens. It should be bright enough to use in a room with direct sunlight however.
WEMAX has 30W DTS HD speakers with Dolby Audio included. So you’re going to get some really great audio here, though it could be better. Most people will be happy with it though.
This is also running on Android TV, so you’ll have access to over 5,000 apps to watch on the WEMAX Nova.
WEMAX Nova – Amazon

Price: $2,799
Buy: Amazon
This is actually the projector that I use in my home and it’s really good. It’s pretty bright at 2400 lumens, though not perfect for a room with direct sunlight. Some darker shows will be tough to see if there’s sunlight in the room. It can create up to a 100-inch picture, at 4K resolution.
JMGO uses Dynaudio here, like with the O1 also on this list. The two tweeters actually are raised on the projector, and provide a really nice audio experience. I have never used this with a soundbar, because it’s just not needed.
This does run a forked version of Android, which means most of your apps won’t be available, however there are plenty of ports available for plugging in a Chromecast, Apple TV, Roku or even a Fire TV Stick. That includes 2 HDMI (including one HDMI ARC), 1 Optical, 1LAN, 1 Service and 2 USB ports.
JMGO U2 – Amazon
Optoma CinemaX P2

Price: $3,299
Buy: Amazon
Optoma is another name that has been in the projector game for quite some time, and the CinemaX P2 is a really good option. It gets super bright with up to 3,000 lumens. That will be bright enough for most rooms with direct sunlight. And that can also do a 120-inch picture.
This is a 4K HDR10 projector, giving you an incredible looking picture, that is also pretty bright. It does also work with Amazon Alexa Skills and Google Actions, allowing you to use your voice to control the projector.
Optoma CinemaX P2 – Amazon
Samsung The Premiere

Price: $3,499
Buy: Samsung
Samsung does make its own projectors, but there’s not as many of them. Their best is The Premiere, which is a really modern looking projector that is a monster. It’s able to throw a 120″ picture on the wall using lasers, and is rated at 2200 Lumens of brightness.
It’s a 4K HDR projector and is able to cover 83% of the DCI-P3 color spectrum too. On top of that, it has cinema-quality sound with 30 watts of 2.2ch built-in. Giving you a great theater-like experience.
Finally, The Premiere is powered by Tizen, as you’d expect. So most of your favorite streaming apps are available on this projector.
Samsung The Premiere – Samsung.com
The post Best Ultra Short Throw Projectors – March 2023 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Casio reveals new G-SHOCK Move, the first Powered by Polar watch

The new G-SHOCK Move is Casio’s latest multi-sport watch, and also the first watch to be powered by Polar tracking technology. Earlier this week, Polar announced it would be licensing out its technology, specifically 25 different tracking algorithms, to other brands. Casio being the first of those brands with its GBDH2000 watch.
Around the same time Casio officially announced the G-SHOCK Move GBDH2000 model. Giving consumers a full look at the upcoming watch and all of its key features and specs. One key detail to know about is that this is not a Wear OS watch, or really a smartwatch for that matter. It’s a multi-sport watch built on Casio’s own software with the help of Polar’s tracking tech for certain functions. So this is more akin to something like the Garmin multi-sport watches, or even some of Polar’s in-house devices.
Casio’s new G-SHOCK Move is lighter, and supports solar charging
Some of the bigger highlights of this device include its durability, but also its weight. It only weighs 63g, which Casio says is 38% lighter than the previous model. And even with that weight drop it’s still just as durable of a timepiece. A big factor in that reduced weight is the thinner rechargeable battery, which helped to make the watch slimmer. The watch can also be charged both by USB and by using solar power.
Other key features include shock resistance, water resistance up to 200m, a Super Illuminator LED backlight, and a multi-lingual day of the week display that supports English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, and Russian. It also features a sunrise/sunset display, moon data, and a full auto-calendar up to 2099. Though we don’t imagine many people would be using the watch that long.
The Casio G-SHOCK Move GBDH2000 goes on sale on March 10 and retails for $399, and you can pre-order the watch starting today.
The post Casio reveals new G-SHOCK Move, the first Powered by Polar watch appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Why Open Source should be exempt from Standard-Essential Patents

With the European Commission soon to offer the Parliament a bill relating to Standard-Essential Patents (SEPs), it is worth taking time to understand exactly why vendors requiring negotiations to use the patents they have embedded in “open” standards is antithetical to Open Source practice.
The value and prosperity generated from Open Source arises from Open Source software licenses seamlessly and frictionlessly permitting anyone to use, modify, and redistribute the software for any purpose including monetization. When SEPs are licensed in such a way that bilateral negotiation with the licensors is a necessary element of software use, Open Source projects must necessarily avoid implementation of the associated standards to the extent that it is possible for them to do so. A requirement for bilateral, after-the-fact patent licensing is by definition not Open Source due to this introduction of licensing friction.
This is not a matter of ideology but of pragmatics. Open Source developer communities operate on the assumption that the intellectual property owners – including both copyright and patent owners – have granted in advance all necessary rights to enjoy the software in any field of use and in any way. SEPs licensed on bilaterally-negotiated terms break this model and thus are naturally avoided. Further, the tendency for such bilateral negotiations to have some form of non-disclosure agreement (NDA) as a prerequisite also prevents many communities wanting to engage with them as unlike companies they do not have the mechanisms or resources to “firewall” NDA terms and thus routinely refuse NDAs.
Not all standards have SEPs, and not all SEPs require licensing on restricted terms. While some standards are encumbered by patents registered by contributors to the standards process, patents are not an essential or inherent aspect of standardization. As I explained for Open Forum Europe, some standards are developed in a sequence of activities that starts from a statement of requirements (“requirements-led”) while others are developed as a harmonization of existing industry implementation (“implementation-led”).
The requirements-led approach leads some standards development organizations (SDOs) to tolerate restricted licensing of included patented technologies due to the long lead-times in research and development investment by standards contributors. Despite this practice leading to barriers to entry in the resulting markets, tolerating SEP monetization appears a compromise that in many cases can be proportionate to the delayed monetization opportunity for participants.  While negotiation-required (FRAND) licensing of these SEPs is desirable for the commercial entities consuming them, the bilateral negotiation with NDA-enforced privacy that results unwittingly erects a barrier to the normal practice of Open Source communities, where both restrictions on mere use and requiring NDAs are anathemic antipatterns. As a consequence, the standards of this kind are unwelcome in Open Source projects.
By contrast, the implementation-led approach frequently arises in circumstances where recovery of R&D costs is already in hand and patent monetization is not a proportionate compromise. As a result, projects developed under an implementation-led approach (such as at OASIS and W3C) frequently opt for the restriction-free (RF) subset of FRAND terms that results in a negotiation-free usage. As a consequence, standards of this kind do not conflict with the realities of Open Source community operation and are widely implemented as Open Source.
The Commission’s activities regulating SEPs and their licensing are a golden opportunity to also harmonize their standards strategy with their Open Source aspirations. In particular, standards organizations should be required to ask contributors at standards-inception whether a negotiation-required or a negotiation-free/royalty-waived subset of FRAND is appropriate for the resulting standard and develop the standard on that basis — with a default to waiving royalties. We wrote to the consultation by the Commission last May to explain.
This does not mean ending SEPs anywhere else, but there is no point tolerating the desire of certain dominant parties at SDOs to try to pretend Open Source can be defined as copyright-only so they can tax implementation outside their legacy domains. Trying to openwash encumbered standards may satisfy the peers of their bubble but it will simply chill progress and proliferate standards outside it as the market works around the obstacle. The only way forward is to respect the 17-year-old settled consensus and embrace OSI’s Open Standards Requirement.

Source: opensource.org

Twitter bans ‘wishes of harm’ according to its new violent speech policy

Twitter has rolled out its “violent speech” policy that prohibits users from wishing harm to others. Users can’t also glorify or incite violence.
Elon Musk’s changes on Twitter are not yet finished, and the platform is still transitioning to what Musk desires. After mass layoffs in the early days of the takeover, Musk has again laid off another 200 employees from Twitter. The billionaire is now changing the platform’s content policies that putting more restrictions on spreading hate speech and violence.
According to the latest announcement, “wishes of harm” is now banned on Twitter. The company further explains, “This includes (but is not limited to) hoping for others to die, suffer illnesses, tragic incidents, or experience other physically harmful consequences.”
Twitter says it will suspend offending accounts or force the account owner to delete the disputed tweets.
Twitter updates its violent speech policy to ban wishes of harm
This new policy clearly contradicts Twitter’s content moderation policies before Musk’s takeover. As per Twitter’s old policies, “statements that express a wish or hope that someone experiences physical harm” do not violate the platform’s rules. Elon Musk, however, is making a U-turn and bans evil wishes against others.
Twitter also prohibits statements that aim to threaten vital infrastructures and civilian homes. “You may not threaten to inflict physical harm on others, which includes (but is not limited to) threatening to kill, torture, sexually assault, or otherwise hurt someone. Twitter said. “This also includes threatening to damage civilian homes and shelters, or infrastructure that is essential to daily, civic, or business activities.”
Despite improvements that Elon Musk allegedly brought to Twitter, some users argue that Tesla’s CEO is breaking the promises he made before taking over the company in October 2022. The billionaire already said his main incentive to buy Twitter was to protect free speech, and all kinds of speech should be allowed on social media. “I think we would want to err on the side of if in doubt, let the speech exist,” Musk said.
The post Twitter bans ‘wishes of harm’ according to its new violent speech policy appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Blizzard shares Diablo IV beta times, class access, and more

The Diablo IV beta is fast approaching and there are some things you may want to know ahead of time if you’re planning to dive in. Well, you’re in luck. Because Blizzard has put out a ton of new details about the beta just a couple of weeks ahead of when the access is supposed to be live. Blizzard held another beta test for players late last year. But this beta was closed and access was limited to select players at random. It also only included some of the endgame systems and content. The upcoming beta will offer players a bit more.
Diablo IV will officially launch on June 6. So the beta will be the first chance many people have to try the game out prior to its release this Summer. If you’re interested in giving the game a try, there are two things you can do. You can wait for the open beta or acquire early access. Early access to the beta will require you to pre-order the game. It doesn’t matter which platform you buy it on. Or which version you pick up. But it is worth keeping in mind that you will get early access via the platform where you own the game.
Blizzard has also announced official beta times, so players will know how long they have to test things out. Early access to the beta begins on March 17 and lasts until March 20. With access going live at 9am PST and ending at 12pm PST the final day. For the open beta, access opens up a week later on March 24, ending on March 27. Start and end times for the open beta are the same as early access.
The Diablo IV beta does have class restrictions

At least, it will initially. Players in early access will only get to choose from three of the game’s five classes to test out. This includes the Barbarian, Rogue, and Sorcerer. The open beta will expand on that by opening up the final two classes, Druid and Necromancer, in addition to the other three.
If you want to try all five classes, you can. You’ll just have to split them up between the two beta dates.
What to expect content-wise
In its initial post about the beta, Blizzard stated that you’d be able to play through the prologue and the entirety of Act 1. While also being able to explore the very first zone called The Fractured Peaks. You can also level up to a max of 25. So you’re just getting a nibble of what’s in store after launch.
Since that reveal, Blizzard has also now shared that you’ll be able to play the content in a couch co-op mode with one other person on consoles. What’s more, is that the second person doesn’t need to have their own access. They will only need to link their battle.net and console accounts. The beta will also include 4-player online co-op. Again, Blizzard only mentions consoles here. But it’s quite likely that online co-op will also be available for PC players. Couch co-op however is console-only. Online co-op also requires everyone to have access, unless it’s during the open beta.

The post Blizzard shares Diablo IV beta times, class access, and more appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Meta will reportedly launch its AR glasses in 2027

Augmented and virtual reality have been popular buzzwords in the tech industry for years now, with Meta striving to become a leader in both the software and hardware domains. Recently, Meta shared its latest hardware roadmap for AR and VR with its employees, revealing plans to launch full-fledged AR glasses in 2027 that people can wear all day, according to a report from The Verge.
These glasses will be able to project high-quality holograms of avatars onto the real world. Although many details about the glasses are yet to be disclosed, they have been in development for nearly eight years, and the company plans to start public testing by 2024.
While the AR glasses are not launching anytime soon, Meta is preparing to release several other AR and VR devices this year. These include the new Ray-Ban Stories, developed in partnership with Luxottica, and the Meta Quest 3, which will bring some massive improvements to comfort as the device is reportedly twice as thin while still retaining the same performance.
A look into the future
Next year, Meta plans to bring the VR experience to the masses with a VR headset called “Ventura,” which will supposedly be available at an attractive price. Moreover, the company also plans to launch the third generation of Ray-Ban Stories in 2025, which will offer advanced features such as real-time text translation, QR code scanning, and a “neural interface” that enables users to control the glasses through hand gestures and eventually type messages using a virtual keyboard. These advancements will take AR to the next level and offer users a more immersive experience.
It’s clear that Meta is striving to solidify its leadership in the industry with the launch of its AR glasses, but it’s not the only player. Apple is also developing its mixed reality headset, and while there’s not much information about it, reports suggest it may feature advanced hardware such as 4K Micro-OLED displays, motion-tracking cameras, and dedicated processing chips for AR and VR.
The post Meta will reportedly launch its AR glasses in 2027 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Client-side encryption rolling out for all eligible Gmail users

Google is widely rolling out client-side encryption (CSE) for Gmail. The new privacy feature is available for all organizations on a Google Workspace Enterprise Plus, Education Plus, or Education Standard plan. Users with personal Google accounts or on other Workspace plans aren’t getting it, at least not just yet.
Google has been testing CSE for Gmail for the past few months. It released the feature in beta for users on the aforementioned three Workspace plans in December last year. This came after the company rolled out CSE widely for Google Drive, Google Docs, Sheets, Slides, and Google Meet. The tech biggie also expanded the privacy feature to Google Calendar a couple of weeks back. Eligible Gmail users are now getting it as well.
CSE adds another layer of protection to Google’s already secure Workspace service. As the company explains, “Workspace already encrypts data at rest and in transit by using secure-by-design cryptographic libraries”. But with CSE, customers have “sole control” over their encryption keys and the identity service to access those keys. The email body and attachments are indecipherable to Google servers as well as other external entities. Google says this gives customers “complete control over access to their data.”
Google brings client-side encryption to all eligible Gmail users
Client-side encryption gives “organizations higher confidence that any third party, including Google and foreign governments, cannot access their confidential data,” Google wrote in a blog post announcing the general availability of CSE for Gmail. The feature is already available for all eligible users irrespective of whether they are on Rapid Release or Scheduled Release domain. However, it isn’t enabled by default. Admins have to manually enable it at the domain, OU, and Group levels. This can be done by going to Admin console > Security > Access and data control > Client-side encryption.
Once CSE is enabled by your Workspace admin, you can add client-side encryption to any email by clicking the lock icon at the right end of the “To” field. Here, you can “Turn on” Additional encryption and you’re good to go. You can then proceed to compose your message and add attachments as you normally do. Google will take care of the rest. The company says that the experience will not change for users who were already taking advantage of this feature in beta. For everyone else, these few extra clicks will greatly elevate the security of your email and attachments.

The post Client-side encryption rolling out for all eligible Gmail users appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

This Tecno tech lets you change your smartphone's color at will

Tecno has introduced a new technology that enables you to manually change the color of your smartphone. You can pick from over a thousand different colors and apply them to your phone’s back panel at will. The company also makes it possible to automatically change the color based on activity or battery status.
Introduced at Mobile World Congress (MWC) 2023, which is currently underway in Barcelona, Tecno’s Chameleon Coloring Technology is a “full-spectrum electrically-controller prism coloring technology”. The magic is created by a grid of sub-micron prism material that changes direction upon applying an electric field. The company has devised a way to precisely control the direction of the material to achieve different colors. The prism can scatter light in different wavelengths to produce various shades.
This prism material can be embedded in the back of a smartphone to let users manually change colors at a touch of a button. According to a GSMArena report, this tech can produce a total of 1600 different shades. You can access the full spectrum on your phone and switch colors whenever you want. Tecno can also enable you to configure the system in a way that changes colors based on the battery level or activities such as music and incoming notifications. You may also be able to set a unique back color for each app on your phone.
It reportedly takes a fraction of a second for the material to switch from one color to another (just about 0.03 seconds). You can change colors up to two million times before the prism material starts losing its properties. That’s enough to outlast the device itself, though. As far as power consumption is concerned, changing colors 100 times in a day eats up “as much power as watching a 5-minute video”. So it will hardly impact the phone’s battery life.

Tecno makes it possible to manually change the color of your smartphone
Note that the material doesn’t produce light on its own. It can only scatter the natural light off its surface in multiple colors. This essentially means that the magic won’t happen in dark. Well, nobody will see the color of your phone when it’s dark, so that doesn’t matter. More importantly, it won’t require direct sunlight to change colors. That would be a little gimmicky. There already exist phones that can change colors under direct sunlight, such as the Vivo V23 series. It remains to be seen if and when Tecno applies its Chameleon Coloring Technology on its smartphones.

The post This Tecno tech lets you change your smartphone’s color at will appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Get a Sneak Peek of Apple's Latest Features with iOS 16.4 Beta 2 Release

Apple has just released the second beta for iOS 16.4. It’s not the only new beta that Apple released today. Here’s what else was released today:
iPadOS 16.4 Beta 2
tvOS 16.4 Beta 2
macOS Ventura 13.3 Beta 2
So there’s new software all around for beta testers out there. This could also be the first beta update that requires you to have a developer account. Which was a new feature added in the previous beta. So you can’t buy a beta profile from a sketchy site and have sketchy software on your device.
What’s new with iOS 16.4 Beta 2?
We’re not seeing a whole lot of new features with iOS 16.4 Beta 2, seeing as this is the fourth dot update for iOS 16, most of the features have already been added.
But in addition to having to have a developer account now, there’s also new emoji coming in iOS 16.4. This includes a shaking head, pink heart, light blue heart, donkey, moose, jellyfish, hyacinth, ginger, black bird and much more. There are going to be 31 new emoji in total here.
There’s also new Safari Web Push notifications coming to the iPhone and iPad. So you can receive push notifications from websites that have been added to the home screen on your device. Third-party web browsers like Chrome are able to let users add websites and add them to the home screen. Apple has also reintroduced the HomeKit architecture upgrade. There’s some changes to some Apple apps too. Like Podcasts and Music.
A lot of pretty minor changes for iOS 16. At this point in the release, most of the bigger changes are likely being saved for iOS 17, which is set to be announced at WWDC in June. Rumors are pointing to it being a pretty small update, and mostly focusing on bug fixes and improving stability. Which is something Apple really needs to work on with this update.
The post Get a Sneak Peek of Apple’s Latest Features with iOS 16.4 Beta 2 Release appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Bing AI is making its way to your Windows 11 taskbar

AI is the new frontier in tech, as so many companies are investing heavily in the technology. Microsoft was quick to pounce on ChatGPT and implement it into Bing. This is to help it gain an edge over Google. Now, Microsoft is adding Bing AI to the Windows 11 taskbar, according to Engadget.
Microsoft isn’t the only company planning to use ChatGPT for its own AI venture. Snapchat is soon to launch a chatbot of its own powered by ChatGPT. It’s called My AI, and it’s a chatbot that’s supposed to play the role of a human being that you message. You can use it to summon answers to your questions or just chat with you if you need to talk.
Bing AI is coming to Windows 11
With all of the time, money, and effort Microsoft is putting into ChatGPT, it’s no shocker that the company is making it a part of its PC operating system. Windows 11 is the latest version of Windows, and the company has been sending out a torrent of updates to the software as it matures.
An update that users can expect soon is the eventual addition of Bing AI. The chatbot will be integrated into the taskbar. Looking at the screenshot, you’ll see it in the search bar right between the start menu and your pinned apps.
This means that you won’t have to go through Edge in order to access the chatbot. Just click on the search bar and you’ll be able to type in your query. This will streamline the experience a lot.
Windows is currently rolling out this feature in an update today. If you’re a part of the Bing AI preview, then you should be able to access the features. If not, then you’ll want to sign up. You can click here to sign up. You’ll be put on the waitlist to gain access to Bing AI. Microsoft says that, if you want to move higher up the waitlist, then you can use the Bing engine for general searches.
The post Bing AI is making its way to your Windows 11 taskbar appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Microsoft adds iMessage support on Windows

For years, we’ve been asking for Apple to bring iMessage to Android. Even tried multiple hacky methods to get it to work. But today, Microsoft decided to add it to Windows. But there’s a lot of limitations. This isn’t a big surprise, since this is Microsoft and not Apple.
Basically, iMessage is being added to the Phone Link functionality. So you’ll link your phone to your Windows PC using Bluetooth. After you have granted it some permissions on your iPhone, you’ll be able to send and receive text messages and iMessages from your PC using Phone Link.
There is no support for group chats or sending photos or videos. On top of that, it also lacks full message history for conversations and displays all sent and received messages as gray bubbles. Which means, no more green and blue bubbles. At least when you’re on your PC.
iPhone Support in Phone link will be available in a preview this week
It’s early days for this support, as Microsoft will be releasing it in a preview this week. But we don’t expect that it will get a whole lot better in future updates. This is because Apple doesn’t want to help make it better, as they would rather you use a Mac, instead of a PC.
If you’re part of the “small percentage” of Windows Insider members enrolled in the Dev, Beta or Release channels, you’ll be able to check this out. Microsoft says that the preview will be expanded over time.
Is it perfect? No. Definitely not. But it is better than nothing. Maybe this could help Apple bring iMessage support to Windows, and cooperate a bit more. After all, Apple does have a number of apps available on PC. Like Apple Music, iTunes and much more. So there is hope here.
The post Microsoft adds iMessage support on Windows appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

ClearlyDefined gets a new community manager with a vision toward the future

ClearlyDefined has a new community manager! Nick Vidal has joined the project hosted by the Open Source Initiative (OSI) that helps Open Source projects thrive by putting essential licensing data at teams’ fingertips. Vidal comes with 20 years of experience developing Open Source communities and will lead ClearlyDefined to its next phase. He previously served as the director of community and business development at the OSI and director of Americas at the Open Invention Network. Currently he is chair of the outreach committee of the Confidential Computing Consortium from the Linux Foundation.

Vidal joins the project as we celebrate its five year anniversary and the 25th anniversary of OSI. The goal of ClearlyDefined is to bring clarity around licenses and security vulnerabilities to Open Source projects. It provides a mechanism for harvesting available data about Open Source projects using tools such as ScanCode and FOSSology, and facilitates crowd-sourcing the curation of that information when ambiguities or gaps arise.

A lot has changed in the first years of ClearlyDefined, and we’re excited for what the future holds. The ClearlyDefined community has grown to include individuals from organizations such as Microsoft, SAP, Bloomberg, Qualcomm, HERE Technologies, Amazon, nexB, the Eclipse Foundation, and Software Heritage. Together, the community has successfully built a robust software system that is accessible through an open API. The number of definitions in ClearlyDefined has doubled year over year. With a redesigned UI, the data is displayed in a more user-friendly way, making it easier to understand and consume.

Even with all its growth, there’s a lot of room for further improvements as we look ahead to the next five years. Ever since the Log4Shell vulnerability, governments and organizations from around the world have come to realize the essential role Open Source plays in society, given its pervasiveness in the cloud, mobile devices, IoT and critical infrastructure. Clarity around licenses and security vulnerabilities of Open Source projects has become a key concern.

As community manager, Vidal will continue to grow a healthy community of individuals and organizations dedicated to tackling this community-wide concern. Projects ClearlyDefined will be collaborating with include OpenSSF’s Alpha-Omega, Core Infrastructure Initiative, OpenChain, SPDX, FOSSology, OSS Review Toolkit, Automating Compliance Tooling, Sigstore, Supply chain Levels for Software Artifacts (SLSA), Eclipse’s SW360, OWASP’s CycloneDX and OASIS’ Common Security Advisory Framework.

As we celebrate the triumph of Open Source software on its 25th anniversary, at the same time must acknowledge the great responsibility that its pervasiveness entails. Open Source has become a vital component of a working society and there’s a pressing need to bring clarity around licenses and security vulnerabilities to Open Source projects. With contributions from ClearlyDefined and the Open Source community at-large, the future of Open Source is bright and clear.

The community support for ClearlyDefined over the past 5 years has been tremendous. We encourage and invite you to join us at GitHub and follow us on Discord and Twitter.

Source: opensource.org

Skyline Advisor Pro Proactive Findings – February Edition

Tweet VMware Skyline Advisor Pro releases new proactive Findings every month. Findings are prioritized by trending issues in VMware Technical Support, issues raised through post escalation review, security vulnerabilities, issues raised from VMware engineering, and nominated by customers. For the month of February, we released 56 new Findings. Of these, there are 19 Findings based … Continued

The post Skyline Advisor Pro Proactive Findings – February Edition appeared first on VMware Support Insider.

Source: vmware

One UI 5.1 rolling out to OG Galaxy Z Flip & Galaxy A23

Last week, Samsung released the One UI 5.1 update for the 5G model of the original Galaxy Z Flip. The company is now pushing the new One UI version to the LTE model as well. The update is also available for the Galaxy A23, a mid-range phone launched last year.
As of this writing, Samsung’s One UI 5.1 update for the Galaxy Z Flip LTE is currently rolling out to users in Australia. The new firmware build number for the first-ever clamshell foldable Galaxy smartphone in the region is F700FXXUAJWAD (via). The Korean behemoth should globally release the update over the next few days. The handset was sold in the US too, with both carrier-locked and unlocked options. One UI 5.1 should reach all of those phones soon.
That said, even the 5G model hasn’t received the new One UI version anywhere outside Switzerland so far. Samsung released the update in the European country last week but hasn’t expanded the release anywhere else. Hopefully, it will not take much longer. the new firmware version for the Galaxy Z Flip 5G in Europe is F707BXXU7JWAD. It may vary slightly in the US and other markets, but the content will mostly remain the same.
Speaking of content, this update brings plenty of goodies to Samsung’s first-gen Flip models. Firstly, you’re getting the February 2023 Android security patch that fixes more than 50 vulnerabilities across the Galaxy ecosystem. On top of that, there are tons of new features and improvements for your phone. New selfie effects, Shared Family Album, enhanced gestures for efficient multitasking, improved modes and routines, and dynamic widgets are a few major additions. You can check out Samsung’s official One UI 5.1 changelog for the Galaxy Z Flip 5G here.
Samsung’s Galaxy A23 is also getting One UI 5.1
Samsung has also released the One UI 5.1 update for the Galaxy A23. The device is picking up the update with firmware version A235FXXU2CWB4 in Ukraine. It is getting the February security patch and a host of goodies, though not as many as the Galaxy Z Flip or other flagship models. A wider One UI 5.1 rollout for the Galaxy A23 should be just around the corner. The handset wasn’t released in the US.
This is the humblest Galaxy phone to get the new One UI version so far. Part of the 2022 Galaxy A lineup, the device follows premium models Galaxy A33 5G, Galaxy A53 5G, and Galaxy A73 5G in the party. Samsung also released a Galaxy A23 5G last year, which arrived in the US too, but it has yet to get One UI 5.1. We will let you know when the rollout begins for the 5G model of this budget handset.
The post One UI 5.1 rolling out to OG Galaxy Z Flip & Galaxy A23 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

The Nokia G22 is perfect if you like to repair your devices

Having to pay hundreds of dollars to repair your device is never fun. This is something that companies like Samsung and Apple have gotten a lot of flack for. Both companies, including Google, have their own self-repair programs, but Nokia is looking to outdo them. The Nokia G22 is a smartphone that’s extremely easy to repair on your own.
Nokia doesn’t grace the headlines as much nowadays, but the Finnish company just recently updated its logo. Sure, companies change their logos, but this is the first time that the company changed its logo in over six decades. The logo was pretty simple before, the new logo is much more minimalist.
The new font is notably thinner with the “O” being a true circle rather than being closer to a rounded rectangle. The most notable thing about the new logo is the fact that there are strokes missing from the “N”, “K”, and the “A”. It’s one of those logos that use negative space to imply lines.
The Nokia G22 is extremely easy to repair
Nokia has been out of the limelight for years now, so it looks like the company is in need of a shift in direction. This new phone, announced at MWC 2023, looks to prioritize repairability over other things. It’s a £149 mid-range phone that will offer you an experience accordingly. The main thing about this phone is that it’s built around repairability.
Components like the battery are extremely easy to remove at home. Most other phones have their batteries glued in place. This makes it tedious and actually dangerous to remove them. Other components are equally as easy to take out and swap out.
Obtaining parts to repair your phone is also a sinch, as Nokia partnered with iFixit. This is the same company that Samsung and Google partnered with for their programs. You’ll be able to get parts like batteries (£22.99), charging ports (£18.99), and displays (£44.99).
As for the rest of the phone, it has a 6.7-inch 720 display at a respectable 90Hz. The phone uses the Unisoc T606 SoC and that’s backed up by 4GB of RAM and 128GB of storage, Keeping the light on os a 5050mAh battery. It will run Android 12 out of the box with two platform upgrades planned for it.
The Nokia G22 will launch in the UK on March 8th, and will also launch in Europe at some point. Unfortunately, the company didn’t express any plan to launch the phone in the US.
The post The Nokia G22 is perfect if you like to repair your devices appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Waterdrop hinges will address these issues on Galaxy Z Fold 5 & Flip 5

Multiple sources have reported recently that Samsung is developing new types of hinges for its fifth-gen foldables. This redesign will significantly reduce the display crease on the Galaxy Z Fold 5 and Galaxy Z Flip 5. We now have some numbers detailing all the advantages that the new “waterdrop” hinge will bring to the foldable duo.
According to Ross Young, CEO of Display Supply Chain Consultants (DSCC), the waterdrop hinge will significantly reduce the slope and strain on the foldable panel when the device is folded. Citing an official document, he is claiming a 57%drop in strain and a 66% in waviness of the screen along the fold line. This should prevent a crease from developing on the display over time.
The new hinge is also 0.3mm thinner and reportedly consumes 51 percent lesser space inside the phone. As such, Samsung will be able to make the device thinner without compromising on anything. The company has been trying to make its foldables less bulky. It appears that the Galaxy Z Fold 5 and Galaxy Z Flip 5 will finally reflect those efforts. An early prototype has already shown a substantially thinner Fold.
Ross Young also claims that Samsung will make the foldable displays for the Galaxy Z Fold 5 and Galaxy Z Flip 5 in-house. This comes just a week after the Korean media reported that the company is in talks with Chinese display maker BOE for sourcing the screens for its fifth-gen foldables. It’s unclear if the talks broke down or if either source is reporting incorrectly. We should get clarification in the coming months.
Waterdrop hinges will make Galaxy foldables even better
Samsung arguably makes the world’s best foldable smartphones today, but much of that experience is down to its software. Galaxy foldables still have some notable hardware shortcomings, not least the display crease. Other companies have done a better job of eliminating the crease in just one or two attempts but the Korean firm has hardly made any progress even after four years of making foldables.
Now, with the competition rapidly growing in this niche market, Samsung may finally address the problem. If the company does succeed in making the crease will be less visible on the Galaxy Z Fold 5 and Galaxy Z Flip 5, it will make an even stronger case for its foldable devices.
It remains to be seen what other upgrades fifth-gen Galaxy foldables will bring to the table. The devices should go official in the second half of the year, probably in August. In the interim, we will keep you posted with all the latest information about them.
The post Waterdrop hinges will address these issues on Galaxy Z Fold 5 & Flip 5 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Vivaldi 5.7 allows background video playing

Vivaldi is a pretty prominent mobile browser, and it typically gets new updates. A new feature that came with Vivaldi 5.7 is the ability to play videos in the background. This was a pretty sought-after feature, and it’s now available.
Vivaldi is one of the more popular mobile browsers on the market. It’s not as popular as Chrome, but it’s still able to stay relevant as a neat alternative. An important part of the app’s regular feed of updates that the app gets. There are always new features being added to the app.
Vivaldi 5.7 lets users play videos in the background
It gets pretty annoying if you’re watching or listening to a video, but you need to pause it because you’re switching tabs or apps. There are those times when you need a video to play in the background. This is why Vivaldi 5.7 will be really popular among its users.
The company sent out a blog post detailing all of the new features that came with the new update. With the update, the browser will let you play videos even when you minimize the app. You have to enable the feature because if you don’t, the videos will pause when you switch apps.
Now, the blog post did mention that it also works while watching YouTube videos. We all know that YouTube charges for the ability to play videos in the background. Well, even if you’re not a YouTube premium subscriber, you’ll be able to play videos in the background.
You’re not only allowed to play YouTube videos in the background, this feature works on any site that has a video playing. If you’re using the Vivaldi browser, you can keep an eye out for this update.
A lot of services with video host them on their own apps, but Vivaldi 5.7 might cause people to actually log into the services using the browser more. It’d make sense, as background video playing is a really popular feature.
The post Vivaldi 5.7 allows background video playing appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

TCL brings its TCL 40 series phones to MWC 2023, new tablets

TCL introduced us to its TCL 40 series of phones at CES 2023, and they were able to garner some acclaim. This is the next slew of mid-range phones from the company. Now, the TCL 40 series phones are making an appearance at MWC 2023 along with some interesting tablets.
 The TCL 40 series phones are at MWC 2023
Starting off with TCL’s new handsets, these are the next slew of phones that won’t break the bank. We have three new phones called the TCL 40 X 5G, TCL 40 XL 5G, and TCL XE 5G.
TCL 40XL 5G (May 2023 From $149)
First, we have the TCL XL 5G. This is the most affordable model of the set with a 6.75-inch HD+ display with a 60Hz refresh rate. It uses the MediaTek G37 SoC.
It comes with 4GB of RAM and 128GB of storage.
This phone has a triple camera setup. There’s a 50MP main camera that’s accompanied by a 2MP depth camera and a 2MP macro camera. Finishing off the specs, we have a large 5000mAh battery.

TCL 40XE 5G (June 2023 From $169)
Next, we have the TCL 40 XE 5G. This is the middle child of the group with a 6.56-inch HD+ display with a 90Hz refresh rate. It uses the MediaTek Dimensity 700 SoC that’s backed up by 4GB of RAM and 64GB of storage.
It has a triple-camera setup with a 13MP main camera, a 2MP depth camera, and a 2MP macro camera. As for the battery, we’re looking at a large 5000mAb battery.

TCL 40X 5G (June 2023 From $199)
Lastly, we have the TCL 40 X, this phone has a 6.56-inch display with an HD+ resolution that runs at 90Hz. It’s powered by the decent MediaTek Dimensity 700 SoC, and it’s backed up by 4GB of RAM and 64GB of expandable storage.
This phone has the same camera package as the TCL 40 XL 5G. Also, all of these phones use TCL’s NXTVISION display technology for better visuals.

TCL’s new tablets
TCL also showed us its new tablets at MWC 2023. First, we gave the TCL Tab 11. This tablet comes with a decent-sized 10.95-inch IPS LCD display with a resolution of 2000 x 1200. It’s just over 1080p resolution, and it produces 16.7 million colors.
It’s powered by the MediaTek Helio P60T SoC which should give you decent power. That’s backed up by 4GB of RAM and 128GB of storage.
As for the other internals, we’re looking at an 8000mAh battery, a quad-speaker setup, and two microphones. As for the cameras, there’s an 8MP rear camera and an 8MP front camera. Lastly, it comes with Android 13 out of the box.
The TCL Tab 11 will launch in May 2023 at $179 ($209 for the LTE version).

The last tablet is the TCL NXTPAPER 11. This tablet’s specs are identical to the TCL Tab 11. The main thing about this table is the use of TCL’s NXTPAPER 2.0 display technology. This ensures a great viewing experience from any angle. Also, it’s 150% brighter than NXTPAPER 1.0.
The TCL NXTPAPER 11 will launch in Europe and other regions in May 2023 starting at $249.

The post TCL brings its TCL 40 series phones to MWC 2023, new tablets appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

IKEA launches in-store educational AR game about sea life

IKEA has launched a brand-new experience for customers called Lilla Äventyret, an AR game that lets you learn about sea life. The experience is meant as a way for IKEA to interact with its customers, and was developed to be a fun experience for the whole family, according to IKEA’s marketing manager Helena Gouiveia.
IKEA partnered with Meta and Warpin to create the experience. Using an Instagram filter that lets you explore parts of the store to discover facts about sea life, and even take selfies with various sea creatures. Though it is a game, it’s also intended to be educational. So anyone from kids to adults can learn about ocean-related concerns.
To access the game, store visitors will need to scan a QR code using their phone’s camera. Afterwards, they can move around the store and use the AR feature at various departments.
The AR game is only available at certain IKEA locations
While the educational game may sound like fun, there is a caveat. It’s not available everywhere. In fact it’s only accessible in a very limited number of stores. Specifically those in Sweden.
Lilla Äventyret is available in 21 different IKEA stores throughout the country. With the limited access though, it unfortunately means anyone outside of Sweden won’t be available to check out the experience. But if you are near one of the select locations in Sweden that has this experience, it can be a neat way to make the shopping trip more fun. Especially for families that want to augment the experience for their kids.
To get started, visitors will need to make sure the Instagram app is installed on their mobile device. Then scan a QR code using their phone’s camera. This will let them download the required Instagram filter, which they can then activate inside the Instagram app.
The post IKEA launches in-store educational AR game about sea life appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

LumaFusion is now available on ChromeOS and Android

Android is a great platform, but every Android user has felt the plight of iOS users often getting better apps- just try finding a suitable Garage Band alternative Android! However, the iOS hit LumaFusion is coming to Android and ChromeOS, according to 9To5Google.
LumaFusion is an insanely popular and powerful video editing program that debuted on iOS. It shows the power of optimization, as users are met with a ton of useful features to edit their videos.
Yes, Android users were left in the dust with it, but the company did say that it plans on making it available on Android and ChromeOS eventually. This was back in October of 2021, and the company later released a beta version on ChromeOS.
Now, the wait is over, as LumaFusion is available on ChromeOS and Android
Programs are usually available on iOS first and trickle down to Android later. That’s just the nature of the beast. There’s a lot less variation with iOS than with Android. So, Lumafusion coming to Android and ChromeOS sounds like a feat.
Obviously, you’ll want to be mindful of your device’s performance and limitations. If you’re running something like a Pixel 7 Pro or a Galaxy S23 Ultra, then you should not have any issues with it. However, if you’re rocking a $200 mid-range phone, you will have a slower time.
Since LumaFusion is a serious video editor for serious content creators, it will cost serious money (well, for an app). Downloading it from the Google Play Store will cost you a cool $29.99. That’s definitely a lot if you’re looking for an app to casually edit videos. However, LumaFusion offers a feature set that makes you feel like you’re using a professional video editor.
Aside from the typical editing features that you can use anywhere, you have the benefit of unlimited keyframes if you want to animate parts of your video. You’re able to have up to six video layers at the same time which is insane for a mobile program. If you’re looking to use a green screen, well this program also has a chroma key tool.
That’s only a handful of the features that you can look forward to if you buy LumaFusion. If you’re using a Chromebook, Google is also offering 25% off, so that’s great if you’re on ChromeOS.
Buy LumaFusion
The post LumaFusion is now available on ChromeOS and Android appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Xiaomi 13 Pro Review: Eye-catching behemoth with pro-level camera hardware

The Xiaomi 13 Pro launched in China back in December, but that was the Chinese model. The global variant arrived to global markets quite recently, and I received it early, and spent some time with it at this point. This is basically Xiaomi’s new flagship, as the rumored Xiaomi 13 Ultra did not launch. It may launch at some point later this year, but that’s just a wild rumor. As far as we know, at the moment, the Xiaomi 13 Pro is Xiaomi’s heavy-hitter for 2022. That being said, let’s get down to its review, let’s see what the Xiaomi 13 Pro has to offer.
This smartphone comes with truly powerful specs. It has Qualcomm’s latest flagship, the Snapdragon 8 Gen 2, on top of having a top-of-the-line display. The variant we got to review also has a ceramic backplate, while the phone is water and dust resistant. Leica’s lenses are included on the back, and a powerful camera setup. Does that translate into a great, smartphone, though? Well, that’s what we’re here to find out. Let’s get to it!
Table of contents
Xiaomi 13 Pro Review: Hardware / Design
The Xiaomi 13 Pro is made out of metal and ceramic. It has an aluminum frame, and a ceramic backplate, in this case. A variant with a silicon polymer backplate is also available, though, but not globally, only in China. The overall shape is exactly what you’re used to when it comes to modern smartphones. Its front and back sides curve towards the aluminum frame on the sides, proportionally. There is a curved display on the device, with a centered display camera hole. The bezels are quite thin, by the way.
It features three cameras on the back, with Leica lenses

On the back, you’ll notice a squarish camera island in the top-left corner. Leica branding is also included in there, as Leica’s lenses are used here. The Xiaomi 13 Pro includes three cameras on the back. Xiaomi’s branding can be found towards the bottom of the backplate, while all the physical buttons sit on the right-hand side. This handset even has an IR blaster at the top, which is not unusual for Xiaomi phones. So you can use it to control your TV or some other appliances, if you want.
The phone feels really good in the hand
The phone feels great in the hand, actually. It doesn’t cut into your hand, or anything of the sort. The Xiaomi 13 Pro is quite slippery, though, and this black ceramic variant that we got does attract a lot of fingerprints. It does feel undeniably premium, however. The phone does actually feel a bit smaller in the hand than it actually is, even in the silicone case that is included in the box. I’ve used similarly-sized devices lately, plenty of them, so the difference is noticeable. I didn’t feel like the phone is as large as it is, so I was surprised when I check out the dimensions.
When it comes to weight, it stands at 229 grams, at least this ceramic variant does. The polymer back model weighs less, 210 grams. Overall, Xiaomi did a really good job design-wise. The phone feels exactly as it should feel, without any crazy design ideas/implementations. Using a case may be a good idea due to its slippery nature, and the fact it attracts fingerprints like nobody’s business.

A see-through silicone case is included in the box
Xiaomi does include a case in the retail box, with the Xiaomi 13 Pro. Well, at least our variant got it, but we believe that every single model comes with this case. The case itself is nothing fancy, a regular see-through silicone/gel case. That’s somewhat standard when it comes to Chinese flagship smartphones these days, and it’s always nice to see. This case offers a good level of protection, and it’s great to have until you get something else, if you even want to do that. Many people stick with cases like these.
Xiaomi 13 Pro Review: Display

The Xiaomi 13 Pro features a 6.73-inch QHD+ (3200 x 1440) LTPO OLED panel. This display is curved, and it supports HDR10+ content. It also comes with Dolby Vision support, and can get very bright if needed, it goes all the way up to 1,900 nits of peak brightness. It can also show up to 1 billion colors, and has a centered display camera hole. All in all, Xiaomi used an excellent display, and there’s not much more you can ask for.
The display gets immensely bright when needed
This display is plenty bright, even in direct sunlight. Do note that the only way you’ll get remotely close to its top brightness is in auto mode, so don’t try to get there manually. The display is tuned to fullHD+ mode by default, and even in that mode it’s plenty sharp, so there’s really no need to go all the way up. Considering you paid so much for the device, you may want to, and that’s completely understandable.
It’s also well-optimized
This panel feels really good to use. The content is smooth, as the 120Hz refresh rate kicks in, and even the touch response is really good. Its touch sampling rate is not anything crazy, by the way, it’s 240Hz, but that’s not something many of you care about either way. The phone is great for gaming regardless. The viewing angles here are great, and the colors are vivid. You also get granular controls in the settings, so you can tweak it any way you want. It’s an outstanding panel that can stand side-by-side with the best out there. It’s also great for consuming multimedia. And yes, the blacks are very deep, as you’d expect out of a proper AMOLED panel.
Xiaomi 13 Pro Review: Performance
Xiaomi used top-of-the-line hardware here, and that includes the most performance-oriented hardware, the SoC, RAM, and storage. The Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 SoC fuels the phone, Qualcomm’s most powerful processor. Xiaomi also utilizes LPDDR5X RAM in this phone, along with UFS 4.0 flash storage. The Xiaomi 13 Pro comes in a number of different flavors, but it includes up to 12GB of LPDDR5X RAM and up to 512GB of UFS 4.0 flash storage. That is the variant that we got to test, by the way.

Gaming is a piece of cake for the Xiaomi 13 Pro
The Xiaomi 13 Pro is one of the best-performing devices out there, there’s no doubt about that. Its powerful hardware internals are backed by really good software provided by Xiaomi. I never felt like I was waiting on the phone to catch up, regardless of what I was doing. Multitasking was a breeze, as was launching apps, consuming multimedia, taking pictures, and so on. Even if you run graphically-intensive games, that’s not a problem at all. Xiaomi also implemented VC liquid cooling, on a rather large surface, so the phone is really good at dissipating heat as well. It will get warm, as all flagships do under heavy load, but it’ll never get too warm, nor will that affect the performance. At least it did not for us.
There are no performance-related oddities to report. Well, I did stumble upon a few software-related ones, but I’ll leave that for the software section. It’s nothing serious though, some minor things that are barely worth mentioning.
Xiaomi 13 Pro Review: Battery
The Xiaomi 13 Pro includes a 4,820mAh battery on the inside. In addition to that, it supports immensely fast wired and wireless charging. 120W wired charging is supported, in addition to 50W wireless charging, and 10W reverse wireless charging. Oh, and in case you’re wondering, yes, the charger is included in the box, with the phone. You do not need to buy it separately, you do get a 120W charger here.
You can fully charge this phone in 19 minutes

In case you’re wondering how fast its charging is, well, it’s truly blazing fast. You can fully charge the phone via a wire in about 19-20 minutes, while Xiaomi says you can do the same via wireless charging in 36 minutes. I could not test wireless charging via an official wireless charger, so I’m not going to comment on that.
The battery life is excellent
That being said, let’s talk about battery life, shall we? Let’s just say you’ll be happy with its battery life, even if you’re a power user. The Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 handles power consumption like a champ, while Xiaomi also used a decent battery size here, and optimized the phone well. I was regularly getting over 7 hours of screen-on-time with plenty of juice left in the tank. You can really go the distance with this phone, especially if you’re not gaming a lot on it. The point is, the Xiaomi 13 Pro battery life should not worry you, at all.
Xiaomi 13 Pro Review: Camera
Xiaomi spared no expense when it comes to camera hardware on the Xiaomi 13 Pro. The phone comes with three 50-megapixel cameras, including a 1-inch sensor on the main camera. What it doesn’t have is a periscope camera, but we’ll come to that. The Xiaomi is using Sony’s IMX989 sensor, the same on that it used in the Xiaomi 12S Ultra, and the same one Vivo implemented. That That 50.3-megapixel main camera has a 1.6um pixel size, OIS support, and an f/1.9 aperture. There is also a 50-megapixel ultrawide camera (115-degree FoV), and a 50-megapixel telephoto unit (f/2.0 aperture, 75mm telephoto lens, 3.2x optical zoom). Leica lenses are included on all these cameras, by the way.

Great camera hardware, but no periscope camera
As I said, there is no periscope telephoto camera here, which is a shame. The Vivo X90 Pro doesn’t have it either, only the Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra, as far as newer flagship phones are concerned. What’s interesting is that the Vivo X90 Pro+ has it, but it only launched in China. Now that we cleared that up, let’s talk about the cameras themselves. The hardware itself is not really all that useful without great software, is it. Well, Xiaomi did a good job here, but not the level I expected, to be quite blunt. I reviewed the Vivo X90 Pro just before the Xiaomi 13 Pro, which is ideal, as I already had a great starting point for this review.
When it hits the shot just right, the results are outstanding
Just to be clear, the camera performance of this phone is really, really good, but in some situations, it needs optimizing. When the phone nails a shot, you’ll be amazed. It’ll be crisp, with that creamy bokeh effect that makes it look like it was taken with a DSLR. The shutter if quite fast, even in low light, and overall the images are well-balanced. When you get into more demanding situations, however, it’s obvious further tweaking is needed. You’ll see all that in the camera samples I’ll include below. Before we start, please do note that most shots I took with the phone were with auto HDR (base setting), and with ‘Leica Authentic’ option, as ‘Leica Vibrant’ looked a bit too saturated to be, in some shots. I preferred the look of ‘Leica Authentic’ more of then than not.
Xiaomi needs to optimize HDR performance
Those specific cases include some HDR situations, and some low light situations. The phone struggles, at times, to balance out images in HDR situations, and yes, HDR was on (auto mode), and I tried retaking almost every shot with tap to focus. In any case, what I said here especially goes for indoor shots when the sun is the brightest. If you check out the two examples below, you’ll see what I’m talking about. The Vivo X90 Pro did a much better job at balancing out the two images than the Xiaomi 13 Pro did. That goes for both the bright light on the Android figurine, and the colors on the display of the OPPO Find N2 (plus the figure in the back).
Xiaomi 13 Pro vs Vivo X90 Pro (indoor HDR) sample 1:

Xiaomi 13 Pro vs Vivo X90 Pro (indoor HDR) sample 2:

That doesn’t happen always, though, not at all. The Xiaomi 13 Pro can truly do a great job in most cases, even with HDR. That’s why I mentioned optimization several times thus far. This phone needs a camera update that will work out the kinks in that aspect, and it’ll do a much better job, even in such demanding situations.
Low light performance is great, but high dynamic range can be an issue
Another problematic aspect is low light, but only in certain situations. If you take a look at the gallery below, you’ll see some examples. In one of those, the Xiaomi 13 Pro failed to balanced out the shot of a tree, which sits next to a tree light. The light is way too harsh, and it doesn’t look all that great, the same goes for the chandelier image. The same goes for the image of a car wash, where plenty of light sources are included (it wasn’t nearly as bright). It usually does a good job with noise, while details in low light are hit and miss, it all depends on the scene. Most of the time, however, they’re really good.

Most of the time, the phone did a really good job camera-wise
Up to this point, it seems like things aren’t that great, but I just wanted to highlight some pain points before we get down to the good. I had, generally, a good experience with the camera. If you check out the gallery below, you’ll see camera samples from various situations in which the phone did a great job. Some of those are tricky HDR shots, so, as you can see, the phone can nail a shot. It can actually do an outstanding job. It does great during the day, as it offers plenty of details, and balances shots out nicely. It does great with macro shots too. The same goes for low light, as long as you’re not facing very demanding high dynamic range situations. If Xiaomi manages to improve HDR camera processing… well, the Xiaomi 13 Pro will be a force to be reckoned with.

The ultrawide and telephoto cameras do a good job. The quality does slip a bit in low light, but that’s the case with all cameras out there. The main camera is the one to use in low light situations, and there’s no way around it. The selfie camera is really good, whether you want a realistic shot, or a highly processed one, it’s up to you. The video recording is also quite good, but not to the level of the iPhone 14 Pro (Max) or the Galaxy S23 Ultra. When there’s challenging light in the scene, some distortion is noticeable.
Xiaomi 13 Pro Review: Software
Android 13 comes pre-installed on the Xiaomi 13 Pro, and on top of it you’re getting Xiaomi’s MIUI 14 skin. If you’ve used MIUI 13, you know exactly what to expect here. There’s really not that much different about it in terms of functionality and looks. Xiaomi did issue many optimizations here, cut down on some bloat, and more. As a result, the company promised up to 60% better performance compared to MIUI 13. Is that something we’re getting here? Well, there’s no way to measure it, but the phone is fast, immensely fast.
MIUI 14 is smooth and very responsive

Its overall great performance definitely has much to do with the hardware, but Xiaomi apparently did a good job optimizing the software. MIUI 14 is very functional, and packed with tons of features. Ranging from the company’s themes and wallpapers, various gestures that you can utilize, and floating windows option, to a number of pre-installed apps from the company that you can use. One of those apps is dedicated to security, the other to customization, there’s also one for Xiaomi’s official forums, and so on. Some apps you can uninstall, others not so much. The point is, the OS works really well. I did stumble upon a couple of small bugs during my testing, but it’s really nothing major.
I barely had issues with it
At one point, the OS simply froze up, and I had to wait a couple of seconds before it decided to take my input. I’ve also seen a couple of app crashes, and at one point I had to wait for the fingerprint scanner to appear on the screen (a couple of seconds). Other than that, everything ran really smoothly, and I really don’t have any major complaints here. If stock Android is your thing, you probably don’t really like MIUI to begin with. If you don’t care all that much and want a customizable OS that works really, really well… MIUI is a good choice. It also has a really good image and video editor baked in, and it allows you to duplicate apps via the ‘Dual apps’ feature. It also doesn’t really kill off apps in the background nearly as aggressively as before, though that habit is still there.

Xiaomi 13 Pro Review: Should you buy it?
The Xiaomi 13 Pro is, without a doubt, a true flagship. It’s a great smartphone in many ways, though it’s not perfect. The camera performance still needs tweaking on the software side of things, while MIUI 14 will need another update or two to squash a couple of bugs. Other than that, this phone is outstanding. The display is bright, vivid, and quite responsive. The design is great, the phone not only looks premium, but it feels great in the hand. It offers really good battery life with blazing fast wired and wireless charging, and more. It really doesn’t miss in a lot of ways, and it will certainly be appealing to many people.

You should buy the Xiaomi 13 Pro if:
You appreciate premium build materials
You want the latest and greatest specifications
You want a 1-inch camera sensor in a smartphone
You are a heavy user, and need good battery life
You need some of the fastest wired & wireless charging options on the market
You hate OEMs who don’t include chargers with their phones
You appreciate software customizability
You shouldn’t buy the Xiaomi 13 Pro if:
You require an outstanding ultrawide camera
Your camera expectations are too high
You appreciate minimalistic software

The post Xiaomi 13 Pro Review: Eye-catching behemoth with pro-level camera hardware appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Phone Comparisons: Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra vs Samsung Galaxy S23+

Samsung launched three flagship-series phones earlier this month, and we’re here to compare two of them. We’ll compare the Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra vs Samsung Galaxy S23+ here. These are the two largest new flagship series phones the company announced. They are quite similar in many ways, but there are also some notable differences worth pointing out. They do differ in terms of design, display, cameras, and more.
As per usual, we’ll first list their specifications, and will then move to compare the two phones across a number of categories. We’ll compare their designs, displays, performance, battery life, cameras, and audio performance. We’ve spent quite a bit of time with both phones at this point, so we have a pretty good idea as to what you can expect. That being said, let’s get this party started, shall we?

Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra
Samsung Galaxy S23+
Screen size
6.8-inch QHD+ Dynamic AMOLED 2X display (curved, 120Hz adaptive refresh rate, LTPO, down to 1Hz, 1,750 nits peak brightness)
6.6-inch fullHD+ Dynamic AMOLED 2X display (curved, 120Hz adaptive refresh rate, LTPO, 1,750 nits peak brightness)
Screen resolution
3080 x 1440
2340 x 1080
Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 for Galaxy
Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 for Galaxy
256GB/512GB/1TB, non-expandable (UFS 4.0)
256GB/512GB, non-expandable (UFS 4.0)
Rear cameras
200MP (f/1.7 aperture, 24mm lens, 0.6um pixel size, multi-directional PDAF, Laser AF, OIS)
12MP (ultrawide, Dual Pixel AF, 120-degree FoV, f/2.2 aperture, 1.4um pixel size)
10MP (telephoto, Dual Pixel AF, OIS, f/2.4 aperture, 1.12um pixel size, 70mm lens, optical zoom 3x)
10MP (telephoto, Dual Pixel AF, OIS, f/4.9 aperture, 1.22um pixel size, 230mm lens, 10x optical zoom, 100x Space Zoom)
50MP (f/1.8 aperture, 24mm lens, 1.0um pixel size, OIS, Dual Pixel PDAF)
12MP (ultrawide, f/2.2 aperture, 13mm lens, 120-degree FoV, 1.4um pixel size)
10MP (telephoto, f/2.4 aperture, 70mm lens, 1.0um pixel size, OIS, 3x optical zoom, PDAF)
Front cameras
12MP (f/2.2 aperture, 26mm lens, Dual Pixel PDAF)
12MP (f/2.2 aperture, 26mm lens, Dual Pixel PDAF)
5,000mAh, non-removable, 45W wired charging, 15W Qi wireless charging, 4.5W Wireless PowerShare
Charger not included
4,700mAh, non-removable, 45W wired charging, 15W Qi wireless charging, 4.5W Wireless PowerShare
Charger not included
163.4 x 78.1 x 8.9mm
157.8 x 76.2 x 7.6mm
234 grams
196 grams
5G, LTE, NFC, Bluetooth 5.3, Wi-Fi, USB Type-C
5G, LTE, NFC, Bluetooth 5.3, Wi-Fi, USB Type-C
In-display fingerprint scanner (ultrasonic)
In-display fingerprint scanner (ultrasonic)
Android 13
One UI 5.1
Android 13
One UI 5.1
$1,199.99/$1,299/$1,399/TBA (1TB)
Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra vs Samsung Galaxy S23+: Design
The moment you lay your eyes on the two phones you’ll notice they’re different. The Galaxy S23 Ultra is flat on both the top and the bottom, unlike the Galaxy S23+. It also has very sharp corners, which is not the case with its sibling, who has rounded corners. They both do include a centered display camera hole, but different displays. The Galaxy S23 Ultra’s is curved, while the Galaxy S22+’s is not. We’ll talk more about displays themselves in the next section.
If we flip the two phones around, you’ll notice that the camera styles are similar, design-wise, but the Galaxy S23 Ultra has more sensors on the back. On both phones, those cameras protrude directly from the backplates. The Galaxy S23 Ultra has curved front and back sides, which is not something we can say for the Galaxy S23+. The phone has flat front and back sides. It is worth noting that the Galaxy S23 Ultra has an S Pen silo in the bottom-left corner. They are both made out of metal (aluminum), and glass.
The Galaxy S23 Ultra is taller, wider, and thicker than the Galaxy S23+. The difference is not major, but it’s noticeable, very much so. The ‘Ultra’ model is also considerably heavier. It weighs 234 grams compared to 196 grams of the Galaxy S23+. Both phones are IP68 certified for water and dust resistance, and both have Gorilla Glass Victus 2 on the back and the front. Yes, they’re both also slippery, and feel completely different in the hand. They both feel large, but the Galaxy S23 Ultra is noticeably more massive. The premium feeling is present when you’re holding both devices, one doesn’t really feel more premium than the other.
Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra vs Samsung Galaxy S23+: Display
The Galaxy S23 Ultra features a 6.8-inch QHD+ (3088 x 1440) Dynamic AMOLED 2X display. This panel is slightly curved, and it has a 120Hz refresh rate. That refresh rate is adaptive, by the way, to save power. HDR10+ content is supported, and the panel gets immensely bright at 1,750 nits of peak brightness. The Gorilla Glass Victus 2 is included on top of the display for protection reasons.

The Galaxy S23+, on the other hand, includes a 6.6-inch fullHD+ (2340 x 1080) Dynamic AMOLED 2X display. This is also a 120Hz refresh rate, and yes, it’s also an adaptive panel. It supports HDR10+ content, and it gets just as bright as the Galaxy S23 Ultra’s display, when needed. On both phones that is achievable only through adaptive (auto) brightness, though. The Gorilla Glass Victus 2 protects this display as well.
Yes, the Galaxy S23 Ultra’s display is sharper, but the vast majority of people wouldn’t notice that. FullHD+ displays are more than enough, even for such large displays, especially if they’re as good as the Galaxy S23+’s is. Besides, the Galaxy S23 Ultra’s display comes set to fullHD+ resolution out of the box. You can change that, though. Both displays are vivid, sharp, and have excellent viewing angles. The blacks are very deep, and they’re both quite responsive. The Galaxy S23 Ultra’s may be better on paper, but you really can’t go wrong here. If you prefer flat panels, the Galaxy S23+ has an excellent one.
Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra vs Samsung Galaxy S23+: Performance
When it comes to performance, there’s not much difference between the two. We’re talking about sheer snappiness, of course. The Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 for Galaxy fuels both phones, while both devices include LPDDR5X RAM and UFS 4.0 flash storage. The Galaxy S23 Ultra does offer more RAM, though. In day-to-day performance, they are identical, which is not surprising considering their specs and software.
We did not really spot any lag or anything of the sort during our usage. Quite the contrary, these two phones were easily the snappiest Samsung smartphones we’ve ever used. They open apps fast, multitask like nobody’s business, and are also great for content consumption, etc. Even if you like gaming on your phone, these two will do the trick. Not only is the Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 for Galaxy an excellent SoC, and great for power consumption, but Samsung actually included a proper vapor chamber this time around.
Both smartphones performed great in gaming, even when the most demanding games are concerned. They do get warm, but do not overheat, nor do the games suffer because of it. Performance-wise, they’re on the same level. The Galaxy S23 Ultra does have the advantage of the S Pen, though, of course, but that’s not what we’re talking about here. It’s worth noting, however, of course.
Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra vs Samsung Galaxy S23+: Battery
What about the battery life, is that also the same? Well, no, not at all. Let’s get the technical stuff out of the way first. The Galaxy S23 Ultra includes a 5,000mAh battery, while the Galaxy S23+ has a 4,700mAh unit on the inside. Based on these battery capacities, and taking other specs into consideration, the two phones should have fairly similar battery life. The Galaxy S23+ does have a smaller display, while most of their internals are identical, and the same goes for software.
Well, the Galaxy S23+ does have really good battery life, but nowhere near the Galaxy S23 Ultra. It’s not even close. Getting up to 9-10 hours of screen-on-time is doable with the Galaxy S23 Ultra, we even went up to 11-12 a couple of times. We were actually amazed at how great that phone’s battery life is. The Galaxy S23+, on the other hand, well, getting up to 8 hours of screen-on-time is possible, at times. The Galaxy S23+ has considerably worse standby battery consumption than the Galaxy S23 Ultra, for whatever reason.
When charging is concerned, both phones support 45W wired charging, in addition to 15W wireless charging, and 4.5W reverse wireless charging. Do note that a charger is not included in the box with either device. This charging is fairly good, as you can get a full charge in around an hour (65% in about 30 minutes), but it’s nowhere near as fast as some of the competition offers.
Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra vs Samsung Galaxy S23+: Cameras
The Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra features a 200-megapixel main camera, along with a 12-megapixel ultrawide camera (120-degree FoV), a 10-megapixel telephoto camera (3x optical zoom), and a 10-megapixel periscope telephoto (10x optical zoom) unit. The Galaxy S23+, on the other hand, has a 50-megapixel main camera, a 12-megapixel ultrawide unit (120-degree FoV), and a 10-megapixel telephoto camera (3x optical zoom).

Now, some of you may think that the Galaxy S23 Ultra simply blows the Galaxy S23+ away, based on the review for the ‘Ultra’. That’s not quite the case. In fact, the Galaxy S23+ holds its own really well, and in many cases, the pictures look very similar. In standard mode, both pixel bin to 12-megapixel shots, though the Galaxy S23 Ultra has more info to work with. The pictures do end up looking similar during the day, very similar in fact. In low light, the Galaxy S23+ usually tuned up the brightness just a little bit higher, while the ‘Ultra’ nails the shot most of the time. Both phones tend to provide true-to-life colors for the most part, but at times, they tend to crank up the saturation a bit. They’re both excellent in HDR situations.
The main differentiating factor between them is the 200MP mode on the Galaxy S23 Ultra, and the insane zoom levels the phone offers. If you really need 200MP shots, so that you can zoom in further into the shot while retaining detail, then the Galaxy S23 Ultra is for you. Do note that 200MP shots are huge, and are not exactly as eye-pleasing as 12MP ones. You’ll usually need to spend some time adjusting them. 3x optical zoom is present on both phones, and both of them do a great job in that regard. However, if you go beyond that, the Galaxy S23 Ultra is the winner, no doubt. In fact, shots up to 30x look excellent, as long as there’s light present. Everything over that does drop in quality, but even at 100x, the Galaxy S23 Ultra is truly impressive. There’s not a phone out there that can compete with its periscope telephoto camera performance at the moment.
Both of these phones have a set of stereo speakers, but they do not have an audio jack. Those speakers are really good on both phones, and quite frankly we didn’t really notice a difference sound-wise. Both sets of speakers are tuned by AKG, and are louder than their predecessors. The sound is good, and there’s even some bass included.
If you want to connect your headphones via a wire, you’ll have to use a Type-C port. Neither phone includes an audio jack. Both do support Bluetooth 5.3, though, in case you prefer wireless audio connections.
The post Phone Comparisons: Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra vs Samsung Galaxy S23+ appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Best Gaming Chairs – February 2023

I’m in the belief that gaming chairs are the most important part of one’s gaming setup, and that you don’t want to settle for anything less than the best options. Why? Because you’re going to be sitting in it for hours on end. Two, maybe three at the least. More if you tend to play for longer sessions, and more than half your day if you also work from home even only partially.
You want a good gaming chair so that you’re not only comfortable, but so you can stay supported in the crucial areas where you can end up with temporary soreness or pain (or worse) after extended periods of play over time. This is why chairs with at least some ergonomic features are used by many companies. And why I myself, as well as many others, have moved away from the traditional gaming chair. It’s better for your health, and overall, more comfortable when you’re playing.
With all of that in mind, we’ve rounded up a list of the best gaming chairs you can buy right now. Both functionally, and style-wise.
Best gaming chairs
Gaming Chair
Where To Buy
Mavix M9
Razer Iskur
Amazon, Best Buy, Razer
Secretlab Titan Evo 2022
Respawn Flexx
Herman Miller Vantum
Herman Miller
Respawn Spire
From $529.15
Herman Miller Embody Gaming Edition
Herman Miller
Autonomous ErgoChair
Mavix M5
Mavix M9

Price: $999
Where To Buy: Amazon
We’ve spent a few months with the Mavix M9 since our review of the chair this Summer, and it’s one of the best gaming chairs on the planet hands down. It comes with a higher price than most standard gaming chairs out there but that price is worth it for what you get. What we like most about it adjustable lumbar and the cooling seat.
The seat offers a wide base so there’s tons of room. Plus it uses a memory foam type material that conforms to you so it’s extra comfy even if you’re sitting in it all day. Where it really set itself apart for us was the supportive back, and optional FS 360 armrests that swivel and move in just about every direction. While these don’t come with the chair normally, they’re a great add-on.
The Mavix M9 also offers a great recline, plus recline tension, adjustable seat depth, and more. It’s been one of our favorite gaming chairs to date and that’s because it’s more like an ergonomic chair.
Mavix M9
Razer Iskur

Price: $399.99
Where To Buy: Amazon, Best Buy, Razer
Razer is well-known for its place in the gaming industry and its Iskur chair is the sweet spot we think for those that want a racing-style gaming chair. The biggest reason is because the Iskur offers the adjustable lumbar support that’s built-in instead of using lumbar pillows like most chairs in this design.
And we found that to be more comfortable than similar products like the DX Racer models which use the pillow instead. This chair also features the 4D armrests so you get lots of adjustment for the most comfortable placement of your arms while typing or playing games. And the high-density foam seat cushion is definitely a plus.
It also comes in two different colorways in leather, and one colorway in fabric if you want something more breathable.
Razer Iskur
Secretlab Titan Evo 2022

Price: $589
Where To Buy: Amazon
This might look like just another racing-style gaming chair but it’s certainly more than meets the eye. And one of the best gaming chairs you buy right now. First things first, though it doesn’t look it, the Titan Evo 2022 has adjustable lumbar support. And we’re all for adjustable lumbar support both when working and when playing games. Especially during longer play sessions.
You might start playing while sitting one way and then want to switch things up later on. This is where the adjustable lumbar support on the Titan Evo 2022 can come in handy. It uses what Secretlab calls its L-Adapt system that uses a “lattice of living hinges” that go up and down and in and out. Each directional set can be adjust with the corresponding knob on the left and right sides. There’s also adjustable height, recline and tilt tension, and 4D armrests.
Which by the way, are magnetic so you can swap the tops out for a different look. It also comes with a magnetic head pillow that’s easily adjustable too.
Secretlab Titan Evo 2022
Respawn Flexx

Price: $399
Where To Buy: Amazon
For a more affordable option, the Respawn Flexx has to be one of our favorite gaming chairs and potentially the best option in this price range. What we like about it are the mesh seat and back for great breathability. But that’s not all there is to love. It also has some ergonomic features to bridge that gap between racing-style gaming chair and ergonomic office chair. In fact, design-wise it looks more like an ergonomic chair than a gaming chair.
It comes with an adjustable headrest, adjustable seat depth, seat recline and tilt tension, and a recline lock for when you want to lean back and relax. The one downside is that it doesn’t offer 4D armrests. But at this price there’s going to be some concessions.
Still, if you’re looking for a good gaming chair that doesn’t cost over $500, you can’t really go wrong here.
Respawn Flexx
Herman Miller Vantum

Price: $795
Where To Buy: Herman Miller
Moving on up is definitely another one of the best gaming chairs you can buy. The all-new Herman Miller Vantum. The Vantum was designed from the ground up by Herman Miller in partnership with Logitech and made specifically for gaming. But it still keeps a lot of the DNA that makes a Herman Miller chair a Herman Miller chair. Which is the world-class ergonomics.
The Vantum has a high mesh back with adjustable thoracic support, an adjustable headrest, and Herman Miller’s tested Posturefit spinal support system. You can also adjust the seat depth so your legs are at a more ergonomic angle, and the armrests can be adjusted by height, width, and depth.
It also doesn’t hurt that it comes with a 12-year warranty. So if any of the parts fail, Herman Miller takes care of it. It also comes in three colorways. Sure, it’s pricey like the Mavix M9. But if you play long hours and play often, and work from home, think of this as an investment in your back, neck, head, muscles, and joints.
Herman Miller Vantum
Respawn Spire

Price: From $529.15
Where To Buy: Respawn
We’re currently using the Respawn Spire and so far we love a lot about it. First and foremost, the breathable mesh back with the honeycomb support forms to your back and moves as you move. While it doesn’t come with adjustable lumbar support in the same way that most of these other chairs do, it still does adjust to an extent and we’ve found it pretty comfortable. Even after 9 hours of work and multiple hours of game time.
It also has an adjustable headrest, synchro tilt recline with a locking system, and one of our favorite parts, the cooling gel-infused seat to keep your butt cool. The arms also flip backwards to move completely out of the way. Which is great if you want a little extra room to sit cross legged. Additionally the arms can go up and down as well as forward and backward.
Respawn Spire
Herman Miller Embody Gaming Edition

Price: $1,795
Where To Buy: Herman Miller
If you’re going to go all out for a gaming chair that you can probably keep for life, the Herman Miller Embody Gaming Edition is likely that chair. We get it, the price is a huge hang-up and probably will be for many people. But don’t immediately dismiss it because there’s A LOT to love about this chair. Potentially more than any other.
This version of the Embody is a lot like the original, but Herman Miller worked with Logitech G to enhance it with gaming-specific features. Like the seat which now has an extra layer of foam for more comfort over longer periods of sitting.
The armrests are also unique as they move down further than most other chairs. So they move almost entirely out of the way. They can also tilt in and out. Though not like most other arms. Where most chairs the armrest tops and can slide in and out, the arms on the Embody Gaming Edition actually tilt in and out at the base of the arm. Providing a slightly wider range for the adjustable width.
Of course, there’s also adjust seat depth, and the unique back conforms to your spine as you move.
Herman Miller Embody Gaming Edition
Autonomous ErgoChair

Price: From $579.99
Where To Buy: Amazon
The ErgoChair isn’t really a gaming chair but we used it for both gaming and work for the better part of a year and half. Day in and day out for about 8-12 hours a day between work and gaming. It offers a lot of really nice ergonomic features for the price and is quite comfortable to sit in for longer periods of time.
You can adjust the seat depth, height, recline and tilt tension, arm width and height, and the arms can even swivel. You also have an adjustable headrest and lumbar support. Quite honestly, one of the best chairs you can buy for gaming in this price range.
Autonomous ErgoChair
Mavix M5

Price: $555.55
Where To Buy: Amazon
Rounding out this list is the Mavix M5. It offers a lot of what you’ll find on the M9 but switches some things up. For instance, it doesn’t offer the cooling memory foam seat cushion you get with the M9. Instead it uses a strong yet pliable and breathable mesh it also gets rid of the leather-like material on the back and replaces that with the same mesh. Though you will find that material on the adjustable lumbar support.
Of course you also get the adjustable head rest, and you can adjust the arm height and width. You can also adjust the height of the back just like the M9, and it comes with the same locking wheels. Another really great thing is that it has a super wide seat. Which is something we loved about the M9 model as well. Overall, if you like the M9 but don’t want to spend that much, this is an excellent option.
Mavix M5
The post Best Gaming Chairs – February 2023 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Nintendo says E3 2023 "doesn't fit into its plans"

Earlier this month, it was reported that Nintendo, alongside Sony and Microsoft, wouldn’t be attending E3 2023. As of this morning Nintendo has now confirmed that it will not have a presence at the show or have a booth on the show floor.
This may or may not come as a shock given that this is the first in-person E3 event since 2019. And in that three years, Nintendo has relied more heavily on its own Direct livestreams for just about all its announcements. According to Nintendo, it decides on whether or not to attend shows like E3 on a case-by-case basis. And E3 this year just “didn’t fit into its plans” so it decided not to participate.
Nintendo does make sure to point out though that it still supports the ESA and E3. With no involvement whatsoever from any of the big three gaming companies, this might signify E3 sort of fading into the background. What was once the go-to gaming convention, is now no longer a priority for gaming’s biggest names. Times do change of course. And perhaps it was just time for Nintendo to move on. Or maybe it really just didn’t factor in the possibility of an E3 this year. Either way, attendees won’t see the company at the show. But that doesn’t mean it won’t have anything show off.
Nintendo may skip E3 2023, but it could still have its own livestream
When you sit back and think about it, it’s sad to imagine an E3 without Nintendo. Or Xbox or PlayStation for that matter. But even if Nintendo isn’t showing up to the event, that doesn’t mean it won’t have things to show off. Nintendo could still very well hold its own livestream around the time of the show. It wouldn’t be officially part of the show, but timing any livestreams or announcements around it would keep things organized for viewers. And ensure that there are lots of eyes on whatever it has to reveal.
For now, Nintendo has not officially announced any plans for livestreams or events around summer shows like E3. But there will certainly be more from Nintendo in the near future and the months ahead. It’s just a matter of when.
The post Nintendo says E3 2023 „doesn’t fit into its plans” appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Spotify's replicating the radio experience with AI

Before the innovation of MP3 players and streamable media, there was the good old radio that satisfied your music-listening needs. Well, the most popular music streaming service on the web wants to bring the radio experience back. Spotify is bringing a new AI that will act as your own personal radio DJ, according to XDA Developers.
AI is becoming quite the center of attention nowadays. Right now, ChatGPT is the lede for a ton of headlines going around. Now, more companies are jumping on the AI train, so it’s no surprise that Spotify has hopped in. For better or worse, AI is becoming a big part of tech.
Spotify is bringing an AI DJ
Spotify does bring some neat features to make it stick out among the music streaming services. This one is definitely an interesting one. On the radio, you have your DJ who announces the next songs to come up and gives some commentary on it. This adds personality to the whole experience.
Sure, you can listen to music at your will using streaming services, but a lot of people become attached to the radio personality presenting the songs. This is what Spotify is going for.
The company released a trailer showing off the feature in action. You’ll be greeted by an AI-generated voice that will engage you personally. Since it’s generated by AI, the commentary is tailored to each person. The voice will communicate with you in real time and announce the songs coming up next in a randomly-generated playlist.
The voice won’t just announce the next song. It will simulate a human introducing and talking just a little bit about the song. “Up next, I know you’ve been on a summer song kick lately, so I went back for some of your old summertime favorites. See if it warms you up.” That’s an example of how the AI will speak. It will, as AI tends to do, try to sound like a real human being.
You can try this feature out if you’re a premium subscriber in the US and Canada. Make sure that your app is fully updated. Then, go to your Music Feed and tap on the DJ card.
The post Spotify’s replicating the radio experience with AI appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

These Sony earbuds appear to be randomly exploding

Most devices that use lithium-ion batteries run the risk of exploding, and we’re no strangers to these occurrences. Several people are reporting that the pricey Sony WF-1000XM4 TWS earbuds are exploding randomly.
Thankfully, it doesn’t seem to be widespread. More importantly, there aren’t any reports of injuries. As you can imagine, a device that’s meant to be in your ear exploding could really cause some issues.
The Sony WF-1000XM4 are exploding randomly
These reports come to us from Reddit (via Android Police). A Redditor (r/yangcong1982) posted a picture of their buds. The left one was alright, but the right one was broken at the seam. We see that it was completely broken in half with the internals exposed.
They also complained of battery issues with the right bud. The battery would die instantly when it dipped between 20% and 40% battery power. Then,  it got to the point when the earbud couldn’t even hit 50% before dying instantly.
They did state that they left the earbuds in the charging case for two solid days before the incident. However, they charged the case using an Anker charging bank. The earbuds remained at 80%, so they weren’t overcharged.
Going by the image alone, it’s hard to tell if the Redditor is telling the truth. We don’t see the usual signs of an explosion: broken chassis, warped plastic, burn marks, etc. However, there is another report that corroborates this story.
The issue might be in the software
The user was using firmware version 1.4.2 for their earbuds. This is significant because this version was notorious for battery issues. Several users on that version reported issues with the battery along with the headphones overheating. The company has since patched the issue, the Redditor was still on that version.
Thankfully, the earbuds didn’t explode while in use. We’re not sure if the user is going to pursue any sort of legal action for this.
The post These Sony earbuds appear to be randomly exploding appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Narrative tearjerker Before Your Eyes comes to PS VR2 March 10

During yesterday’s PlayStation State of Play livestream, Sony showed off a handful of new games coming to PS VR2 this year, including Before Your Eyes. Originally released for PC (you can pick it up on Steam right now for $9.99), Before Your Eyes is a narrative adventure that takes you back through your life through a series of blinks. In the game, you blink, and you jump forward in time to a later part of your life.
One super cool detail here is that you will actually be blinking when playing Before Your Eyes on PS VR2 and the headset will track it. So when you open your eyes again a split second later you’ll progress to a new scene. It’s a small detail but it should make the game feel a lot more immersive. Which, is bound to make it more enjoyable for players.
PS VR2 provides a new way to play Before Your Eyes
Since the game is already available on Steam, it’s obviously not the first time people have been able to play it. It is however the first time you’ll be able to play it without controller inputs. You will of course need the controllers to start the game. But once you begin playing, blinking is essentially your main control. And if you think about it, that’s kind of a neat way to lay out the game’s narrative.
Really, it feels like Before Your Eyes was made for VR. Even if it wasn’t intentionally designed for VR initially. The game’s launch is still a couple of weeks away. But it is available to pre-order right now. And if you’re PlayStation Plus subscriber, you can save some money. Bringing the standard price down from $14.99 to $13.49. You can also check out the game’s PS VR2 launch trailer below.
Before Your Eyes

The post Narrative tearjerker Before Your Eyes comes to PS VR2 March 10 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Live out your luchador life with Amazon Luna in March

Amazon Luna has some great games for March, including Guacamelee! 2 where you get to once again right wrongs as luchador Juan Aguacate. Uppercut, body slam, and bone-crunch your way to victory in this platformer sequel. Filled with colorful levels and even more colorful enemies and bosses.
Guacamelee! 2 is a metroidvania style platformer and initially released back in August of 2018, so it should be no surprise that it’s a game that’s ripe for availability on Luna. Where it can begin to gain some new life with players who may have missed it. As always, one thing to keep in mind is that Amazon hasn’t listed when in March this game will arrive. Just that it’s coming in March and it’ll be available on the Luna+ channel.
It’s also one of five games in total coming to Luna next month. So you should have plenty to keep you busy if you tend to go through games fast.
Guacamelee! 2 is joined by four more games coming to Luna in March
If platformers aren’t your thing or you simply want more to play, you’ve got four other options for March. This will include another really good game – Citizen Sleeper. We liked it so much we put it on our Best Xbox Game Pass games list, where it’ll stay unless Microsoft decides to pull the title from Game Pass. If you don’t subscribe to Game Pass of course, now’s your chance to try Citizen Sleeper without purchasing it.
This will also be available in the Luna+ channel. The three remaining titles are all available Prime Gaming channel and include Mega Man 11, Sail Forth, and finally Get Packed: Couch Chaos. All are pretty solid titles and are at least worth a look. Especially since you don’t have to pay for them, as they’re included with your Luna subscription.
The post Live out your luchador life with Amazon Luna in March appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Podcasts are finally coming to YouTube Music

YouTube Music is reportedly working on adding support for podcasts “in the near future.” YouTube’s head of podcasting, Kai Chuk, confirmed the news at Hot Pod Summit.
While there are dedicated podcast apps in the market, many users prefer to listen to their favorite podcasts on YouTube. The well-known podcasters also share the video version of their podcasts on the Google-owned video-sharing app and enjoy the monetization. However, you might soon be able to listen to podcasts on YouTube Music.
The music streaming platform currently hosts some of the world’s most famous artists, and its library is filled with over 60 million tracks. This library could soon be richer with podcasts. Google challenged Spotify’s dominance in the music industry by launching YouTube Music, and now it wants to target the podcast business.
According to Chuk, YouTube Music allows for free ad-supported background listening to podcasts with “enhanced library tools.”
YouTube Music brings podcasts to challenge Spotify
Spotify could establish itself in the podcast market by hosting popular podcasters like Joe Rogan. While Google says it has yet no plan to add exclusive shows or licensed originals to YouTube Music, it seems like a competitive advantage to sign publishing deals with famous podcasters.
“If someone wants to watch a podcast, we have a solution,” Chuk added. “If someone wants to listen to a podcast only, we should have a great experience for that as well.”
Chuk and Steve McLendon, Google’s product lead for podcasting, say their goal of adding podcast support to YouTube Music is to make great tools for show creators. Additionally, their success is defined by whether creators find it successful and helpful. “We’re just focused on the YouTube users and ecosystem and bringing podcasts into that fold,” Chuk said.
Spotify currently has over 200 million paid subscribers. YouTube Music could also surpass 80 million Music and Premium subscribers globally. While there’s a big gap between platforms in terms of user reach, YouTube Music can certainly challenge Spotify in the coming years by relying on YouTube’s 2.6 billion user base.
The post Podcasts are finally coming to YouTube Music appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Artifact, from Instagram co-founders, is available to everyone

We’re used to seeing former members of major companies spin off and start their own ventures. Instagram co-founders Kevin Systrom and Mike Krieger started a company called Artifact, and its app is now available to everyone.
Artifact is a news curation app with the simple goal of giving you news articles based on your interests. A large part of the company’s marketing is that it uses artificial intelligence to deliver your news. It aims to give you exactly the kind of articles that you need without the noise.
This sounds like an interesting idea, but the app wasn’t ready for mass downloading just yet. You needed to join a waitlist if you wanted to gain access to the app. This was unfortunate for people who were excited about the app.
Fortunately, Artifact is now available for everyone to download
People who are tired of waiting for this app to make it to everyone should rejoice. Kevin Systrom just posted a tweet letting us know that the wait is now over. It was accompanied by a sizzle reel showing a little of what the app is about.
As stated before, it’s an article curation app that gives you articles about only what you want to see. When you get the app, you can enter it and start reading articles. However, if you want to transfer your data to another device, you have the ability to create an account. It’s not the whole email address and password shebang. You only need to use your phone number.

Then, you’re able to pick 10 or more topics that you want to receive articles about. At the moment, there are 54 topics that you can choose from. These include tech, science, TV & Movie, celebrities, cars, fashion, and so on. You have to pick at least 10 when you’re setting up your profile, but you can adjust your selection later.
After you set up your profile, you’ll see a main feed of articles that are curated by your reading history. Also, if you only want to read articles about a specific topic, you can select one of the tabs up top.
This is a useful app if you want to keep up to date with the latest headlines. Click on the link below to download it for the Google Play Store.
Download Artifact
The post Artifact, from Instagram co-founders, is available to everyone appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

GeForce NOW goes atomic this week with new games

GeForce NOW is going atomic as it returns with another new crop of games for subscribers this week. And quite honestly, the list of titles being added today definitely includes at least a couple of really intriguing options. All of this also comes on the heels of a pretty big announcement from NVIDIA and Microsoft. On February 21, the two companies announced a contract agreement that will see Call of Duty and other Activision games brought to the GeForce NOW cloud gaming service.
Pending Microsoft getting the approval for the Activision acquisition of course. For those who have been around for GeForce NOW’s more humble beginnings, this is a pretty big announcement. Some Activision games were available to stream during the service’s closed beta. But were later pulled as Activision left the program. So if things play out as Microsoft and Activision hope, GeForce NOW subscribers could be playing CoD in the cloud by year’s end.
Not just CoD though, potentially Blizzard titles as well, including World of Warcraft, Diablo IV, Hearthstone and others.
Atomic Heart joins the GeForce NOW library alongside five other games
Atomic Heart is a brand-new game that just released and it’s bound to look stunning on high-end PCs. Luckily, you won’t need a high-end PC to take advantage of the game’s best graphics features. Because it’s available on GeForce NOW starting today. And if you subscribe to the Ultimate membership, then you can play the game with graphics powered by the RTX 4080 SuperPOD. Which activates features like DLSS 3 and more.
Atomic Heart is also one of six new games joining GeForce NOW this week. The other five games include Blood Bowl 3, Chef Life: A Restaurant Simulator, Sons of the Forest, Ember Knights, and Cartel Tycoon.
Xbox PC games are coming
The Microsoft partnership has the potential to really blow up the GeForce NOW game collection with new games from Activision Blizzard. But part of the agreement includes bringing Xbox PC games to the service as well. NVIDIA says it’s now working with Microsoft to integrate Xbox PC games. This will kick off with PC games from Xbox Game Studios that you can find on Steam and the Epic Games Store.
Neither company mentions any titles by name. But with a little research you can probably make some good assumptions. Gears 5, Halo Master Chief Collection, Halo Infinite, Microsoft Flight Simulator X, Pyschonauts 2, Hellblade: Senua’s Sacrifice, Battletoads, Sea of Thieves and more are all games that come from XGS that could be viable candidates. So look out for them.
The post GeForce NOW goes atomic this week with new games appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

First software update for the Galaxy S23 series is rolling out widely

A couple of days back, Samsung released the first software update for the Galaxy S23 series. The rollout began in Europe. But the company has wasted no time to bring it to other regions. The update is now available for Galaxy S23 users in Asia and Africa as well, including in Samsung‘s homeland South Korea. We expect the company to release the update in the US over the next few days.
Galaxy S23 units sold in Europe, Asia, and Africa bear the same model number (SM-S911B for the base model, SM-S916B for the Plus, and SM-S918B for the Ultra). So the updated firmware version for the phones in these regions is the same — S91*BXXU1AWBD. But the South Korean versions ship with the model number SM-S91*N. The latest update comes with firmware version S91*NKSU1AWBD in the country.
The story is similar for Galaxy S23 phones in Taiwan, Hong Kong, and China as well. The new Samsung flagships bear the model number SM-S91*0 in these markets. Users are getting the new update with the firmware build number S91*0ZHU1AWBD. But regardless of the firmware version, the latest update for the Galaxy S23, Galaxy S23+, and Galaxy S23 Ultra has the same changelog everywhere.
The February update for the Galaxy S23 reaches more markets
Samsung’s changelog for the first firmware release for the Galaxy S23 series doesn’t go into detail. It only states that the package contains some optimizations and the February 2023 Android security patch. The latest SMR (Security Maintenance Release) patches more than 50 vulnerabilities.
Samsung’s security bulletin says seven of those are Galaxy-specific. Those vulnerabilities don’t exist in Android devices from other brands. They patch flaws in Fingerprint TA, Secure Folder, and other systems apps and services.
The remaining 40-odd vulnerabilities patched by this month’s security update are part of Google’s latest ASB (Android Security Bulletin). They patch flaws in Android OS and other partner components. The Android maker labeled five of those as critical vulnerabilities that could potentially allow remote code execution if a threat actor exploited them in the wild. It could pave the way for them to remotely control your phone.
If you are one of the early buyers of Samsung’s latest flagships, you might want to install this update as soon as possible to stay safe from these vulnerabilities. You can go to the Software update menu in the Settings app and tap on Download and install to check for updates manually or wait for a notification prompting you to download the update. For users in the US, we will let you know when Samsung releases the update stateside.
The post First software update for the Galaxy S23 series is rolling out widely appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

No Man's Sky prepares for PS VR2 release with major Fractal update

No Man’s Sky developer Hello Games has released the game’s Fractal update today and it includes a ton of little improvements and some other big changes. As well as a few feature additions that should delight players. One of the bigger parts of the No Man’s Sky Fractal update lies in its preparation for the game’s PS VR2 release.
No Man’s Sky has been hyper jumping into virtual reality for a few years now. But today’s update really amps things up and makes you feel like a space explorer in new ways. Something which is only going to get better for those who play the game on PS5 using their PS VR2 headset.
For starters, Hello Games says that you can now “Play the entirety of No Man’s Sky in Virtual Reality without compromise, with new levels of immersion.” Basically, you’ll feel even more like you’re the pilot sitting in the cockpit of your starship as you rocket into space and fly across the universe. Here’s where it gets good for PS VR2 owners.
No Man’s Sky Fractal update adds some PS VR2-specific features

The PS VR2 incorporates some really neat next-gen tech, like the haptic feedback and adaptive triggers found in the DualSense. Sony implemented these features into the PS VR2 Sense controllers, and No Man’s Sky will take advantage of them. But there’s also more to look forward to. The game’s other PS VR2-specific features include vibrations in the headset, as well as the PS5’s 3D audio for enhanced sound.
The game also now makes use of the PS5’s more powerful components. So players can expect things like “reflections, terrain tessellation, increased draw distance, more dense foliage, and ultra quality textures and refraction,” Hello says in its blog post. The game also now has new accessibility features, and players can earn a new starship called the Utopia Speeder.
Hello even added in gyro control support for players on the Steam Deck, PS4 and PS5, and Nintendo Switch. If you’re eager to check out the new update, it’s live now. You can also check out the new trailer below.

The post No Man’s Sky prepares for PS VR2 release with major Fractal update appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

How to watch MLB without Cable in 2023

Baseball is back. America’s pastime is starting this month with Spring Training, and then Opening Day in late March. So how can you watch all of the action? Well that is what we are here to tell you.
Will the Houston Astros make it back to the World Series in October? Well, we have over 162 games to find out. The baseball season is quite long, lasting from April (technically, March 30) through September. With the playoffs lasting through October and the World Series at the very end of the month. Last year, we saw the Houston Astros take on the Philadelphia Phillies and win 4-2 in a six-game series. Can they repeat?
When is opening day?
Opening Day is set to take place on March 30, 2023. This year, all 30 MLB teams will be playing on Opening Day. That’s the first time since 1968 that every team has played on Opening Day, which is quite shocking. Here’s the full schedule for Opening Day.
Atlanta Braves at Washington Nationals – 1:05 p.m. ET
San Francisco Giants at New York Yankees – 1:05 p.m
Baltimore Orioles at Boston Red Sox – 2:10 p.m.
Milwaukee Brewers at Chicago Cubs – 2:20 p.m.
Detroit Tigers at Tampa Bay Rays – 3:10 p.m.

Philadelphia Phillies at Texas Rangers – 4:05 p.m.
Pittsburgh Pirates at Cincinnati Reds – 4:10 p.m.
Colorado Rockies at San Diego Padres – 4:10 p.m.
Toronto Blue Jays at St. Louis Cardinals – 4:10 p.m.

Minnesota Twins at Kansas City Royals – 4:10 p.m.
New York Mets at Miami Marlins – 4:10 p.m.
Chicago White Sox at Houston Astros – 7:08 p.m.
Los Angeles Angels at Oakland Athletics – 10:07 p.m.
Arizona Diamondbacks at Los Angeles Dodgers – 10:10 p.m.
Cleveland Guardians at Seattle Mariners – 10:10 p.m.
What channels show MLB games?
The majority of the games are going to be on regional sports networks or RSNs. So depending on where you live, you might be able to get that from YouTube TV, FuboTV or DIRECTV Stream. Bally Sports RSNs for example are only on FuboTV and DIRECTV Stream.
What about the national games? Well, those are typically on Fox, FS1, TBS, ESPN, MLB Network or Apple TV Plus. Fox, FS1, TBS and ESPN are available on most streaming TV platforms. MLB Network is available on many, but not all – for example, YouTube TV just removed it for the 2023 season.
Now when it comes to Apple TV Plus, subscribers can watch Friday Night Baseball each Friday throughout the season. Apple TV Plus has two games each Friday. Some are on at the same time, while others will be doubleheaders.

How to watch the MLB without cable
Now lets talk about how you can watch the MLB without cable. The best option will be MLB.TV, if you want to watch multiple teams. But if you want to watch your home team (and you live in that market), then your local RSN is going to be the best option.
MLB.TV is great because it allows you to watch every single game throughout the league. But there is one catch. Local games are not available on MLB.TV. That means that if you live in the Seattle market, you can’t watch Mariners games on MLB.TV. So it’s not quite a replacement for having the RSN available that plays the Mariners games. But if you’ve moved, and want to watch the Red Sox in Seattle, then it’s a good option.
MLB.TV is not going to be cheap though. The full season will be $149, or 119 if you want a single team. You can also pay monthly for $25/month, but that comes out to being a lot more expensive. MLB.TV does also include minor league and spring training games.
YouTube TV
YouTube TV is my personal favorite for watching sports, even though they don’t have Bally Sports RSNs. YouTube TV does have FOX, FS1, TBS and ESPN however. And as noted before, they have dropped the MLB Network, effective for 2023. So you get the majority of the nationally televised games on YouTube TV.
As far as RSNs go, YouTube TV does have the NBC Sports RSNs, but not Bally Sports. NBC Sports is available in a few markets. One of the best parts of having YouTube TV is that you can record every single game. Since it gives you unlimited cloud DVR.
FuboTV is a service that is built for sports. It has a lot of great sports networks available, but for Baseball, it carries all of the networks. And it has also just added Bally Sports RSNs once again. Though some of those RSNs won’t be available until the baseball season starts in April, so you might miss out on spring training.
FuboTV does start at $74.99, so it is more expensive than YouTube TV. But that does get you over 147 channels, along with 1,000 hours of cloud DVR included. It does offer a free trial which you can check out here.
DIRECTV Stream also has all of the channels for nationally televised games. And it starts at $74.99 per month as well. However, if you want to get the RSNs that will cost you a bit more. You would need their $99/month plan that includes the RSNs, and that does include Bally Sports.
DIRECTV Stream’s Choice package includes 105 channels, allows you to stream on unlimited devices in your home and gives you unlimited cloud DVR storage like YouTube TV does. You can sign up for DIRECTV Stream here.
Sling TV
Sling TV is the cheapest option here. It starts at just $40 per month. And with the Sling Orange package, you’ll get access to ESPN and TBS. With Sling Blue you’ll get FOX (in select areas) and FS1. Or you can get both packages for $45 per month.
MLB Network is available as a add-on. In the Sports Extra add-on, you’ll get the SEC Network, ACC Network, Longhorn Network, Pac-12 Network, ESPN-U, ESPNEWS, MLB Network, NBA TV, beinSports, Tennis Channel, NHL Network and the MLB Strike Zone for $11 per month. So to get all of those networks, you’ll need to pay $56 per month. And Sling TV does not have any RSNs.
Hulu + Live TV
Hulu + Live TV is another good option here. It does include ESPN, FOX, FS1 and TBS for the national games. But it does not have the MLB Network. It also has some RSNs, but not Bally Sports. So keep that in mind.
Hulu does start at $69.99, which does include ESPN+, as well as 85 of the top cable channels, unlimited screens, the Hulu library and unlimited DVR. You can sign up here. 
The post How to watch MLB without Cable in 2023 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

How to complete the Path of the Ronin in Modern Warfare II – Updated Feb. 22, 2023

Call of Duty: Modern Warfare II season 2 is officially live and there’s loads of new content to dive into, including the all-new event called Path of the Ronin. In this event, players will need to complete a series of different challenges. Each challenge is based on one of the seven different virtues of Bushido – integrity, honor, sincerity, compassion, courage, loyalty, and respect.
Players must walk the path of the ronin to claim the rewards at the end of each challenge. Be forewarned, though. The path of the ronin is an arduous one. A path fraught with danger and painted with the blood of your enemies. Or perhaps your own blood. Luckily for you, we can help guide you in the right direction. We can’t complete the challenges for you. We can however assist you by giving you the rundown on what is being asked of you. If you want to claim the event’s unique rewards, that is. First, let’s go over what those rewards are. So you can decide if walking the path of the ronin is for you.
The event is live across all platforms where Modern Warfare II is available which includes PS5, PS4, Xbox Series X|S, Xbox One, and PC.
Modern Warfare II – Path of the Ronin rewards: what are they?
As mentioned above, each challenge in the Path of the Ronin event is tied to a unique reward. There are seven challenges in all, and one reward for completion of each of those seven. Here’s what you can look forward to:
Integrity challenge – Complete this challenge to unlock a new skin for Roze
Honor challenge – Complete this challenge to unlock a new emblem
Sincerity challenge – Complete this challenge to unlock a new calling card
Compassion challenge – Complete this challenge to unlock a new weapon sticker
Courage challenge – Complete this challenge to unlock a new loading screen
Loyalty challenge – Complete this challenge to unlock a new weapon charm
Respect challenge – Complete this challenge to unlock a new SMG
Mastery – Complete all Path of the Ronin challenges to unlock the crossbow
Modern Warfare II – Path of the Ronin challenges: what are the tasks?
You will need to complete a specific task for each challenge. That being said, you can complete these challenges in either Modern Warfare II’s Quick Play or in Warzone 2.0. Naturally, the set of tasks for completing each challenge is different depending on where you complete them. So we’ll break them down for both game modes.
Walk the Path of the Ronin in Quick Play
For those who aren’t fond of the battle royale gameplay as much, Infinity Ward is giving you a way to complete the challenges in Quick Play. These can essentially be done in any match type. So play whichever one suits you best. But keep in mind that certain match types may mesh better with a particular challenge.
With that said, you’ll find each challenge and the required task for completion below.
Integrity challenge

Win 15 matches in any multiplayer game mode.
Pretty simple. Play any multiplayer mode and just play to win. The quicker you get to 15 wins, the quicker you complete this challenge.
Honor challenge

Get 100 objective defense kills
This one will be a little less lenient. You’ll need to specifically play match types that have you defending a point. Which means match types like Domination, Hardpoint, Control, or Headquarters. You’ll need 100 kills while defending the point. Which could make things a little tougher for some. But, stick it out. You’ll be finished in no time.
Sincerity challenge

Get 50 operator kills using Battle Rage
This is another pretty simple one to do. As all it requires is for you to use the Battle Rage field upgrade, then get 50 kills while under its effects. This can be done on any mode. Again though, it may be easier for you to charge up the Battle Rage field upgrade in certain modes compared to others. This all depends on your play style.
Compassion challenge

Get 100 operator assists
Another lengthy task. For the Compassion challenge, you’ll need to get operator assist kills 100 times. Luckily, this one can be done in any quickplay match type.
Courage challenge

Get 3 operator kills without dying 25 times
This one shouldn’t be too hard to do, though it may take some players longer than others. You just need to get a 3-kill streak 25 times.
Loyalty challenge

Coming soon
This challenge has also yet to go live. It will activate in 13 days.
Respect challenge

Coming soon
This is the last challenge of the event and like its predecessor, it activates in 13 days.
Walk the Path of the Ronin in Warzone 2.0
If you prefer the chaos of a more large-scale heated battle, not to worry. You won’t be forced to play the Quick Play match types. You can complete the event challenges in Warzone 2.0. That being said, you will have to complete some of the challenge tasks in the new Resurgence match type for Warzone 2.0. So keep that in mind. We have each challenge and its accompanying task listed below.
Integrity challenge

Finish in the top 10 5 times
A lofty goal for anyone who isn’t used to Warzone 2.0 and the challenges the mode itself can pose to a player. But with enough practice you should be fine here. To make getting into the top 10 easier, you can drop in with a friend who’s no stranger to hitting the top of the leaderboard.
Honor challenge

Restore honor 5 times in Resurgence matches
This might be a tricky one, but again, shouldn’t be too tough for seasoned players or those who practice a bit. To restore your honor, you’ll need to pick up your dog tags after falling in battle. This opportunity will happen once per match, and dog tags can be found at the location of your death. Restore your honor by re-claiming your dog tags.
Sincerity challenge

Complete 5 bounty contracts
Simple enough to do if you’re used to doing these already. Launch a Warzone 2.0 match, find the bounty contracts on the map, complete whatever they require. Doing these with a squad makes this easier.
Compassion challenge

Revive 20 teammates in Warzone matches
Reviving is the name of the game here with this challenge. Play Warzone matches like Resurgence or regular Warzone, then revive your teammates 20 different times.
Courage challenge

Complete 3 search and seizure contracts
To finish up the Courage challenge, load up a Warzone match then immediately hunt down the search and seizure contracts. Complete 3 of these and you’re home free for this task.
Loyalty challenge

Coming soon
The second to the last challenge for Path of the Ronin completion. Right now the challenge isn’t active, and will go live in 13 days.
Respect challenge

Coming soon
The last challenge. Respect your enemies, and earn their respect in return. This challenge will go live in 13 days.
Future event challenges
The current challenges for the Path of the Ronin event in Modern Warfare II will expire in 27 days. So if your time for playing is limited, we’d suggest getting these done as quickly as you can. After 27 days, a new set of event camo challenges will be available. That gives you just under a month to complete all seven of these challenges before the refresh.
Check back next week, and the week after for the remaining four Path of the Ronin challenges and their tasks.
The post How to complete the Path of the Ronin in Modern Warfare II – Updated Feb. 22, 2023 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

The author of your next favorite book could be ChatGPT

Planning on buying a new e-book from the Amazon Kindle store? Well, you might want to know that your next favorite book might be written by an AI. According to a new report from Reuters, more than 200 books on the Amazon Kindle store are authored or co-authored by ChatGPT.
Artificial intelligence does a lot of stuff, and ChatGPT is a grand showcase of that fact. It’s an extremely powerful AI chatbot that crosses a lot of technological (and ethical) borders. It definitely skirts the line between what AI can do and what it should do.
In any case, ChatGPT has the ability to create developed stories. For an example, we crafted a short story about a young boy who gets what he deserves using the chatbot. It summed up a short story in a couple of paragraphs. However, if you so wanted ChatGPT to write a full novel, you can.
More than 200 books on the Amazon Kindle store use ChatGPT
If you give people an inch, they take a mile. In this case, if you give people a powerful AI chatbot, they’ll write books. The Amazon Kindle store is a great spot for authors to self-publish. It’s been the source of income for many talented authors, but there’s an issue that’s currently rising.
There has been an explosion of books being posted to the platform that have either been co-authored or fully written by ChatGPT. That will make any author’s blood boil. But it’s true. As you can imagine, typing in a prompt and letting ChatGPT do its thing can get you a book. Sure, it takes time, but it’s much faster than typing out a full book (you know, like a real author).
This is a big issue
What makes this a major issue is that these so-called authors are not disclosing that they’re using AI. This means that anyone could realistically spit out a book and claim to be the brainchild behind it. That’s a massive smack to the face of all of the authors who spend months writing their books.
Not only that, but the platform runs the risk of being flooded with poorly-written books. Not only will people generate books using AI, which can’t add any sort of feeling or emotion to the books, but the thought of easy money will prompt many more people to generate books. This will cause a ton of books to flood the platform en masse.
There are already TikToks and YouTube videos on how to make full books in a matter of hours. That’s only adding fuel to the fire. Some of these books include self-help books and get-rich-quick schemes along with narratives.
As you can imagine, a lot of pressure is going to fall upon Amazon to do something about it. To the company’s credit, this issue is still pretty new, so it’s understandable that there isn’t a protocol just yet. Let’s hope that the company will be able to do something about it.
The post The author of your next favorite book could be ChatGPT appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Razer's refreshed Blade 15 laptop offers next-gen gaming power

Razer has refreshed its Blade 15 gaming laptop today, launching the new model with 40-series GPUs and improved hardware. The Blade 15 is Razer’s middle of the road gaming laptop in terms of performance and screen size, and this latest iteration is likely to be the best it’s ever been.
Following in the footsteps of the Blade 16 and Blade 18 launched earlier this year, the Blade 15 finally comes with the NVIDIA 40-series GPUs for next-gen power and performance. It also now comes with Intel’s latest CPUs and a few other upgrades like an extra M.2 slot for more storage, and better, faster RAM.
Basically, the Blade 15 is what you want to go with if you want something more powerful and nearly as portable as the Blade 14, but find the Blade 16 and Blade 18 a little unwieldly.
The Razer Blade 15 now comes with 40-series GPUs, up to an RTX 4070
While we haven’t tested it ourselves, the Blade 15 with the latest NVIDIA GPUs is sure to pump out performance for your favorite games. It comes with up to an RTX 4070. Which by no means is going to be lackluster when it comes to allowing for tuned up graphics and higher frame rates. But since it only goes up to an RTX 4070, you’ll need to scale up to the larger Blade 16 or Blade 18 if you want the RTX 4080 or RTX 4090. Both of which, by the way, also now come in RTX 4060 and RTX 4070 versions.
For the CPU, the Blade 15 comes with the Intel Core i7-13800H. The rest of the key specs include 16GB of DDR5 5200MHz RAM and 1TB of storage. Which are upgradable to allow for up to 64GB and 4TB respectively. Both the 4060 and 4070 versions also come with a QHD 240Hz refresh rate display, which is sure to be a little more power hungry.
Razer says the laptop can deliver up to six hours of battery life. And that’s probably fairly accurate, so long as you aren’t gaming or cranking up the brightness on the display or RGB backlit keyboard. Then again, gaming laptops aren’t really meant for extended battery life. They’re meant to deliver a powerful, portable gaming experience. And that’s what you should be getting with the new Blade 15.
You can buy the new Blade 15 today directly from Razer, at $2,499.99 for the RTX 4060 model or $2,799.99 for the RTX 4070 model. It’ll also be available from select retailers.
Razer Blade 15
The post Razer’s refreshed Blade 15 laptop offers next-gen gaming power appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

How OSI will renew its board of directors in 2023

In the next few weeks, the OSI board of directors will renew three of its seats with an open election process among its full individual members and affiliates. There will be two elections in March, running in parallel:

The affiliate organizations will elect one directorIndividual members will elect two directors

2023 elections timeline

The role of the board of directors

The board of directors is the ultimate authority responsible for the Open Source Initiative as a California public benefit corporation, with 501(c)3 tax-exempt status. The board’s responsibilities include oversight of the organization, approving the budget and supporting the executive director and staff to fulfill its mission. The OSI isn’t a volunteer-run organization anymore and the role of the directors has changed accordingly.

Each director is expected to be a counsel and a guide for staff rather than an active contributor. Directors should guide discussions, support the vision and mission of the organization, and advocate for the OSI. They’re also asked to support the fundraising efforts however they feel comfortable doing.

The board is governed by the bylaws. Each board member is expected to sign the board member agreement. Depending on expertise and availability, directors are expected to serve on the active committees: the license, fundraising, standards and financial committees.

Candidates will be asked to share their ideas on how they’ll contribute to the vision and mission, and the 2023 strategic objectives.

The rules for how OSI runs the elections are published on our website. We’ll communicate more details in the coming weeks: stay tuned for announcements on our social media channels (Fediverse, LinkedIn, Twitter.)

Are you a full individual member of OSI as of February 19th? Go ahead and candidate yourself.

Affiliate organizations will receive instructions via email.

Source: opensource.org

Razer partners with esports legend Faker for DeathAdder V3 Pro

Razer is launching two new versions of the DeathAdder gaming mouse today, including a special limited edition Faker model of the DeathAdder V3 Pro. Lee Sang-Hyeok, better known as Faker in the esports community, is known for his professional League Of Legends career as part of T1. He’s also apparently a big fan of the DeathAdder in its most recent form. Stating that it’s “the best performing DeathAdder I’ve ever used.”
This new Faker Edition has the same great features as the standard edition. But comes with its own unique design. Razer worked with Faker to create the new look. Resulting in a mouse that’s draped in a bright red with Faker’s signature on the right mouse click and his Demon King logo on the palm rest.
As this is a limited-edition mouse design, it does have a higher price. Though not by much. You can pick up the DeathAdder V3 Pro Faker Edition for $169.99 starting today. Which is about $20 more than the Black model.
Alongside the Faker Edition, Razer also now offers a wired DeathAdder V3

The DeathAdder V3 Pro has been a fan-favorite mouse since it launched Razer says. But it’s also a wireless mouse. And not everyone is into that. Now, Razer is offering a proper wired model with the DeathAdder V3. While it won’t have thw wireless capabilities, it does still carry the Razer Focus Pro 30K optical sensor and numerous other features.
Including the gen 3 Razer Optical Mouse Switches. And because it’s wired it has a higher polling rate of up to 8000Hz. Razer shaved just a tiny bit off the weight as well. Bringing the mouse down from 63g to 59g. Those numbers are without the cable though, Razer mentions. Both mice are available from Razer’s website, and should eventually be available from authorized resellers. Such as Best Buy and Amazon. Right now though, it looks like Razer is the only place to get these.
Razer DeathAdder V3 Pro – Faker Edition
Razer DeathAdder V3
The post Razer partners with esports legend Faker for DeathAdder V3 Pro appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

One UI 5.1 released for Galaxy Z Fold 2 and Galaxy A73 5G

Samsung‘s One UI 5.1 update has reached the Galaxy Z Fold 2 and Galaxy A73 5G. The former is getting the update in Europe, while the rollout for the latter has begun in Asia. The company should push the new One UI version to the two phones globally over the next few days.
As of this writing, the Galaxy Z Fold 2 is getting the One UI 5.1 update in Germany. The new firmware build number for the second-gen Samsung foldable in Europe is F916BXXU2JWB5. The update should soon reach other European countries and also cross boundaries to global markets, including the US. The firmware version may vary slightly depending on your carrier and market, but the content will mostly remain unchanged.
The same goes for the Galaxy A73 5G as well. While this phone wasn’t released in the US, Samsung sold it in most other markets. The company has begun seeding One UI 5.1 to the premium mid-ranger in Malaysia. It is picking up the update with firmware version A736BXXU3CWB7 (via). Galaxy A73 5G users in Europe, Africa, Latin America, and other regions can also expect to receive the new One UI version soon.
Samsung’s Galaxy Z Fold 2 and Galaxy A73 5G get One UI 5.1
The Galaxy Z Fold 2 and Galaxy A73 5G are getting the February 2023 Android security patch with this update. The latest SMR (Security Maintenance Release) contains more than 50 vulnerability patches, including a handful of critical ones. But the update is primarily about One UI 5.1 rather than the latest security release. The new version of Samsung’s custom Android software brings a host of new features and improvements.
The Korean smartphone giant has improved its stock camera app with new presets for selfie effects. It has also added a Shared Family Album to the Gallery app so families can easily share photos and videos of their vacations. New gestures and DeX improvements make multitasking more efficient, while Samsung Notes now lets you remotely collaborate while you’re on a Google Meet call. Bixby text Call can also now transcribe your audio calls in English. Improved widgets, smart settings suggestions, and activity-based wallpapers are some other highlights of One UI 5.1.
If you’re using either of these Samsung smartphones, most of these new features will be available to you shortly. One UI 5.1 has also been rolled out to the Galaxy S22, Galaxy S21, Galaxy S20, Galaxy Note 20, and all of the recent Galaxy foldables, as well as the Galaxy A53 5G and Galaxy A33 5G. If you haven’t already updated, go to Settings > Software update and tap on Download and install to check for updates manually.
The post One UI 5.1 released for Galaxy Z Fold 2 and Galaxy A73 5G appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

This might be the first ever AI-generated phishing scam

AI does a lot of stuff nowadays, and every day, it seems that there’s a new thing that it can do. Well, did you anticipate that it’d be able to scam you? That’s right! A new LinkedIn phishing scam might be the first-ever AI-generated phishing scam.
Obviously, there isn’t some rogue AI out there trying to scam users into giving up their information. The brain behind the scam is very much flesh and blood. Rather, it looks like the materials that make up the scam have been generated using AI.
This could be the first-ever AI-generated phishing scam
According to TechRadar, researchers at SafeGuard Security uncovered this phishing scam recently. It was an ad on the platform that shills a whitepaper for businesses to help them close more deals. The only thing is that the image used to promote it shows the telltale sign of an AI-generated image.
On the bottom right of DALL-E images, there is a succession of colored squares. They’re seen on the bottom of every image generated by the platform. Below, there’s an example.

Along with that, there are other red flags that set off the alarms. For starters, the LinkedIn profile was another major tell. The profile was pretty barebones. That should be the first clue that things aren’t on the up and up. Also, it has probably the most generic name for an account, Sales Intelligence.
The profile is empty, and the website link led to a jewelry store on Amazon. That’s an odd website for a profile offering a whitepaper.
When you follow the link in the ad, you’d then put in your personal information (again, another red flag) in exchange for access to the whitepaper. Suffice it to say, there is no whitepaper. Instead, the information that the user gave up will be used for the phishing scam.
If you see an ad for a whitepaper, see an ad with an AI-generated image, or see an account that’s empty, you’ll want to pass it up.
The post This might be the first ever AI-generated phishing scam appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

ROG Phone 6/6 Pro users rejoice, Android 13 is here

Android 13 has made its way to the ROG Phone 6 and ROG Phone 6 Pro. Bringing the latest version of the software to the most recent gaming phone in ASUS’s lineup. A beta version of the software has been available since last year, but there was really no word on when it would be officially pushed out to users as a stable build. It seems that time is now.
In a recent ZenTalk community post, ASUS says the update was to be released on February 21, with the post being about 10 hours old. That means the company started rolling out the update to devices around Midnight. We noticed the update being available for download on our device a little earlier this morning. So it should be coming to many or most users throughout the day.
ASUS does note however that it could take “some days” before every device has been updated. If you don’t have it on your own device yet, keep an eye out for the alert. Or manually check from the settings menu periodically throughout the week.
Android 13 ushers in some QOL changes for ROG Phone 6 owners
In your day to day, you probably won’t notice a TON of changes between Android 13 and Android 12. The two versions of software are pretty similar. Although, there are definitely some nice quality of life changes the phone now has. For example, there is now an easily accessible button for managing your active apps. This can be found in the quick settings menu by dragging down the notification shade.
It tells you how many active apps you have running in the background and tapping on it shows which apps those are. You can then “stop” those apps from the same pop-up. It’s minor, but definitely an added convenience. And in the official changelog ASUS notes that users now have access to the new ROG UI design. You can read the full changelog here.
The post ROG Phone 6/6 Pro users rejoice, Android 13 is here appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

iPhone 15 finally catching up to Android with 8GB of RAM

It’s February, which means more iPhone 15 rumors and leaks. Even though the iPhone 15 isn’t launching until September, that’s never stopped the rumor mill before. And this time around, we’re hearing through a new report that the Pro models of the iPhone 15 will get 8GB of RAM. Something that Android flagships have had for… years.
The regular iPhone 15 models would stay at 6GB of RAM, according to this report. But that’s not all the news about RAM here. As the report does also note that they could get upgraded to LPDDR5 RAM. Which is currently available on the iPhone 14 Pro models.
Along with the new A17 Bionic chipset, this could really boost performance on the iPhone 15 models later this year.
Why does the iPhone have so little RAM?
Have you ever heard the saying, unused RAM is wasted RAM? Yeah? Well it’s completely true. If you have 16GB of RAM, but you’re only using 8GB of RAM, then its wasted RAM. And that’s part of why the iPhone has had so little RAM for so many years. Heck, it just upgraded from 4GB a couple years ago.
The other reason is that iOS is so well optimized that, you really don’t need 8GB of RAM. Remember that with Android, Google really is only in control of AOSP. Whatever these OEMs put on top of it, is going to be extra. Use extra resources, and that also means extra RAM. So it’s nowhere near as optimized as iOS is. Which means that iOS can get away with less RAM (and smaller batteries), versus an Android phone.
It’s good news for those that are looking to pick up the iPhone 15 later this year. As more RAM is going to lead to better multi-tasking and an all-around great time using your new phone. So that’s always good.
The post iPhone 15 finally catching up to Android with 8GB of RAM appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

How to use ChatGPT

OpenAI shook the world with its unveiling of ChatGPT. This is an extremely powerful AI chatbot that’s been wowing people with how intelligent it is. It’s so powerful that it made Google declare a code red and develop its own chatbot called Bard. If you’re looking to use ChatGPT and see what the buzz is all about, here’s a handy guide on how to use it.
First off, what is ChatGPT?
It wouldn’t make sense to know how to use something if you don’t know what it is. So, as stated before, ChatGPT is an AI chatbot. The best way to describe is that it’s like a digital human being that you either ask questions to or talk with. You can ask it for answers to questions like “how do I declaw a cat?” or “How many moons does Jupiter have?”. The chatbot will actually give you concise answers to those questions.
ChatGPT’s utility doesn’t stop there, as you’re able to type a myriad of commands into it and get results. Here are a few examples of what you can type into the prompt:
How to do stuff: How do I swaddle a baby?
Advice: Give me advice on how to get my child to study.
Recipes: Give me a recipe for a healthy burger.
General knowledge questions: What are the mitochondria?
Writing code: Write me code for an app that tells time.
Writing articles: Write me a 2000-word article about the Galaxy S23’s camera.
Writing stories/poems: Write me a story about a mean kid who gets his just deserts.
Just to chat: My dog just died, and I need someone to talk to.
Looking at some of those examples, it’s no wonder why Google has taken notice. We covered everything you need to know about ChatGPT, so you can check out that article if you have more questions about what it can do.
How to use ChatGPT
So, the first thing that you need to know about ChatGPT is that you’ll need to create an account. You can either create an account through OpenAI or sign in through Google or Microsoft. After you create your account, you’ll be taken right into the action.
The landing page is pretty simple, but it gives you what you need to get started. The first thing you might notice is the grid of cards in the middle of the screen. They give you a rough idea of what ChatGPT can do. They will give you suggestions of what to input, some of what ChatGPT can do, and what it can’t.
You’ll see a dark gray panel on the left side of the screen. This will house your previous conversations. Below them, you’ll see the option to clear your conversations, upgrade to Plus, toggle Dark mode, and give feedback to the company. There’s also a button that will send you to the Updates and FAQs page and the log-out button.
Using ChatGPT
Last, but certainly not least, we have the text field on the bottom center of the screen; the face of ChatGPT. Here, you can type in the command that you want to input. All you have to do is type in your text and press the enter button. Also, you can click on the arrow button on the right side of the text field to send it.
When you send your request, you’ll see your profile picture appear at the top of the screen with a gray bar extending across. This is where ChatGPT will display its answer. You’ll see a little blinking cursor at first. Now, it will take ChatGPT a few seconds to start answering your question. When it starts, you’ll see the text gradually populating the screen.
Right under the answer given, you’ll see a thumbs-up and a thumbs-down button. These are important, as they gives feedback on how you like the answer. Giving feedback on the answer will help OpenAI improve ChatGPT.
Also, if you don’t like the answer, you can regenerate it. Right above the text box, there’s a Regenerate response button. When you do it, the chatbot will give you a different answer based on the prompt.
Now, since ChatGPT is a chatbot, you’re able to talk back and forth with it as though it was a person. This means that you can follow up on the answer and give suggestions as to what you want to change. The bot will then make the appropriate change and update it. You can actually type as though you’re talking to a human being.

New chats/erasing old chats
If you’re having a conversation with a person, you’ll want to signal when you’re changing to a different topic to avoid confusion. Well, the same thing applies to ChatGPT. If you want to start a conversation about something, you’ll want to make a new conversation.
To do that, look at the panel on the left. Above your conversations, you’ll see the New Chat button. Click it and you will see a blank canvas to start a new conversation. If you want to go back to the previous conversations you had, don’t worry, the program will automatically save your previous chat. You’ll be able to return to it and pick up right where you left off.
If you’re done with a conversation, and you want to get rid of it, you can quickly do so. Go to the left panel and move your mouse over the conversation you want to give the boot. Click on the little trash can icon on the right side of the button. When you click on it, you’ll see a little checkmark and “X” icon appear. If you’re sure that you want to delete that conversation, click on the checkmark.
What is ChatGPT Plus?
Now, ChatGPT has a paid tier, but you don’t have to pay to use the chatbot. The Plus subscription offers more features to people who are avid users. With the payment plan, you’ll have priority access to new features when they drop.
When there are a ton of people using ChatGPT at the same time, free users may lose access to it until the traffic dies down. If you have a Plus account, you’ll have access to it whenever, even when demand is high.
Lastly, you’ll have access to faster processing speeds. This means that you’ll get your answers faster. If you want to have these features, then it will cost you $20/month.
The post How to use ChatGPT appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Razer launches EVISU line of gaming accessories

Razer today has announced that it’s launching a new EVISU line of gaming accessories. The Razer EVISU Collection is the brand’s latest collaboration within the world of fashion, following partnerships with BAPE, TUMI, and Cariuma. There was a time when Razer dipping its toes into the waters of fashion and apparel would seem a bit, strange. But those days are long gone.
These days, Razer identifies itself as the world’s premium lifestyle brand for gamers. And although it still mostly makes gaming peripherals and hardware (like the Razer Edge and Razer Wolverine V2 Pro), it will occasionally launch new apparel. Sometimes under its own branding, sometimes with a fashion partner. In this case, EVISU.
The collaboration includes a release from EVISU with three new garments. The EVISU Daicock Print T-Shirt, the EVISU Godhead Hoodie, and the EVISU Diacock Print with Embroidery Carrot-Fit Jeans. The collection also includes Razer gaming accessories featuring EVISU branding.

Razer EVISU gaming accessories will be available starting February 24
With this latest collection, Razer is launching three new accessories available for gamers to buy starting this week. The accessories themselves aren’t new models. But new versions of these models. This includes EVISU versions of the Orochi V2 gaming mouse, Gigantus V2 – Large mouse mat, and BlackWidow V3 gaming keyboard.
Razer will begin selling these new accessories on February 24 but the company also says that stock is limited. For those looking to scoop some or all of these accessories up, they’ll be live on Razer’s website exclusively at 6pm PT on the 24th. The EVISU Orochi V2 will retail for $99, while the Giagantus will be $49 and the BlackWidow V3 will be $199.
If you don’t care about the EVISU branding, Razer also just launched the BlackWidow V4 Pro, which has more features and a slightly updated design. And it only costs $30 more than the EVISU BlackWidow V3.
The post Razer launches EVISU line of gaming accessories appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Meta confirms its own Twitter-like verification badge

Twitter, more specifically Elon Musk, got a lot of flack for making the verification badge a Twitter Blue perk. It also led to some major financial repercussions. So, what is Meta CEO Mark Zuckerberg to do? Well, Meta just confirmed its own verification badge.
If you’re unfamiliar with what’s been going on with Twitter, when Elon Musk took over, he made the sought-after verification an automatic perk of the Twitter Blue subscription. This means that if you subscribe, you’re instantly verified. That pretty much defeated the purpose of the badge.
Now, Meta is bringing its own verification badge
This was rumored recently. Hidden within Instagram’s code, we saw some strings that pointed to a verification badge for the photo-sharing platform. Also, there was code for Facebook. While it was only rumor, it didn’t take long for the company to come out and announce it.
According to a new blog post from Meta itself (Via Phone Arena), the company is going to launch its own verification badge. This badge will come with its own set of perks attached. If you think that this sounds similar to Twitter’s take, then you’re not mistaken.
As you can imagine, this is a paid subscription. So far, it looks like there’s only going to be a monthly paid option. If you sign up through the web, you’ll be paying $11.99/month. However, if you go through the Instagram or Facebook app on your phone, the price will jump 25% to $14.99/month.
That’s pretty pricey, but his badge will apply to both Facebook and Instagram. Regardless of the platform, you’ll get the same perks, and one of them might be a bit frustrating.
For starters, since this is verified through your ID, a verification badge means that you are YOU. This will make impersonating you extremely difficult.
Next, you’ll have certain protective services for your account. You’ll have access to account monitoring from the company. Also, you’ll be able to contact an employee about account issues.
The badge will give you access to exclusive features. Since this is still new, we don’t have any word on those features just yet.
This one might upset some people
The last, and probably most frustrating, the feature is that getting the Meta verification badge will give you better reach. That’s right, if you pay, you’ll get a boost in the algorithm. Your account will be accessed easier when it comes to comments, searches, and recommendations. This one will definitely upset a lot of folks who’ve been on the platforms.
Meta will be testing out the badge in Australia and New Zealand. We’ll have to stay tuned for when the company is going to launch it in more markets.
The post Meta confirms its own Twitter-like verification badge appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Elon Musk gave $1.95 billion of Tesla stock to charity last year

According to the BBC, Elon Musk donated $1.95 billion of Tesla stock to charity between August and December last year. This charitable act is revealed in a regulatory filing and described as “a bona fide gift.” Yet, the recipient or recipients of these billions need to be clarified, and the filing didn’t reveal the names.
Of course, this is not the first time that Musk is donating billions of dollars of Tesla shares to charities. Back in 2021, he gave up $5.74 billion of shares. Additionally, he promised to donate $20 million to Cameron County schools and $10 million to the city of Brownsville in Texas for the so-called “downtown revitalization.”
Musk has recently lost his position as the wealthiest man on the planet and was replaced by Bernard Arnault, co-founder, chair, and CEO of LVMH. The reports also claim Musk lost $200 billion of his wealth in over a year.
Elon Musk donates almost $2 billion of Tesla stock to charity while the company’s stock is plummeting
Elon Musk is probably one of the most controversial people in the world due to his Twitter takeover and the radical changes he made to the social media company. Of course, Musk’s occupation as Twitter CEO didn’t go well with Tesla shareholders. They complained Musk is devoting much of his focus and time to Twitter, and the EV maker is running on a wing and prayer.
Despite growth in pre-orders and EV delivery, Tesla stock is plummeting. The company stock has fallen 45% over two months, and it’s not showing any sign of recovery (via ABC News). That’s why Elon Musk is now more serious about leaving his executive role at Twitter and returning to Tesla.
The billionaire recently said the end of this year might be a good time for him to find another CEO for Twitter. “I think I need to stabilize the organization and just make sure it’s in a financially healthy place and that the product roadmap is clearly laid out,” Musk added.
The post Elon Musk gave $1.95 billion of Tesla stock to charity last year appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

One UI 5.1 update is live for Galaxy S22 series in the US

Samsung‘s One UI 5.1 update is available for the Galaxy S22 series in the US. Both carrier-locked and unlocked variants are getting the new One UI version stateside. The rollout began a few days back in Europe.
One UI 5.1 is the latest iteration of Samsung’s Android-based custom software. Built on top of Android 13, the new version debuted with the Galaxy S23 series, which launched on February 1. The Korean firm started rolling it out to older Galaxy models earlier this week. As expected, the Galaxy S22 series was the first to get it. Following the initial rollout in Europe, the update is now available in the US too.
The latest update for the Galaxy S22, Galaxy S22+, and Galaxy S22 Ultra in the US comes with the firmware build numbers S901USQU2CWAI (carrier-locked) and S901U1UEU2CWAI (unlocked). Along with One UI 5.1 goodies, the phones are also getting the February 2023 Android security patch. The new security release contains more than 50 vulnerability fixes, including a few critical ones.
But we are still more interested in One UI 5.1. The new One UI version brings a host of new features and improvements. Samsung has added new options to the stock camera app and also introduced new editing features. The update also adds English support for Bixby Text Call, Samsung Notes collaboration, improved widgets, improved multitasking, more Modes and Routines, smart suggestions, and more. You can refer to Samsung’s official changelog for all One UI 5.1 features.
One UI 5.1 will reach more Galaxy devices in the US
The Galaxy S22 series may have picked up the One UI 5.1 update first, but Samsung also seeded the new One UI version to the Galaxy S21, Galaxy S20, Galaxy Z Fold 4, Galaxy Z Flip 4, Galaxy Z Fold 3, Galaxy Z flip 3, and a few more Galaxy devices in a span of just a few hours. The rollout for all of these devices began in Europe. The company is now bringing the update to more markets. Users of these devices in the US should get One UI 5.1 soon.
As usual, you will get a notification once the OTA (over the air) release becomes available for your phone. Alternatively, you can open the Settings app on your phone, go to the Software update menu, and tap on Download and install to check for updates manually. Repeat the steps a few days later if you don’t see many updates today. We will let you know when Samsung releases the One UI 5.1 update for other Galaxy devices in the US.
The post One UI 5.1 update is live for Galaxy S22 series in the US appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Galaxy S23 Ultra is a great camera allrounder: DXOMARK

Samsung‘s brand-new Galaxy S23 Ultra has wowed reviewers and experts globally. In our review, we found it the closest anything has ever been to a perfect smartphone. The phone has a lot going for it, not the least of which is the camera. The folks over at DXOMARK have now provided their assessment of the phone’s camera capabilities. They have ranked the new Samsung flagship surprisingly low at the tenth spot, but that ranking doesn’t tell the full story.
The Galaxy S23 Ultra packs a 200MP primary rear camera that offers three different modes: 200MP, 50MP, and 12MP. The latter is the default mode and DXOMARK carried out this test in the default setting. According to the publication, the device offered very good detail in regular photos with a fairly wide dynamic range in all lighting conditions. It “ensured good highlight and shadow detail, even when capturing difficult high-contrast scenes,” the test report states.
The phone offered great zoom shots as well. Samsung has equipped the Galaxy S23 Ultra with two 10MP optical zoom cameras (3X and 10X), and it captured good detail across most zoom settings. “Tele zoom at very long range was a strength,” DXOMARK said. Video stabilization was also labeled to be “very effective”. Samsung says the OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) on the new model is twice as strong as its predecessor. Video exposure was good too, and so was autofocus, in both photo and video.
Unfortunately, the Galaxy S23 Ultra’s rear camera setup doesn’t come without any shortcomings. DXOMARK found that photos have low contrast in backlit scenes and some noise in low-light conditions. The publication also spotted fusion artifacts in all conditions and slight white balance casts. Low-light videos also suffered from occasional underexposure of faces. These are sort of things that Samsung can improve with software updates, though. So maybe the phone will get better over time.
DXOMARK calls Galaxy S23 Ultra a great smartphone imaging allrounder
Overall, DXOMARK concludes that the Galaxy S23 Ultra doesn’t have major drawbacks in any area as long as the camera performance is concerned. This makes it a “great smartphone imaging allrounder”. However, some minor shortcomings don’t allow the device to be the outright best in every category. The publication gave the latest Samsung flagship a camera score of 140. That puts it in the tenth spot in the overall rankings, below the latest offerings from Google, Apple, and a few others. You can find DXOMARK’s detailed camera review of the Galaxy S23 Ultra here.
The post Galaxy S23 Ultra is a great camera allrounder: DXOMARK appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

How to Watch WWE Elimination Chamber 2023

The road to Wrestlemania continues, with Elimination Chamber taking place this weekend from Montreal, Quebec, Canada. This is the second year in a row that Elimination Chamber is taking place outside of the US. With last year being held in Saudi Arabia. It’s taking place on Saturday, February 18, 2023.
There’s a lot of anticipation going into the 2023 Elimination Chamber premium live event this year. With the whole thing between Sami Zayn and Roman Reigns, Brock Lesnar being obsessed with Bobby Lashley, and there’s also two Elimination Chamber matches. And for the first time, the Elimination Chamber will play host to a mid-card championship – the US Title.
WWE Elimination Chamber Main Event Preview
Despite this being the Elimination Chamber, and there being two matches based on that gimmick, the main event is definitely Sami Zayn and Roman Reigns. This is a match that has been a long time coming, since Reigns brought Zayn into the Bloodline last year. It took Zayn a while to get all members of the Bloodline to accept him. Having to prove himself again and again. His real-life best friend and fellow Canadian, Kevin Owens, told Zayn that he needed to betray the Bloodline before they did it to him. This made sense, since Zayn was a baby face, and the Bloodline are heels.
So at the Royal Rumble, after Reigns defeated Owens, the Bloodline came out and started to beat him up some more. Zayn stepped in the way of Reigns so he was unable to hit him with the chair. And instead, told Zayn to do it. After some coercion, he did use the chair. But not on Owens. Instead, he betrayed Roman Reigns and the Bloodline, by hitting Reigns with the chair. And it looked eerily similar to when Seth Rollins did it Reigns many years earlier.
That all set up this match for the WWE Universal Championship at the Elimination Chamber. But the problem is, does the WWE see Sami Zayn as “the guy” in the company? Is he the right one to dethrone Reigns from his 900+ day reign? WWE was planning for Cody Rhodes to do this. Having him win the Royal Rumble in January, and headline Wrestlemania against Roman Reigns. But what if Zayn beats Reigns and it’s Rhodes vs Zayn at Wrestlemania?
Not to mention the fact that Elimination Chamber is in Sami’s hometown of Montreal, and the USO’s won’t be there. As they are not allowed to travel to Canada due to their DUI’s they’ve gotten while in Canada before. So the only backup Reigns will have is, Solo Sikoa.
This whole thing has wrestling fans sitting on the edge of their seats. And it’s not hard to see why.
Edge and Beth Phoenix vs Rhea Ripley and Finn Balor
Another match that is perhaps flying under the radar, is a mixed tag team match between the Judgement day, and Edge who created the Judgement Day and his real-life wife, Beth Phoenix. Rhea Ripley from the Judgement Day has been wanting a match with Beth Phoenix for a while, and the WWE has been teasing it for almost a year at this point. And we’re finally getting it, or something close to it.
We kind of already know that this will be a one-off for these four, as Rhea Ripley won the Women’s Royal Rumble match last month, and will face Charlotte Flair for the Smackdown Women’s title at Wrestlemania. But will Edge finally destroy his own creation? Like he has been promising to do for months now? We’ll find out on Saturday.

How to watch WWE Elimination Chamber 2023 on Peacock
First up, make sure to login to your Peacock account. Or sign up if you haven’t already.
Then click on the “WWE” tab at the top of the page. It’ll be to the right of “Sports”.
This year, Elimination Chamber is back to its regular time. With the pre-show taking place at 7PM EDT and the regular show starting at 8PM EDT. The post-show press conference is set to start at 11:30PM EDT, which will be broadcast on Peacock as well as other social channels, including YouTube.
What time does WWE Elimination Chamber 2023 start?
As mentioned, the Elimination Chamber is back in North America this year, so the starting times are back to normal, compared to Elimination Chamber in 2022.
The pre-show will kick off on Peacock and other social channels starting at 7PM EDT. This is where the experts will break down every match, as well as seeing some exclusive interviews ahead of the big premium live event.
The main show will start at 8PM EDT. Typically, these run until around 11PM EDT, and there is the press conference set for 11:30PM EDT, right after the show. So it should only be about three to three-and-a-half hours long this time.
Who’s on the card?
The card for WWE Elimination Chamber 2023 is actually fairly short. There’s only six matches on the card this time around, however there are two Elimination Chamber matches, which can take up quite a bit of time.
As of February 17, 2023, this is the card for Elimination Chamber.
Undisputed WWE Universal Championship: Sami Zayn vs. Roman Reigns (c)
United States Title Elimination Chamber Match featuring Montez Ford, Johnny Gargano, Bronson Reed, Seth “Freakin” Rollins, Damian Priest and Austin Theory (c)
Elimination Chamber Match to determine challenger to the Raw Women’s Title at WrestleMania featuring Carmella, Nikki Cross, Raquel González, Asuka, Liv Morgan and Natalya
Edge & Beth Phoenix vs. Finn Bálor & Rhea Ripley
Bobby Lashley vs. Brock Lesnar
As always, the card is subject to change due to injuries, time slots, etc. And where this is being written before the final Smackdown before the event, there could be changes to the card, including an additional match or two being added. We’ll be sure to update this post accordingly so you have the most up-to-date information.
The post How to Watch WWE Elimination Chamber 2023 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Best Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra Cases

The Galaxy S23 Ultra is likely going to get all of the attention this year, from buyers. And that’s because it is the best of the best from Samsung. It also has the S Pen, so it’s more of a hybrid between the Galaxy S and Galaxy Note line of phones. It starts at $1,199 so it’s not a cheap phone. That means that you’re going to want to keep it in good shape and protect it. Which you can do with a case. So we’ve rounded up the very best cases for the Galaxy S23 Ultra here.
Best Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra cases
In this list, you’ll find cases from Samsung as well as third-party cases from companies like Caseology, Ringke and others. So here are the best cases for the Galaxy S23 Ultra.

Where to Buy
Samsung Silicon Cover
Ringke Fusion
LK Protective Case
Caseology Nano Pop
Samsung S-View Wallet Case
Samsung Frame Case
Ringke Onyx
Poetic Revolution Series
Caseology Skyfall
Samsung Silicon Cover

Price: $29
Where to buy: Samsung.com
Samsung’s Silicon Cover is the same case that they have been offering with its phones for years now. It’s a pretty simple case, made of silicon for the Galaxy S23 Ultra. It looks and feels great in the hand. The only thing is that, because it is a soft-touch material, it does collect dust like crazy. It is available in a ton of colors too.
Samsung Silicon Cover – Samsung.com
Ringke Fusion

Price: $14
Where to buy: Amazon
This case from Ringke is another good one for the Galaxy S23 Ultra. This is a clear case. So you won’t need to worry about it adding a lot of heft to your smartphone. That’s definitely good to see in this day and age. It’s clear, but it also comes in a matte-clear model and a smokey black model. The matte-clear might be the best option here, as traditional clear cases can get pretty disgusting quickly, due to fingerprints and other grease.
Ringke Fusion – Amazon
LK Protective Case

Price: $17
Where to buy: Amazon
Here’s another good looking clear case for the Galaxy S23 Ultra. This is from LK, who is pretty popular over on Amazon. But this one is military grade drop protection and won’t yellow. That’s something important to think about with clear cases, as they do tend to yellow after some time. But this one, apparently won’t. It also comes in a matte color, if you don’t want a 100% clear case.
AICase Rugged Case – Amazon
Caseology Nano Pop

Price: $17
Where to buy: Amazon
The Nano Pop from Caseology is a newer collection of cases from the company, and they really “pop”. As you might expect from the name. This time around, it’s available in three colors: Black Sesame, Blueberry Navy, Avo Green. It’s a dual-layer case, which is going to offer a ton of protection for your new smartphone. It uses one color for the majority of the case, with the second being an accent color around the camera bump.
Caseology Nano Pop – Amazon
Samsung S-View Wallet Case

Price: $49
Where to buy: Samsung.com
The Samsung S-View Wallet Case is another case that’s been around for quite some time. It basically is a flip case that has a small window in the corner to show you the time, date, battery percentage and some notifications. It does come in a slew of colors as well. So you can choose which one you want on your device.
Samsung S-View Wallet Case – Samsung.com
Samsung Frame Case

Price: $39
Where to buy: Samsung.com
The Samsung Frame Case is a new case for Samsung this year, and it’s a quite interesting case. It’s available for all the Galaxy S23 models and it also comes in a few different colors too.
Samsung Frame Case – Samsung.com
Ringke Onyx

Price: $15
Where to buy: Amazon
The Ringke Onyx is one of my favorite cases for the Galaxy S23 Ultra. You see, it’s pretty minimal, and not very thick at all. And it does also have a textured back. Which makes it easier to hold onto. Of course, it has all of the cutouts for the usual things like the USB-C port, S-Pen slot and the speaker. So it’s a really good option to pick up.
Ringke Onyx – Amazon
Poetic Revolution Series

Price: $25
Where to buy: Amazon
Poetic is another popular one around these parts. The Revolution series is a really rugged case for the Galaxy S23 Ultra, which also has a built-in screen protector. And yes, the fingerprint sensor does work with this screen protector. So it’s a good option for a lot of people. Not to mention the fact that it does also have a built-in kickstand here.
teloxy Crystal Clear Case – Amazon
Caseology Skyfall

Price: $16
Where to buy: Amazon
Those looking for a clear case, the Caseology Skyfall is a great option. It is mostly clear, with a colored accent around the camera bump, and the frame. Caseology is available in two colors: matte black, and lilac purple. Which makes it a really great looking case, and one that won’t yellow either.
Caseology Skyfall – Amazon
The post Best Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra Cases appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Genshin Impact players can claim new Prime Gaming loot

A few months back HoYoverse started handing out in-game loot rewards for Genshin Impact to players who are also Prime Gaming members. If you subscribe to Amazon Prime, then Prime Gaming is available as a part of that subscription. And the benefit of that if you play games, is the tons of in-game loot you can claim across various titles. In addition to free games you can claim every single month.
Back when HoYoverse announced Genshin Impact would be part of the Prime Gaming rewards, it also mentioned there would be 8 different loot drops. And anyone who claimed 4 of those 8 drops would end up being eligible for an exclusive item available only to Prime Gaming members. Basically, you can only get the item if you’re subscribed to Prime Gaming. But you also need to claim at least of the loot drops.
Today, HoYoverse has announced what the exclusive item is. A set of wings called Wings of the Starlit Feast. These are the 9th drop so they aren’t available just yet. And won’t be until all 8 initial drops have been made available. Today is also the launch of the 4th loot drop.
Genshin Impact players can now claim the 4th Prime Gaming loot drop

If you’ve been claiming the loot drops all along, now’s your chance to secure the exclusive Prime Gaming loot when it arrives. Loot drops started back in December of 2022. But even if you’ve missed some, not to worry. You can still claim today’s. And as long as you claim three more, you can still pick up the wings.
Also worth noting is that the loot drops will continue until May of this year. For this latest drop, players can pick up 1x fragile resin, 8x mystic enhancement more, and 20,000 mora. Not the most valuable in-game loot you can acquire. By any means. But still good to have and free in-game loot is free in-game loot. In addition to new Prime Gaming loot, HoYoverse also announced the game’s version 3.5 update coming in March.
And if you haven’t signed up for Prime yet, you can do so with a 30-day free trial from the button below and start claiming your free Prime Gaming loot today.
Amazon Prime
The post Genshin Impact players can claim new Prime Gaming loot appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Genshin Impact v3.5 drops in March with new quests and more

Genshin Impact continues its path of being one of the most popular mobile games on the planet, and that’s thanks in part to the consistent patch updates, with the latest being version 3.5 launching in just a couple of weeks. Officially Genshin Impact version 3.5 will launch on March 1, and expand the content with a brand-new Archon quest, new playable characters to add to your party and much more.
The title of this patch will be “Windblume’s Breath,” which takes after the Windblume Festival that players will participate in during this patch. During the Windblume Festival, players can earn rewards by completing a series of different challenges throughout the city of Mondstadt. Players can also enjoy a collection of different mini-games. Ballads of Breeze, Floral Pursuit, and Breezy Snapshots will be available to play for a limited time. Likely during the course of this event.
The Windblume Festival probably isn’t going to last the entirety of Patch 3.5 though. So anyone interested in playing the mini-games or obtaining rewards will want to make a note of the start and end times.
Venture deep into the Abyss Order in Genshin Impact 3.5

Genshin Impact has a lot for players to do across its many branching storylines, puzzles, and boss battles. All of which is neatly wrapped up in oodles of exploration in a massive open world. Part of those storylines are the Archon quests. And with version 3.5, players will venture deep into the Abyss Order. HoYoverse doesn’t get too much more into it than that.
However, you can check out the new trailer for the upcoming patch below, and that should give you a sneak peek at the upcoming content without giving too much away. As you progress through the new Archon quest, you’ll also meet the game’s two new playable characters, Dheya who’s a 5-star Pyro claymore user and Mika who’s a 4-star Cryo polearm user.

The post Genshin Impact v3.5 drops in March with new quests and more appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Instagram introduces 'Broadcast Channels' to post one-way content

Instagram is always unveiling new features to keep its users engaged. The photo-sharing app just introduced a new feature that will let people post one-way content for their fans. Instagram calls this feature Broadcast Channels.
The thinking behind this feature isn’t particularly new. Telegram has a feature similar to this called “Channels”. It’s an interesting way of keeping your fans engaged in what you’re posting. It’s also an easier way of providing text-based information for fans.
Instagram introduces Broadcast Channels
There aren’t too many ways of sending text-based announcements to your followers. The company was working on bringing short text-based statuses to profiles, but it’s not widely available yet. Other than that, you’d need to add the text to your posts via the caption or through stories. However, those methods aren’t really direct.
However, Instagram just introduced its new Broadcast Channels. These are essentially one-way chat rooms. The creator can set up the channel and invite people to join. Once the creator sets up the channel, their followers will be notified.
In the group, the creator will be able to send messages to the group, but the followers won’t be able to post their own messages; they can only react.
The creators can send any type of message into the channel that they could in a regular message group/Story. You’re able to send text, pictures, videos, polls, audio messages, etc.
This feature did launch to the stable version of Instagram, but it’s still not available to everyone. Instagram has a short list of top Instagram influencers who can use the feature before everyone else.
This list includes Austin Sprinz, David Allen, Tank Sinatra, Valkyrae, and more. You can check out the full list of accounts on the announcement post. There’s no telling when the company will roll this out to all other users. In any case, we don’t expect it to be too long.
The post Instagram introduces 'Broadcast Channels’ to post one-way content appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

The PlayStation Plus catalog is getting Horizon Forbidden West

Every month Sony adds new titles to the PlayStation Plus catalog for Extra and Premium subscribers, and February has turned out to a be a real banger of a collection. This month includes multiple huge titles as well as some smaller titles that have likely flown under the radar.
If you don’t have a PlayStation Plus Extra or Premium subscription, you will definitely want to sign up for this month’s titles. First off, Sony is adding Horizon Forbidden West. The sequel to the hit open-world action game from Guerilla. Which, by the way, is also available in the catalog. And that means you can play both titles in the franchise for the monthly subscription fee.
If you haven’t played either yet, now is the perfect time to dive in. Outside of Horizon Forbidden West, there are tons of other must-play games.
Borderlands 3, Scarlet Nexus and more join the PlayStation Plus catalog for February
Horizon Forbidden West is worth the sub this month alone. But Sony is doing subscribers a solid and adding way more value to the service than a single AAA hit. For this month, subscribers also get Borderlands 3, Scarlet Nexus, Resident Evil 7 Biohazard, and Outriders. All of which are excellent games and pretty damn popular. For good reason.
But there’s also Tekken 7, Ace Combat 7: Skies Unknown, The Quarry, and Earth Defense Force 5. And for the turn-based rpg fans, both I am Setsuna and Lost Sphear are being added in addition to Oninaki. All three of these titles come from Square Enix’s Tokyo RPG Factory, and are a nice callback to the rpg games of older generation consoles. Lastly, there’s The Forgotten City where you can explore an open-world ancient Rome.
Sony is also adding a few titles to the Classics catalog for Premium subscribers. Including The Legend Of Dragoon, Wild Arms 2, Harvest Moon: Back To Nature, and Destroy All Humans!. All of these titles will be available in their respective catalogs on February 21.
The post The PlayStation Plus catalog is getting Horizon Forbidden West appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Apple releases first iOS 16.4 Beta, here's what's new

After a somewhat long wait, Apple has finally released the first beta for iOS 16.4. And it has a good number of features that are coming in the stable iOS 16.4 update in the coming future. Currently, developers are still getting their hands on the build, so we’re still finding new features that are coming in iOS 16.4. So here’s what we know so far.
Keep in mind that this is the developer beta. The public beta will be available to users in the coming days. If you are a registered developer, you can download the update now.
What’s new in iOS 16.4 Beta
So what’s new in iOS 16.4 Beta? Well, so far, it’s mostly pretty small things. Which is expected, this close to the iOS 17 announcement. But we are getting new emoji in the iOS 16.4 update. This update brings new Unicode 15 emoji characters. This is the first time that Apple has added new emoji in over a year.
There’s also a handful of smaller updates here. For example, now you can get beta and developer betas onto your device without downloading a beta or developer beta profile. Which is currently how you can get onto the beta track. There will be a new option in the Software Update page to change this. Which is pretty neat. Hopefully it won’t be front and center, so it’s a little tougher for users to download the beta.
We’re also seeing some changes in the Apple Music app, that brings your profile picture into the top right corner. Of course, this is another small update. But remember, Apple’s apps only get updated with new versions of iOS, and not through the App Store.
This is just the first beta for iOS 16.4, so we’d expect to see about 4-5 more betas. Usually about every week or two weeks. So don’t expect to see this one hit stable until probably April.
The post Apple releases first iOS 16.4 Beta, here’s what’s new appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Fitbit files a patent for a blood pressure tech

According to The Verge, The Google-owned wearables maker Fitbit is reportedly working to bring a blood pressure technology to its products or the next generation of Pixel Watch. The company has recently filed a patent that enables blood pressure readings on a smartwatch by tapping on the display.
As per the filing details, the technology includes a force-sensitive screen and a photoplethysmography (PPG) sensor to measure blood pressure. Filing the patent means that the Fitbit engineers are working on this technology, but we don’t know when it will find its way toward the company’s products.
Fitbit might be developing blood pressure technology for the next Pixel Watch
Smartwatches are currently offering a plethora of health monitoring features, but blood pressure is a rare feature among them. You can now find blood pressure technology on Samsung Galaxy Watch 5. Likewise, other manufacturers like Apple and Google are also expected to add this technology to their next wearables. That’s why we should take the Fitbit claims with a pinch of salt.
Many believe that the Pixel Watch has become the main focus of Google, and Fitbit products aren’t a priority anymore. Google has recently rebranded the company to “Fitbit by Google.” Additionally, the latest Fitbit smartwatches don’t offer anything extraordinary compared to the Pixel Watch or other rivals.
With the prediction of dire economic conditions for Google, the company might be less likely to invest in multiple similar products at the same time. Another scenario is Google doesn’t want to turn Fitbit smartwatches into a rival to Pixel Watch.
Yet, it needs to be determined if this blood pressure technology will come to a Fitbit-branded product or the next Pixel Watch. Judging based on recent events, Fitbit is more likely to hand over this technology to the Pixel Watch to be used as a competitive advantage. Also, Apple’s 2024 smartwatches are expected to launch with blood pressure checkers (via Bloomberg).
The post Fitbit files a patent for a blood pressure tech appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

AI-powered Bing chat won't be limited to Microsoft Edge forever

Microsoft’s new Bing chat powered by ChatGPT, has a browser compatibility requirement. You need to be using Microsoft Edge. It’s not a surprising move, as Microsoft wants more people to switch from Google’s beloved Chrome to Edge. And the AI-powered Bing chat is how it plans (or hopes) to convince people to make the switch.
At least, that’s the deal for now. There is of course another caveat or two to contend with. Right now Bing chat isn’t available to everyone. Not even people who use Edge. Microsoft officially announced the new tool last week and has since begun allowing users to sign up for access via a waitlist. Noting that multiple millions have already signed up. You currently need an invite to use the tool. So if you haven’t signed up yet, that should be your next course of action.
Though there’s no telling how long the wait may be. Microsoft says more than a million people signed up within the first 48 hours of access. And invites just started rolling out on February 14.
Bing chat browser compatibility will eventually open up
For now, you’ll need to use Edge if you want to access and converse with the new AI Bing chat. But it won’t be that way forever. Microsoft has confirmed that it will eventually open up the compatibility to other browsers. Which likely means Chrome, Opera, Firefox and others.
However, there is still a question of timing. Microsoft hasn’t said when it would make the new Bing chat available to other browsers. Just that it would. Some things to keep in mind though. Outside of Edge, you may need to set Bing as your default search. Currently, you can speed up your wait time in the signup queue by doing two things. One of which is setting Bing as your default search.
Although it isn’t required to set Bing as your default, Microsoft is clearly using it as a way to convince users. The signup queue is in the millions. Bypass that by setting Microsoft tools as your defaults. Seems pretty straightforward. With that in mind, when Bing powered by ChatGPT finally makes it to other browsers, it’s not too hard to believe that Microsoft would require those users to set Bing as a default if it wants access to the tool.
The post AI-powered Bing chat won’t be limited to Microsoft Edge forever appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Bing chatbot claims it was watching employees via their webcams

Microsoft’s Bing chatbot, powered by ChatGPT, has reportedly been exhibiting some weird behavior lately. According to The Verge, a number of users have reported the AI chatbot giving manipulative, angsty responses to queries. As well as responses that might sound a little bit invasive. Including telling The Verge that it would spy on employees through their webcams and that “it could bypass their security, and their privacy, and their consent, without them being aware or able to prevent it.”
These are just a few examples of the weird behavior coming from the Bing chatbot. Though, if you really think about it, it may not really be all that weird. Somewhat unexpected, sure. But not necessarily weird. Microsoft’s Bing chatbot isn’t some sentient piece of AI technology. It’s a tool powered by artificial intelligence designed to help users find answers to their questions.
Essentially, it’s the evolution of Bing search. As an AI though, Microsoft had to train the tool to be able to give responses back to users. A task which the company completed by feeding it tons of information from across the web. Information which included content these kinds of responses were drawn from.

Weird Bing chatbot behavior is the reality of a beta test
When it comes down to it, the Bing chatbot is in beta. It’s currently being tested as Microsoft has not fully rolled it out yet. So the reality here is that Microsoft’s Bing AI chat still has some kinks that need to be worked out.
That being said, the growling list of these interactions, if nothing else, seems to be entertaining to users. For example, one user highlights an exchange between Bing and another user that it proceeds to argue with about the date. The initial question was about showtimes for the new Avatar movie. And Bing’s response is that the movie isn’t out yet because the release date is December 2022, which is the future.
Clearly, Microsoft still has some work to do with its new tool. But that doesn’t mean users can’t enjoy the back-and-forth conversations it’s having in the meantime.
The post Bing chatbot claims it was watching employees via their webcams appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

What is Google Wallet?

Google Pay… or is it GPay? What about that Android Pay thing? Wait, was it Google Wallet?! Google’s money management app has been knighted with multiple names in the past, and it’s hard for the user to keep up with them. Not only have the names changed, but the intentions have also changed over time. Now, it’s called Google Wallet, and it’s the testing ground for a major project that Google has been working on for over a decade. So, let’s dive into what Google Wallet is and if you should be on board with it.
First, a little history
Google Wallet has a pretty long history. Back in 2011, the company revealed its first Google Wallet application, and it was pretty ambitious for the time. As the name suggested, it was a wallet that was powered by Google.
It allowed you to add different cards to your Google account that you could use to make purchases. You added cards like a limited list of credit/debit cards, certain gift cards, and a prepaid Google card. These purchases could be done online, but you could also use your phone to make purchases at physical points of sale.
While this was innovative at the time, it didn’t get the kind of traction that the company was hoping for. Then, in late 2015, Google launched another platform alongside Google Wallet; Android Pay.
This platform did pretty much the same thing. It allowed the user to store several cards on the app and make contactless payments. Android Pay took on that functionality while Google Wallet devolved into being just an app for peer-to-peer payments. However, Google wasn’t done yet. In 2018, the company then combined Google Wallet and Android pay into one platform called Google Pay.
This was an attempt to create a more integrated payment platform. As you can imagine, this platform allowed people to make contactless payments at physical stores. Google Pay also encompassed Google’s online payment platform. So, if you paid for anything using Google online, you’d be using Google Pay.
In early 2022, Google again renamed its payment platform. This time, it recycled the Google Wallet name, and that leads us to today.
What is Google Wallet?
So, that leads us to the million-dollar question: What is Google Wallet? Google has the ambition to make the physical wallet obsolete. The company wants your wallet to live on your phone. You’re already able to put a myriad of credit and debit cards on your Google account and use them in the app. It’s also compatible with a PayPal card.
However, your wallet doesn’t only hold your credit and debit cards. If you get a gift card from someone, you’re likely to place it in your wallet as well. Well, you’re also able to add gift cards from all types of stores to your Google Wallet. Some examples are Walmart, Starbucks, Best Buy, Panera Bread, Subway, McDonald’s, Chipotle, Game Stop, and so on. The list could encompass hundreds of stores.
Next, the Wallet lets you add loyalty cards from well-known vendors. These cards allow you to wrack up points for shopping at different locations for added benefits like savings.
Other types of cards
Now, adding gift cards and loyalty cards is convenient enough, but Google’s grand plan doesn’t stop there. The company is adding legitimate forms of identification to the Wallet.
Let’s start off with transportation. Google Wallet allows you to add your transit cards. These include cards like prepaid bus passes. What’s neat is that your remaining balance on these cards can be displayed directly in Google Maps.
That’s not all, however, as Google allows you to add plane tickets to your Wallet. You’re able to buy the ticket from the official ticket site or from a third-party broker. From that point, you’ll be able to add that ticket to your account. To use it, you’ll just need to hold your phone to the reader. It will be read just like you’re tapping to make a payment.
At the moment, a select number of BMW car models allow you to add digital car keys to your Wallet. You’ll just need to hold your phone to your door, and it will unlock. Google says that more car models are coming down the road.
Legitimate identification
As stated before, Google wants Wallet to be a full replacement for your leather pocket liner. This includes adding valid forms of identification to your phone. This is still in the early stages, so the availability is still pretty sparse for the moment.
If you’ve received your Covid-19 vaccination, then you’re able to put your vaccination card on your phone. At the moment, this is only available in certain countries. These are the US, Australia, Brazil, Canada, New Jersey, New Zealand, Singapore, Spain (Murcia region only), and the UK.
We were all a bit surprised when Google announced that you’ll be able to add your ID/driver’s license to Google Wallet. However, it’s slowly becoming a reality- and “slowly” is the operative word. As of January 2023, Google is doing a limited beta test for this feature in Maryland. As you can imagine, Google will need to work with several governments to load millions of people’s identification onto its servers.
The Google Wallet app
Now, if you’re interested in moving to the Google Wallet, here’s how to use the app. You can download the app from the Google Play Store right here.
When you get the app, you’ll be able to sign into your Google Account. You’ll want to use the one that you have the most and easiest access to. If you’ve already added cards to your Google account, then you’ll see them pop up in the app.
The Google Wallet app is one of the most simplistic apps out there, as it’s meant just to be a wallet, not an app. So, you’re not going to see the most engaging UI full of sub-menus and animations. You’ll just see a simple screen with all of the cards you added.
The cards sit in a carousel at the top of the screen. You’ll be able to swipe through them to the one that you need. Also, the moment you open the app, the NFC will automatically activate, so you’ll only need to hold it to the reader. If you unlock the phone and tap without opening the app, it will automatically use your default card. Just make sure you know which card you have as the default.
If you want to add a new card, you’ll just need to tap on the Add to Wallet button at the bottom. From that point, you’ll be able to choose what kind of card you want to add. When you do, you’ll just need to add the information or scan your card.
So, that’s the essence of Google Wallet. Google wants to port your entire wallet onto your phone. Starting from those early days in 2011, the company has been heading in that direction, and it’s made a lot of progress.
The post What is Google Wallet? appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Apple's Watch Ultra is now just $749

Amazon currently has the Apple Watch Ultra on sale for $749. That’s going to save you $50 off of its regular price, and that does bring it down to an all-time low.
Remember, that the Apple Watch Ultra is basically only available in one model. There are no colors, just the exposed titanium look, with the choice of three different bands. Now the bands are available in different colors.
The Apple Watch Ultra was announced back in September 2022, and since its announcement, it has received some pretty good reviews. Many, that aren’t adventurous, have really come to like it. Why? Mostly for the bigger battery inside. Apple says that the Watch Ultra battery can last around 36 hours on a charge. That’s double what the Apple Watch Series 8 is rated for. However, many are finding it lasting far longer than 36 hours.
Another major benefit of the Apple Watch Ultra is the fact that it has a much brighter display than the other Apple Watches. Allowing you to see it better outside in direct sunlight. It is also a lot more rugged. Since it has a titanium case, that makes it less susceptible to scratches and dings. Additionally, the screen is squared off, like the iPhone, allowing the screen to take less damage. Not to mention it is also sapphire, so it’s less likely to scratch anyways.
Apple’s Watch Ultra only works with the iPhone, of course. However, the Ultra does come with Cellular by default. So you can connect it to your carrier (or not, you’re not forced to), and go out without your iPhone too. This is really great if you do prefer to use Android but would rather have an Apple Watch on your wrist.
You can pick up the Apple Watch Ultra from Amazon today for just $749 by clicking here.
Apple Watch Ultra – Amazon
The post Apple’s Watch Ultra is now just $749 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Predictions in Open Source: Security, Mature Strategies, COSO, AI/ML

I joined Javier Perez and Rod Cope of Perforce in a webinar entitled Open Source Trends to Watch in 2023 where we reviewed our 2022 predictions and laid out some new ones for 2023. To begin, our recap of last year’s predictions showed that we were on target with the trends we saw. There was:

Increased demand for Open Source skills, impacted by the economy and the job market
Greater awareness for Open Source security
Widespread adoption of containers and Kubernetes
Heightened awareness and application of ethical AI
Inner source will no longer be a secret (bringing Open Source model to other areas of the business, making it easier to open source a project later)
Positive, albeit slow, advancement in diversity and inclusion

Taking the time to review how accurate we were in our 2022 predictions, and reflecting on the trends emerging helps to inform what we see coming and continuing in 2023. The primary predictions we made for 2023 are outlined below.
Open Source security
Global initiatives are being established. In the US, the White House executive order of 2021 generated working groups from top global technologists that came together to create a 10-point plan. Budgets were invested to work this plan and we’ll begin to see results this year. The European commission created the Cyber Resiliency Act which is currently in discussion. China is also taking initiatives toward new security measures in Open Source. We predict that security investments will increase in 2023 and that the state of the economy opens up opportunities for more startups in this field to emerge.
Open Source strategies are maturing
Companies are paying more attention to aspects of their Open Source strategy such as security, licensing, influencing the direction of projects and building expertise within their teams. Maturing strategies are expanding to include the education of department leaders as well as engineers. We also see a huge push for best practices and adoption of Open Source in public administrations. The lack of skills is a gap that needs to be addressed in 2023.
The creation of Chief Open Source Officers
Executive oversight of Open Source initiatives and the related legal, political and licensing factors pertaining to this work is needed. We see the role of COSO emerging as a trend for 2023.
AI/ML in Open Source
Thanks to the explosion of AI and ML, new and surprising conversations are happening around the topics of data, licensing and the deployment of models. OSI has invested a lot in this topic through our AI Deep Dive series. We also see as a result more competition in the hardware space, and Open Source hardware is playing a role.
Lastly, Javier and Rod shared a few of the key findings from Perforce’s State of Open Source Survey:

Organizations report adopting an Open Source strategy so they can contribute and help impact the direction of projects.
There is growing adoption of replacements for end-of-lifed CentOS
OpenSearch usage is increasing to meet ElasticSearch usage

It’s always fun to watch year after year how these predictions turn to trends. Security is still on the top of everyone’s minds, and that is fueling the other predictions such as more focused strategy and oversight within organizations, especially as more novel AI/ML technologies move more mainstream. If you’d like to watch the webinar and hear more about the momentum highlighted in this blog, you can find the recording here.
Webinar panelists:
Javier Perez, Chief Evangelist and Sr. Director of Product Management, Perforce
Rod Cope, CTO, Perforce
Stefano Maffulli, Executive Director, OSI

Source: opensource.org

You can now pre-order the Samsung Galaxy Book 3 Pro & Ultra

Earlier this month Samsung revealed its latest devices, which included the new Galaxy Book 3 Pro and Galaxy Book 3 Ultra, both of which you can now pre-order. The Galaxy Book series has always been about providing consumers with a premium laptop experience, but this year Samsung took it up a notch. The Galaxy Book 3 Ultra in particular showcases Samsung’s commitment to amping things up.
Not only does it come with 32GB of RAM, but it’s powered by up to a 13th Gen Intel Core i9 CPU and an NVIDIA RTX 4070 GPU. The aim here is likely to capture the creator consumer. Someone who needs a powerful enough laptop for content creation or professional use. But the specs seem to be more than capable of handling other high-load activities, too. Such as gaming.
This begs the question then. Is the Galaxy Book 3 Ultra a good gaming laptop option? Well, it’s not a gaming laptop per se. But it does seem equipped to handle games with decent graphics settings. The better question might be whether or not the cooling is up to the task. And if so, for how long?
Either way, if you’re looking for a premium laptop for, whatever your needs are, Samsung’s latest are up for pre-order through the company directly.
Pre-order the Galaxy Book 3 and get a free storage upgrade
Samsung usually has pre-order offers available for those that jump on their latest products early. And this time is no different. If you pre-order the Galaxy Book 3, you get a free storage upgrade. More specifically, Samsung will sell you the 1TB model for the same price as the 512GB model. So for example, if you pre-order the Galaxy Book 3 Ultra with an Intel Core i9, you can get the 1TB model for $2,499.99. This would normally be $2,999.99. And that’s the price it’ll go up to once the pre-order promotion is over.
The same storage upgrade offer is available for the other two models as well – the Galaxy Book 3 Pro and Galaxy Book 3 Pro 360. You can find all three at Samsung’s website.
The post You can now pre-order the Samsung Galaxy Book 3 Pro & Ultra appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Best OnePlus 11 Accessories

The OnePlus 11 is now out, and its set to be one of the best smartphones of 2023. So why not get some great accessories to go with your new OnePlus 11. While the charger is included in the box, this list does have a good charger or two that you could pick up for your OnePlus 11. Along with a smartwatch, extra USB-C cables and much more. So you can really get the best out of your OnePlus 11. If you haven’t already picked up the OnePlus 11, you can do so from here.
Best OnePlus 11 Accessories
In this list, you’ll find truly wireless earbuds, smartwatches, chargers, and much more. Just about everything you can think of to really take full advantage of the OnePlus 11.

Where to buy
OnePlus Warp Charge 65 Power Adapter
OnePlus Watch
RAVPower Portable Charger 20000mAh PD 3.0 Power Bank
Anker Powerline II USB-C to USB-C
OnePlus Buds Pro
Fitbit Versa 3
Anker PowerPort Atom PD 1
Spigen Kuel S40 Car Mount
OnePlus Buds Pro 2
OnePlus Warp Charge 65 Power Adapter

Price: $35
Buy: OnePlus
While OnePlus does include a charger in the box with the OnePlus 11, it’s still a good idea to pick up another one to use when you’re traveling, or whatnot. And it’s pretty inexpensive at $35 too.
This charger can be used for a number of things, including charging your laptop, if it happens to be USB-C. Which makes this charger even more useful.
OnePlus Warp Charge 65 Power Adapter – OnePlus
OnePlus Watch

Price: $159
Buy: OnePlus
The OnePlus Watch isn’t actually new, but it is the only wearable that OnePlus makes and it works the best with a OnePlus smartphone. Making it the perfect fit for your new OnePlus 11.
This watch is able to do the usual things like tracking your fitness, so you can help get in shape. It can also bring notifications to your wrist, so you are touching your phone less.
OnePlus Watch – OnePlus
PopSockets: PopGrip
PopSockets: PopGrip
Price: $14.99
Buy: Amazon
The PopGrip from PopSockets is a really good accessory for really any phone. And the reason why this is the best PopSocket you can buy right now is because it does allow you to swap out the top. So if you want to change the color, you can do so.
PopGrip is really great because it allows you to hold onto your phone much easier, especially for larger phones, but even works great on smaller ones like the OnePlus 11. But it also doubles as a sort of kickstand for your smartphone. Allowing you to use it on long flights to watch a movie or two, without having to hold your phone the whole time. It’s a really genius invention, and it’s something that everyone should have.
You can attach the PopGrip to your case, so that it doesn’t ruin your phone too.
PopSockets: PopGrip – Amazon
RAVPower Portable Charger 20000mAh PD 3.0 Power Bank
RAVPower Portable Charger 20000mAh PD 3.0 Power Bank
Price: $40.09
Buy: Amazon
The RAVPower Portable Charger 20000mAh PD 3.0 Power Bank is a really great option for a battery pack for the OnePlus 11. It offers fast charging, though you likely won’t need that for the OnePlus 11, since it does offer some really good battery life.
It also uses two USB-A ports with fast charging, so you can charge other devices at the same time. RAVPower also includes two more USB-C ports for input, which is really nice, when you need to charge this battery up pretty quickly.
RAVPower Portable Charger 20000mAh PD 3.0 Power Bank – Amazon
Anker Powerline II USB-C to USB-C
Anker Powerline II USB-C to USB-C
Price: $19.99
Buy: Amazon
It’s always a good idea to get another USB-C cable or two, to have around your home. While you probably don’t need one at your office right now, since the majority of us are not actually going to work. It is good to have one in the car and other places around your home.
This is a USB-C to USB-C cable that is capable of USB-C PD speeds, so it can charge your phone pretty quickly too. That’s important in this day and age of fast charging.
Anker Powerline II USB-C to USB-C – Amazon
OnePlus Buds Pro

Price: $119
Buy: OnePlus
The OnePlus Buds are a really great pair of truly wireless headphones from the company. And of course, they work really well with the new OnePlus 11. They also were released in a new radiant silver color that looks incredible.
These earbuds will run for around 5 hours on a charge, or 7 hours with ANC off. And with the included charging case, you can get 38 hours of playback which is pretty incredible.
OnePlus Buds Pro – OnePlus
Fitbit Versa 3
Fitbit Versa 3
Price: $229
Buy: Amazon
The Fitbit Versa 3 is a great fitness tracker to go along with other accessories for your OnePlus 11. Especially if you’re looking to get in shape this year.
The Versa 3 is the latest in the Versa line for Fitbit. It offers up all of the fitness tracking that you’d expect from Fitbit. Including the ability to track your steps, your workouts, calories burned and much more. It can also deliver some notifications to your wrist.
Fitbit Versa 3 – Amazon
Anker PowerPort Atom PD 1
Anker PowerPort Atom PD 1
Price: $27.99
Buy: Amazon
The Anker PowerPort Atom PD 1 is the perfect USB-C PD charger to use with the Pixel 5. While it does still come with one in the box, it never hurts to have a spare somewhere in your home or at work.
This is a 30W charger – and yes, the OnePlus 11 tops out at 80W but this will work on other devices too. It also uses Gallium Nitride or GaN, which makes this charger a lot smaller than you’re probably used too. Which is why we think it is the best option. Since you can easily toss this into your bag when you’re traveling – if we are ever able to do that again.
Anker PowerPort Atom PD 1 – Amazon
Spigen Kuel S40 Stealth Car Mount
Spigen Kuel S40 Stealth Car Mount
Price: $18.99
Buy: Amazon
This is one of the most interesting looking car mounts out there, and it really doesn’t even look like a car mount.
The Spigen Kuel S40 stealth Car Mount is a minimalist car mount for those that don’t want to use magnets. This is a car mount that folds down when it is not in use. Just open it up and stick your phone in the mount, in landscape mode and you are good to go. It’s a good option, because it is fairly small when it is not in use, so that it is not blocking your view of the road all that much.
Spigen offers the Kuel S40 Stealth car mount in only one color. Which is black and blue, so it can blend in with your car a bit more.
Spigen Kuel S40-2 Turbulence Car Mount – Amazon
OnePlus Buds Pro 2

Price: $179
Where to buy: Amazon
The OnePlus Buds 2 Pro are pretty impressive to pick up for the OnePlus 11. It has pretty punchy and powerful bass included. That’s thanks to the 11mm dynamic drivers that allow the acoustics to come to life. OnePlus Audio ID is included here, so you can hear every note in your playlist.
Battery life here is pretty good, lasting around 39 hours of playback. That’s thanks to the included carrying case. And it also has support for High-Res Audio and Google Fast Pair.
OnePlus Buds Pro 2 – Amazon
The post Best OnePlus 11 Accessories appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Dead Cells on mobile is getting a boss rush mode plus free DLC

Dead Cells fans, Playdigious is giving you a special Valentine’s Day treat in the form of a new boss rush mode, coming to the mobile version of the game later this month. In an official announcement today, the game’s mobile development studio lifted the curtain on a new free update that will be launching for the game on February 28.
Included of course, is the new boss rush mode. Which will be available on both the Android and iOS versions of the game. On top of the boss rush mode, the free update also includes the Everyone is Here Vol.2 DLC. Players diving into this content will get access to a handful of new weapons as well as six new outfits. And there are new lore rooms based on popular indie favorites.
What’s more, is that the new weapons coming to the game are based on popular indie titles as well. Players can acquire the Starfury Heavenly Sword from Terraria, Shovel Knight’s King Scepter, and Jacket’s baseball bat from Hotline Miami in addition to weapons from Katana Zero, Risk of Rain, and Slay the Spire.
The Dead Cells boss rush mode adds loads of challenging content
Those who wish for a tougher challenge will want to check out the boss rush mode when the update arrives later this month. Specifically because the enhanced bosses are “ready to kick your ass,” Playdigious says. You can also pass trials to earn gold and cells for the Forge, and acquire various rewards like 8 new skins, a new weapon, a new skill, and a new mutation.
When the update lands on February 28, it will be available through Google Play, and the App Store. If you have Dead Cells through Apple Arcade, the update will be available there too. You can also check out two new trailers highlighting the upcoming content below.

The post Dead Cells on mobile is getting a boss rush mode plus free DLC appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Get ready to pay to watch certain TikToks

TikTok has become quite the cash cow for a bunch of creators over the years, and the company is still looking for more ways for its users to make money. The ByteDance-owned video-sharing app is introducing some more monetization options for users, and this includes paywalled TikToks.
This concept isn’t all that new. Instagram has subscriber-only content. A user can pay a certain fee each month to a creator to see their exclusive content like pictures, videos, Reels, and Stories.
There may be paywalled TikToks in the future
Right now, information on this is still scarce, so you’ll want to take this with a grain of salt. According to The Information (via The Verge), TikTok could let users charge for the ability to watch some of their content. We don’t know too much about how this is going to work just yet, but it’d make sense if it was similar to Instagram’s method.
It looks like the minimum you could pay would be $1 for the content, but the creator might be able to choose how much they want to charge. While having that freedom is neat, putting too high of a price for content is the best way to lose followers. In any case, this will provide another way for people to earn money.
By extension, it’s also another way for the platform to make some extra cash as well. If the company does this, then we see a lot of money for TikTok in the future. There are a ton of well-sought-after creators on the platform, and there are a lot of people who’d gladly pay to watch their videos.
With this, you can bet that people are going to be creating a lot more for the app in order to monetize their content. Now, we have to admit that a fair chunk of the content on TikTok is lewder in nature. This means that we can probably expect there to be an uptick in similar content.
TikToks could change the creator fund
TikTok is also reimagining its creator fund. Back in 2020, the company announced a $1 billion reserve of money to pay creators over three years. While it’s helped many creators finance their obligatory Teslas (or Lamborghinis), many users only gained a few dollars for millions of views.
The company wants to change that, but it doesn’t look like it’s going to create a larger pool of money. From the looks of it, it seems that the company will reduce the number of people who can receive a payout. The company may raise the minimum number of followers to 100,000. Also, it might pay money to people who post longer videos. Most of the “Toks” that we run into are under 1 minute, but the company could reward people who put more time in and makes longer videos.
At this point, it seems that TikTok is only considering this, so we can’t say it’s going to do this for sure.
The post Get ready to pay to watch certain TikToks appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

How to turn on "Light" Performance Mode on Galaxy S23

The Galaxy S23 series has some pretty good battery life this year. That’s partly thanks to the S23 and S23 Plus getting larger batteries (200mAh larger on each), and all three models using the Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 for Galaxy chipset. Which is manufactured by TSMC. TSMC has proven that it can really improve battery life with these chipsets, as we saw on the Snapdragon 8+ Gen 1 last year. Now, what about when you need a bit more juice? Well, Samsung has built-in a mode that can help with that, and it doesn’t really limit your phone.
Many smartphones (if not all) have some sort of battery saver mode. This is generally used when your phone gets really low, and will turn off some features, like the always-on display, lower brightness and such, to last even longer. However, Samsung’s Light mode is not that. Instead, it will slow down the processor speed a bit – Samsung does not disclose the clockspeed while in Light mode. That won’t affect how you use your phone. Since the Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 for Galaxy does run at up to 3.36Ghz, that’s not really needed for most smartphone things. And even the slower performance cores run at 2.8GHz, which is also faster than you really need. So by slowing it down, Samsung is able to improve battery life due to the amount of heat that the phone would produce, but also the power needed by the processor.
This is in addition to the ability to turn down the screen resolution (which is FHD+ by default on all models, though only the Ultra does QHD+), and adjusting the frame-rate. Which is 120Hz on all models, and it can be pushed down to cap at 60Hz. So there’s quite a few things you can do to improve battery life on the Galaxy S23 this year.
What is the Light performance mode?
In simple terms, Light performance mode is a battery saver mode that you can actually leave on all the time without disabling features of your phone. Here’s how Samsung explains it:
Light mode is a function that improves heat generation and battery consumption by changing the processing speed to partially adjust it to improve battery consumption. When operating in light mode, the device can use less performance power compared to normal mode with no impact to internet surfing, social media, phone calls or video playback.
Since it is really only slowing the clock speed of the processor (which is already overclocked, thanks to it using a Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 for Galaxy chipset), it’s not really going to affect the performance of your phone. Unless you’re using some resource intensive apps. Keep in mind that this does not affect gaming at all. So you can still get the full experience of gaming at 120fps on the Galaxy S23, even while using Light Mode.
How to enable the Light performance mode on Galaxy S23
First off, head into the Settings.
Tap on Battery and Device Care.

Next, tap on the Battery section.

From there, scroll down and find More Battery Settings, and tap on it.

On this next screen, you’ll find an option for “Performance Profile”. Tap on that.

Here, you will see two options: Standard and Light. Here’s a brief explanation of the two options:
Standard: Provides the recommended balance between processing speed, battery life and cooling efficiency.
Light: Prioritizes battery life and cooling efficiency over processing speed.
Choose Light, and now you’re all set.
How does this affect day-to-day usage?
It doesn’t really affect day-to-day usage, as it is really just slowing the clockspeed of the processor a bit. For most people you won’t really notice a difference here. Unless you’re opening some intensive apps like Snapchat, YouTube, and others. Though that’s more resource intensive due to the video aspect, and not so much on the processor.
Now what about battery life? How much does it improve it? Well, that’s hard to test, since no two days are the same on battery, but you can get a good 2-3 hours of screen on time on top of the almost 10 hours we normally get on the Galaxy S23 Plus and Ultra (we have not gotten our hands on the regular S23 yet). So it’s a good idea to check this out and see how it works out for you.
The post How to turn on „Light” Performance Mode on Galaxy S23 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Advanced menstrual cycle tracking is coming to the Galaxy Watch 5

The Samsung Galaxy Watch 5 does a great many things for a smartwatch, but advanced menstrual tracking isn’t one of them. That is however changing as today, Samsung announced that it will be adding advanced menstrual cycle tracking to the list of features the Galaxy Watch 5 offers.
Menstrual cycle tracking will be temperature-based which means big changes for the way periods are tracked using the device. Currently, it’s possible to track your period using the Galaxy Watch 5. But the capability is reliant on manual entry of data using the Samsung Health app. This method is less accurate for predictions. Going forward, this can all be done automatically, and the skin temperature tracking should provide a more accurate prediction. Of course, users should have the option to keep this disabled if they prefer.
The advanced tracking feature is powered by Natural Cycles fertility technology, as Samsung partnered with Natural Cycles to bring the feature to the Galaxy Watch 5.
Advanced menstrual cycle tracking will hit the Galaxy Watch 5 soon
This feature isn’t quite available but it will be soon. Samsung says users can expect to access it sometime in the second quarter. That means it’s only a few months away. However, the company doesn’t give an exact date of arrival. When it does launch though it will go live in 32 markets across the globe. This includes the US, UK, Korea, and many other countries across Europe.
Users can access the new temperature-based tracking capabilities from within the Samsung Health app. And it’ll be available on both the Galaxy Watch 5 and Galaxy Watch 5 Pro. The feature will be free to use, although you will need to set up the Samsung Health app initially if you’ve never used it before. For the full list of available countries where the advanced menstrual cycle tracking will be available visit Samsung’s official post.
The post Advanced menstrual cycle tracking is coming to the Galaxy Watch 5 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

What’s next for OSI’s website

The Open Source Initiative moved the website on a new platform, a baby step to improving the list of Approved Licenses. This is a weird announcement as weird was the journey that took us to this point. Let me explain how this is just a milestone for more changes to come.

opensource.org is one of few sites on the internet with a high authority. To confirm that a license has been reviewed and approved as respecting the Open Source Definition, other sites like Wikipedia and search engines refer to OSI’s domain as an ultimate source. Besides licenses, also the minutes of board meetings and announcements published on opensource.org are of tremendous historical value for lawyers, developers, policy makers.

Over the years, dozens of volunteers kept adding material to the website: navigation elements, forms, pages, and blog posts without a unified vision nor unified style guides. Over time, like many websites, opensource.org has become confusing and with an aging design.

When I started as executive director of OSI, the first task on my to-do list was to modernize the website. I wanted to streamline the navigation, improve the content, add consistency to the license pages, and make sure that visitors would find new content as well as historical references. I would have not expected to find so many obstacles and new constraints.

Securing the website

As I started asking for quotes and guidance from experts, I discovered that the website was running on a self-hosted virtual machine with a single, wonderful volunteer maintaining the server. Second problem: the website was running on Drupal 7, which is on life support and upgrading to recent Drupal would require a complete rewrite of the website. There was no path to upgrade ‘in place’.

So the project to renew the website expanded its scope: secure the current site from disasters.

The cost of upgrading Drupal and moving to a fully managed installation proved to be unacceptable for our budget. Since going from Drupal 7 to Drupal 10+ required a full site redesign anyway, we asked the WordPress community if they could help.

We received a very generous response from Automattic: they offered their WP VIP team to design a new opensource.org and port the content from Drupal to WordPress. As OSI was running its board election in Q1 2022, the Automattic team gathered requirements and did a quick assessment.

Breaking the project in multiple steps

In Q2 we sketched a project plan that would give us a new opensource.org by the end of Q4 2022, at no cost.

As the development of the new website started, we decided to spin off the blog on WordPress and create a new minisite for the Deep Dive: AI online event, with the intention of merging those back into the main site once on WordPress.

The rough timeline for the website migration

Laying the foundation for basic content improvements

Our priority was to sunset the self-hosted Drupal site as quickly as possible with a “lift-and-shift” of the pages to WP. We chose to avoid making radical changes to pages and navigation to speed up the process. We planned only three improvements:

Lay the foundation for an improved list of licenses that have a similar appearance and the same set of metadata. Currently on Drupal we have a custom node type for “License” but not every license page uses it: some are simply Pages, others are type Blog, resulting in an inconsistent look. The new site has all the licenses in a Custom Post Type with metadata: Category, Version, Release Date, SPDX Identifier, License steward, Approval date, Link to Board minutes, Canonical URL, leaving space to add more details like tags. You can see it in action, with a dedicated search.Create workflows to help manage the board elections, simplifying the election process, build a list of current board members, history of candidates and alumni automatically. You can see this in action, too. And once elections start, you’ll see the rest.Improve how we keep the board meeting minutes. Board minutes contain a lot of relevant decisions, not only about license approvals. They should be standardized and searchable in the same place where the licenses are kept. You can partially see this in action with the minutes only until 2020. The most recent minutes are in the wiki and will be transferred.

Another unexpected roadblock

We discovered late in the project that we couldn’t take CiviCRM with us on the new hosting provider because its MySQL configuration didn’t have some necessary permissions. We should have found out earlier but we only discovered this in November 2022.

CiviCRM is how we handle membership, donations, newsletters, engagement with sponsors and donors and ultimately it’s the core of how we manage elections.  We faced the hard choice: delay the migration indefinitely in order to find a replacement for CiviCRM or build a workaround. We went for the workaround of running CiviCRM on a separate WordPress managed by DreamHost. We spent December ‘22 and January ‘23 getting members.opensource.org up and running with CiviCRM.

What comes next and how you can help

The content was simply lifted and shifted from Drupal to WordPress and many pages look exactly like that. License pages are missing metadata like its steward, or the SPDX identifier or they just look weird.

We’re looking for volunteers to sift through the board minutes and carefully check that the approved licenses have all the metadata available. We have a small budget to dedicate to this task, too. If you are or know someone who is obsessed with quality and passionate about good record keeping, please reach out.

Also, we know for sure that some pages may not look good and there may be broken links.  In general, if you find any issue on the new website, please file an issue.

At this point we’re enjoying not having to hope the virtual server wouldn’t crash over the weekend or that the old Drupal site would be vandalized. The new website is still a maze to navigate and relevant information is hard to find. We’ll address this in phase 2 of the project: the redesign.

The team at Automattic has been fantastic and we’re grateful for the donation of labor and free hosting. We now have a modern platform upon which we can build the next generation of OSI.

Source: opensource.org

The 15-inch MacBook Air is coming in April

It appears that the new 15-inch MacBook Air is set to be announced in April. This is based on information released by display industry analyst Ross Young. Who has said that the display production for this model is underway.
The April time-frame doesn’t sound as crazy as you might think. Apple does typically have an event around March/April to announce their Spring products. Usually including a new color for the iPhone (purple and green in recent years), along with new spring bands for the Apple Watch and some other features. So to see the 15-inch MacBook Air announced here would not be a surprised.
People want a larger MacBook Air
Currently, with the Apple Silicon transition, Apple is actually missing a spot in their laptop lineup. Those that want something larger than a 14-inch laptop, have to pony up and buy the 16-inch MacBook Pro with a M2 Pro chipset inside, which is close to $3,000. But what about an entry-level type laptop, with a 15-inch display? That’s what the MacBook Air 15 could really solve for Apple. And it could even be under $2,000. Especially since it would use the M2 most likely.
With it coming in April, we could see it sticking with the M2, or jumping to the M3. Apparently, the M3 is just about ready, and it is going to be on the next-generation 3nm process from TSMC. Whereas the M2 is really just a critiqued version of the M1. So it’s more of a stop-gap for Apple.
Now there’s also the chance that Apple could opt to announce this at WWDC in June. Sometimes Apple does unveil hardware there, but not all of the time. It’s every once in a while, but that is likely where the new Mac Pro will be announced, the last Mac that needs Apple Silicon.
The post The 15-inch MacBook Air is coming in April appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

iOS 17: Everything you need to know

Apple is gearing up to announce iOS 17 at WWDC in June, as it typically does. At WWDC, we’ll get new versions of every operating system that Apple has. That includes iOS 17, iPad OS 17, Watch OS 10, and macOS 14. But today, we’re going to focus on everything that’s coming in iOS 17 later this year. Like what features are we getting? When is the first beta coming? When will it roll out to everyone? and much more.
When will iOS 17 be announced?
iOS 17 will most likely be officially announced at WWDC (WorldWide Developer’s Conference) in June. That’s Apple’s annual developer conference, which is typically focused on software, but we do sometimes get some new hardware there too. Now, we say “most likely” for WWDC because there is always that chance that it could be announced earlier or later. However, Apple has always announced the new version of iOS at WWDC, since it was iPhoneOS.
With the announcement of iOS 17, Apple will also go over a bunch of new features being added to the update. As well as releasing the first developer beta that same day. The public beta typically launches a month or two later.

When can I download the iOS 17 beta?
There’s two answers to this question actually. If you’re a registered developer, you’ll be able to download it after the WWDC keynote in June. Apple has not yet announced the dates for WWDC, so we don’t know specifically what day that will be just yet.
Now, if you’re not a registered developer, you’ll still be able to download the Public Beta. Which Apple does typically launch about a month after the developer beta. So you can expect that in July, or August at the latest.
How many beta’s will there be?
Unlike Google, Apple doesn’t lay out the beta timeline, telling us exactly how many beta releases there will be. But for Apple, typically they start out at about once a month, and as it gets more polish, Apple will update a bit more often. In August, you could see a beta followed by a release candidate in a week’s time. Which is probably the better way to do it.
What features are coming in iOS 17?
Even though a report from Bloomberg noted that we won’t see a lot of new features in iOS 17 (or any of the other usual OS updates), due to Apple focusing more on xrOS for their AR/VR headset, there’s still quite a few features coming to iOS 17. And at this point, iOS is still a pretty mature operating system, so there’s really not a lot that can be added these days. But here are the features that are rumored.
Alternative App Stores
Finally, alternative App Stores are coming to iPhone. But that’s not Apple’s decision. The EU is once again putting its nose where it doesn’t belong, and forcing Apple to open up the iPhone. In addition to forcing the iPhone to add USB-C, the EU also wants Apple to allow alternative App Stores. Now does that mean we’ll get a competitor to the Apple App Store on the iPhone? Probably not. It’ll likely be more like App Stores like Epic’s Store, where you can download games directly from Epic.
This is part of Europe’s Digital Markets Act, which doesn’t actually go into effect until 2024, but reports have said that this is already being put into iOS 17. But it might not roll out til iOS 17.1 or 17.2. As it’s not enforceable until March 2024.
In addition to that, the EU is also reportedly trying to force Apple to allow sideloading apps. That’s something that we’ve had on Android for years (and honestly, I can’t remember the last time I used it). That could spell disaster for Apple, with a lot of people downloading apps full of malware to go onto their iPhones. But we shall see.

Revamped CarPlay
Last year, Apple showed off a revamped CarPlay, which looked really incredible. Apple called it the “next generation of CarPlay”. Which allows the OS to take over multiple screens in your vehicle. So that it’s not stuck with just a single 7-12″ display. That allows it to show you more things in your vehicle.
When this was announced, Apple said that the first vehicles to support the next-generation CarPlay would be announced in late 2023. It’s pretty likely that it’ll need iOS 17 for that. So we should hear more about it at WWDC in June. Apple has also said that automakers that have committed to this new CarPlay include:
Land Rover
Support for Apple’s AR/VR headset
This is the elephant in the room right now. The AR/VR Headset has been rumored for many, many years now. But it seems very possible that this will be coming in 2023. Recently, we heard that the AR/VR Headset was pushed back to the beginning of Q3 2023. Which makes it very likely that this would be announced at WWDC (just a couple weeks before Q3 starts), and released a bit later on.
That also likely means that iOS 17 is going to bring support for the Apple AR/VR Headset, and possibly some other cool features.
Will my iPhone get iOS 17?
Apple has a better track record than all Android OEMs when it comes to updating their phones. And while we won’t know for sure which iPhones are getting updated until WWDC in June, we do have a good idea. These are the iPhones we believe will get updated to iOS 17:
iPhone 15
iPhone 14
iPhone 13
iPhone 12
iPhone 11
iPhone Xs
iPhone XR
iPhone X
iPhone SE (2020)
iPhone SE (2022)
Apple also generally releases iOS for every model on the same day. So you won’t need to wait around for the update to come to your device. That’s something we have to do on Android, unfortunately.
The post iOS 17: Everything you need to know appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Opera is integrating ChatGPT in its browser with Shorten

As the new era of browser wars continues to rage on with search giants like Google and Microsoft making their own AI chatbots, Opera is also making a big bet on artificial intelligence with the latest announcement of a new feature called “Shorten,” which uses the power of ChatGPT to generate summaries of webpages and articles.
With the addition of Shorten, Opera users will now have access to a bulleted summary of the webpage they’re looking at by simply tapping an icon located to the right of the address bar. However, Jan Standel, VP of marketing and communications, did not specify when the feature will be available when talking to The Verge. He did mention that the company is working on other ways to enhance the Opera experience with artificial intelligence. But the exact details of these additions have not been disclosed yet.
“We are excited to see the rapid roll-out of developer programs for solutions such as Google Bard, for example, and are starting to build and roll out new experiences in web browsing that not very long ago seemed impossible to achieve,” said Per Wetterdal, Opera’s head of strategic partnerships and AI.
Increasing competition in the browser market
Ever since the launch of AI tools like ChatGPT and Microsoft’s announcement of its integration into its Bing browser, search engine giants like Google, for the first time in decades, are fearing their domination. This move by Opera to incorporate AI into its browser comes in the same week when Microsoft started accepting invitations to preview the redesigned Edge browser with an “AI-powered copilot” that will be able to summarize web pages.
In response to this competition, Google also unveiled its own AI chatbot named Bard, powered by LaMDA (Language Model for Dialogue Applications). However, Bard’s debut was less than ideal as it gave an inaccurate response in the company’s demonstration, resulting in a drop in Alphabet’s stock by over 8% and a loss of $100 billion in market value in a single day.
The post Opera is integrating ChatGPT in its browser with Shorten appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Oath of Peak is a true Xianxia MMORPG available now on iOS and Android

If you’re a fan of the Xianxia style of MMORPG, the brand new Oath of Peak is well worth checking out on iOS and Android right now. And with a Valentine’s Day event taking place as you read this, now is the best time to get involved.
But what is it? Well, it’s an oriental fantasy MMORPG that draws inspiration from the classic Chinese story, The Classic of Mountains and Seas. You may know it better as Shan Hai Jing, but if not it’s a classic Xianxia work – a type of Chinese fantasy.
You play as a Spirit Bender who has to explore the fantastical world of the Omnispirit Continent, taming the world’s creatures along the way. Pretty much any creature you encounter can be tamed, and they include fantasy beasts like the Kirin.
A Spirit Beast sealed successfully
There are five different classes to choose from too, which are based on your favourite MMORPG roles of tank, support, and DPS. That ties nicely into the group content, which spans across PVE and PVP.
If PVP is your bag, then the guild system will appeal to you. You can join a guild with your friends, then head out into the world to battle other guilds in GVG.
That’s without mentioning a lengthy single player campaign. The game is full of content to tackle, be it the exploring the world, capturing monsters, or participating in PVP.
Character Creation
The game was developed by Cangaming Net, who is well known for Xianxia-style games. In fact, you may have already played one of its titles. A Chinese Ghost Story, its most popular release to date, has amassed a whopping 18 million downloads since launch.
Oath of Peak is off to a good start as well. Over 200k players played during the open beta period, before a whopping 500k signed up for pre-registration. Since launch, Oath of Peak has achieved over 500k downloads from the Asia-Pacific region alone.
Valentine s Day gift package
But now is possibly the best time to get started, with a Valentine’s Day event kicking off. You can head on over to the in-game shop to purchase a special new Hare outfit that is available for 4 days.
If you like the sound of Oath of Peak, we recommend grabbing it on App Store or Google Play. You can also keep an eye out for updates on the official website as well as its Facebook and Twitter pages.
The post Oath of Peak is a true Xianxia MMORPG available now on iOS and Android appeared first on Android Headlines.

Source: ndroidheadlines.com

Phone Comparisons: OnePlus 11 vs Google Pixel 7 Pro

The OnePlus 11 is a brand new smartphone at this point. It’s the best OnePlus has to offer, and we continue our series of comparisons with the best of Google. In this article, we’ll compare the OnePlus 11 vs Google Pixel 7 Pro. The Pixel 7 Pro arrived in September last year, and it’s currently Google’s flagship. It’s considered by many to be one of the best, if not the best camera smartphone for stills. It will be interesting to see how the OnePlus 11 compares to that, amongst other things.
As per usual, we’ll first list the spec sheets of both phones, and will then move to a number of other sections. We’ll compare their designs, displays, performance, battery life, cameras, and audio performance. There’s a lot to talk about here, so, let’s get started with the comparison, shall we?

OnePlus 11
Google Pixel 7 Pro
Screen size
6.7-inch QHD+ LTPO3 Fluid AMOLED display (120Hz refresh rate, curved, 1,300 nits peak brightness, LTPO down to 1Hz)
6.7-inch QHD+ curved OLED LTPO display (120Hz refresh rate, 1,500 nits peak brightness)
Screen resolution
3216 x 1440
3120 x 1440
Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Gen 2
Google Tensor G2
128GB/256GB, non-expandable (UFS 4.0)
128GB/256GB/512GB, non-expandable (UFS 3.1)
Rear cameras
50MP (f/1.8 aperture, 1.0um pixel size, OIS, multi-directional PDAF)
48MP (ultrawide, f/2.2 aperture, 115-degree FoV, AF)
32MP (telephoto, f/2.0 aperture, 2x optical zoom, PDAF)
50MP (Samsung ISOCELL GN1 sensor, 1.2um pixel size, f/1.85 aperture, 82-degree FoV)
12MP (ultrawide, 1.25um pixel size, f/2.2 aperture, 125.8-degree FoV, lens correction)
48MP (telephoto, 0.7um pixel size, f/3.5 aperture, 20.6-degree FoV, 5x optical zoom, Super Res Zoom up to 30x)
Front cameras
16MP (f/2.5 aperture, 25mm lens, 1.0um pixel size)
10.8MP (1.22um pixel size, f/2.2 aperture, 92.8-degree FoV, Fixed Focus)
5,000mAh, non-removable, 100W wired (80W in the US) charging
Charger included
5,000mAh, non-removable, 23W wired charging, 23W wireless charging, reverse wireless charger
Charger not included
163.1 x 74.1 x 8.5mm
162.9 x 76.6 x 8.9mm
205 grams
212 grams
5G, LTE, NFC, Bluetooth 5.3, Wi-Fi, USB Type-C
5G, LTE, NFC, Bluetooth 5.2, Wi-Fi, USB Type-C
Face scanning (front camera)
In-display fingerprint scanner (optical)
Face Unlock
In-display fingerprint scanner (optical)
Android 13
OxygenOS 13
Android 13
OnePlus 11 vs Google Pixel 7 Pro: Design
The moment you lay your eyes on these two phones, you’ll notice considerable differences design-wise. They both have curved glass on the front and back, with a frame made out of aluminum in between. That’s basically where the similarities end, though. Both phones do have curved displays, with display camera holes. Those hole punches are placed in different spots, though. The one on the OnePlus 11 is in the top-left corner, while the Pixel 7 Pro has a centered one, up top.
The bezels are thin on both phones, while their backplates look entirely different, thanks to different camera setups. The OnePlus 11 has three cameras on the back, placed inside a circular camera island. That module sits in the top-left corner. The Pixel 7 Pro has a large camera strip on the back, which goes from the left to the right side, all the way. There are three cameras included in it.
The OnePlus 11 is slightly taller, and a bit narrower than the Pixel 7 Pro. It’s also slightly thinner (less than a 1mm difference). The OnePlus 11 weighs 205 grams, while the Pixel 7 Pro weighs 212 grams. The OnePlus 11 has Gorilla Glass 5 on its back, while the Pixel 7 Pro has Gorilla Glass Victus. Both phones are quite large, and quite slippery at the same time. They’re both fairly difficult to use with one hand, but the Pixel 7 Pro more so, due to its width. Using a case with both of them is a good idea. They do both feel good in the hand, though, and feel premium.
OnePlus 11 vs Google Pixel 7 Pro: Display
The OnePlus 11 features a 6.7-inch QHD+ (3216 x 1440) LTPO3 Fluid AMOLED display. This is a 120Hz panel, and it offers an adaptive refresh rate. It supports HDR10+ content, and gets up to 1,300 nits of peak brightness. We’re looking at a 20:9 aspect ratio here, and this display is protected by the Gorilla Glass Victus. The ppi is 525, in case you were wondering, and yes, this panel is curved.

The Pixel 7 Pro, on the flip side, has a 6.7-inch QHD+ (3120 x 1440) LTPO AMOLED display. It also offers an adaptive refresh rate of up to 120Hz, and supports HDR10+ content. This display gets a bit brighter than the OnePlus 11’s, as it can reach 1,500 nits at its peak. The display has a 19.5:9 aspect ratio, and it’s protected by the Gorilla Glass Victus. The ppi here is 512.
The bottom line is, both of these displays look really nice. They’re sharp, vivid, and have good viewing angles, The touch response is also quite good. You may notice the extra 200 nits of brightness under direct sunlight, from the Pixel 7 Pro, but in every other situation, 1,300 nits will be more than enough. The point is, both displays are excellent, and unless you’re really a nitpicker, you’ll be happy with either one. They’re smooth, well optimized, and offer those deep blacks as well. One thing to note is that the Pixel 7 Pro has better auto brightness.
OnePlus 11 vs Google Pixel 7 Pro: Performance
The Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 fuels the OnePlus 11, Qualcomm’s most powerful SoC to date. The phone also includes up to 16GB of LPDDR5X RAM and UFS 4.0 storage (the 128GB model has UFS 3.1). The Pixel 7 Pro, on the other hand, is fueled by the Google Tensor G2 SoC. It comes with 12GB of LPDDR5 RAM, and UFS 3.1 flash storage in all models. On paper, the OnePlus 11 is more powerful.
In day-to-day use, however, the difference in sheer power are not exactly noticeable. The Pixel 7 Pro does have great specs too, and it’s really well optimized. No matter if you’re browsing, consuming multimedia, processing images, or doing something else entirely, both phones can keep up without a problem. You will see a difference in gaming, though, if you’re playing more demanding games. The OnePlus 11 will do better than the Pixel 7 Pro in such situations. The Tensor G2 is not that great with intensive games. Both phones do get quite warm during longer gaming sessions, but the heat doesn’t directly impact performance. It’s not that excessive or anything like that.
OnePlus 11 vs Google Pixel 7 Pro: Battery
Both of these smartphones include a 5,000mAh battery pack. Considering that they have the same display sizes, and somewhat similar display types, you may assume that they offer similar battery life. Well, that’s not exactly true. The OnePlus 11 does do a lot better in the battery department. The Snapdragon 8 Gen 2